Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
DEPARTMENT
OF
TRANSPORTATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE
CONSTRUCTION
JANUARY 2016
These Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, January 2016, are hereby approved for application on highway and related
construction contracts as referenced in the contract plans or specifications, and they shall
apply as noted and amended by those documents.
________________________________________________
The official record of this document is the electronic file signed and sealed under Rule
61G15-23.003, F.A.C.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION I
BASE COURSES
200 Rock Base ............................................................................................................ 208
204 Graded Aggregate Base ....................................................................................... 216
210 Reworking Limerock Base .................................................................................. 219
iii
230 Limerock Stabilized Base .................................................................................... 221
234 Superpave Asphalt Base ...................................................................................... 223
283 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base ..................................................................... 226
285 Optional Base Course .......................................................................................... 228
286 Turnout Construction ........................................................................................... 231
287 Asphalt Treated Permeable Base ......................................................................... 233
288 Cement Treated Permeable Base ......................................................................... 238
290 Granular Subbase ................................................................................................. 242
STRUCTURES
400 Concrete Structures .............................................................................................. 367
407 Three-Sided Precast Concrete Culvert ................................................................. 406
410 Precast Concrete Box Culvert .............................................................................. 413
411 Epoxy Injection of Cracks in Concrete Structures............................................... 421
413 Sealing Cracks and Concrete Structure Surfaces ................................................. 424
415 Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................. 431
416 Installation of Post-Installed Anchor Systems and Dowels .......................................
for Structural Applications in Concrete Elements ............................................... 437
425 Inlets, Manholes, and Junction Boxes ................................................................. 440
430 Pipe Culverts ........................................................................................................ 443
431 Pipe Liner ............................................................................................................. 455
435 Structural Plate Pipe and Pipe Arch Culverts ...................................................... 457
436 Trench Drain ........................................................................................................ 459
440 Underdrains .......................................................................................................... 461
443 French Drains ....................................................................................................... 463
446 Edgedrain (Draincrete) ........................................................................................ 465
449 Precast Concrete Drainage Products .................................................................... 467
450 Precast Prestressed Concrete Construction .......................................................... 472
iv
451 Prestressed Soil Anchors ..................................................................................... 501
452 Precast Segmental Bridge Construction .............................................................. 516
453 Epoxy Jointing of Precast Segments .................................................................... 532
455 Structures Foundations ........................................................................................ 538
458 Bridge Deck Joints ............................................................................................... 603
459 Bitumen Coating and Polyethylene Sheeting on Concrete Piles ......................... 611
460 Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals .......................................................... 613
461 Multirotational Bearings ...................................................................................... 640
462 Post-Tensioning ................................................................................................... 643
470 Timber Structures ................................................................................................ 673
471 Fiber Reinforced Polymer Fender Systems ......................................................... 676
INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION
502 Shear Connectors ................................................................................................. 679
504 Steel Grid Floors .................................................................................................. 684
506 Bridge Drainage System ...................................................................................... 686
510 Navigation Lights for Fixed Bridges ................................................................... 687
514 Plastic Filter Fabric (Geotextile).......................................................................... 692
520 Concrete Gutter, Curb Elements and Traffic Separator ....................................... 694
521 Concrete Barriers, Traffic Railing Barriers and Parapets .................................... 697
522 Concrete Sidewalk and Driveways ...................................................................... 700
523 Patterned Pavement.............................................................................................. 702
524 Concrete Ditch and Slope Pavement ................................................................... 705
525 Asphalt Concrete Curb......................................................................................... 707
526 Architectural Pavers ............................................................................................. 708
527 Detectable Warnings ............................................................................................ 710
530 Revetment Systems .............................................................................................. 712
534 Noise and Perimeter Walls .................................................................................. 720
536 Guardrail .............................................................................................................. 723
538 Resetting Guardrail .............................................................................................. 728
544 Crash Cushions .................................................................................................... 730
546 Rumble Strips ...................................................................................................... 731
548 Retaining Wall Systems ....................................................................................... 733
550 Fencing................................................................................................................. 746
555 Directional Bore ................................................................................................... 750
556 Jack and Bore ....................................................................................................... 755
560 Coating New Structural Steel .............................................................................. 764
561 Coating Existing Structural Steel ......................................................................... 770
562 Repair of Galvanized Surfaces ............................................................................ 778
563 Anti-Graffiti Coatings .......................................................................................... 779
570 Performance Turf ................................................................................................. 781
571 Plastic Erosion Mat .............................................................................................. 786
v
611 Acceptance Procedures for Traffic Control Signals and Devices........................ 792
620 Grounding and Lightning Protection ................................................................... 797
630 Conduit................................................................................................................. 804
632 Signal Cable ......................................................................................................... 812
633 Communication Cable ......................................................................................... 814
634 Span Wire Assembly ........................................................................................... 824
635 Pull, Splice, and Junction Boxes .......................................................................... 828
639 Electrical Power Service Assemblies .................................................................. 833
641 Prestressed Concrete Poles .................................................................................. 836
646 Aluminum Poles, Pedestals, and Posts ................................................................ 841
649 Galvanized Steel Poles, Mast Arms and Monotube Assemblies ......................... 843
650 Vehicular Traffic Signal Assemblies ................................................................... 849
653 Pedestrian Signal Assemblies .............................................................................. 855
654 Midblock Crosswalk Enhancement Assemblies .................................................. 858
659 Mast Arm, Span Wire, and Pole Mounting Assemblies ...................................... 861
660 Vehicle Detection System .................................................................................... 867
663 Signal Priority and Preemption Systems ............................................................. 883
665 Pedestrian Detection System ............................................................................... 886
670 Traffic Controller Assemblies ............................................................................. 890
671 Traffic Controllers ............................................................................................... 891
676 Traffic Cabinets ................................................................................................... 892
677 Equipment Shelter................................................................................................ 912
678 Traffic Controller Accessories ............................................................................. 917
680 System Control Equipment .................................................................................. 919
682 Video Equipment ................................................................................................. 921
684 Network Devices.................................................................................................. 932
685 Traffic Control System Auxiliaries...................................................................... 942
687 Highway Advisory Radio .................................................................................... 945
695 Traffic Monitoring Site Equipment and Materials ............................................... 950
vi
902 Fine Aggregate ................................................................................................... 1022
FLEXIBLE-PAVEMENT MATERIALS
(INCLUDING MATERIALS FOR STABILIZING)
911 Base and Stabilized Base Materials ................................................................... 1026
914 Stabilization Materials ....................................................................................... 1029
916 Bituminous Materials ......................................................................................... 1030
917 Mineral Filler ..................................................................................................... 1034
919 Ground Tire Rubber for Use in Asphalt Rubber Binder .................................... 1035
DRAINAGE MATERIALS
942 Precast Concrete Pipe Gaskets ........................................................................... 1086
943 Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arch (Including Underdrain) .......................... 1088
944 Structural Plate Steel Pipe and Pipe Arch .......................................................... 1091
945 Aluminum Pipe, Including Underdrain, Pipe Arch and.............................................
Structural Plate Pipe and Pipe Arch ................................................................... 1093
946 Cast Iron Pipe..................................................................................................... 1095
948 Optional Drainage Products and Liner Repair Systems .................................... 1096
949 Miscellaneous Components for Manholes, Inlets and Other Structures ............ 1104
vii
954 Timber Fence Posts and Braces ......................................................................... 1109
955 Timber Treatment (Including Treating Materials)............................................. 1111
viii
DIVISION I
General Requirements and Covenants
SECTION 1
DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
1-1 General.
These Specifications are written to the bidder, prior to award of the Contract, and to the
Contractor. Within Divisions I and II of the specifications, sentences that direct the Contractor to
perform work are written in the active voice-imperative mood. These directions to the Contractor
are written as commands. In the imperative mood, the subject “the bidder” or “the Contractor” is
understood.
All other requirements to be performed by others, with the exception of the Method of
Measurement and the Basis of Payment Articles, have been written in the active voice, but not in
the imperative mood. Sentences written in the active voice identify the party responsible for
performing the action. For example, “The Engineer will determine the density of the compacted
material.” Certain requirements of the Contractor may also be written in the active voice, rather
than active voice-imperative mood.
Division III of the Specifications (Materials) is written in the passive voice writing style.
1-2 Abbreviations.
The following abbreviations, when used in the Contract Documents, represent the full
text shown.
AAN American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGC The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc.
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AIA American Institute of Architects.
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.
AREA American Railway Engineering Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWG American Wire Gauge
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
EASA Electrical Apparatus Service Association
EPA Environmental Protection Agency of the United States Government
FDOT Florida Department of Transportation
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FSS Federal Specifications and Standards
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
1-3 Definitions.
The following terms, when used in the Contract Documents, have the meaning described
Advertisement.
The public announcement, as required by law, inviting bids for work to be performed or
materials to be furnished, usually issued as “Notice to Contractors,” or “Notice to Bidders.”
Article.
The numbered prime subdivision of a Section of these Specifications.
Bidder.
An individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for the proposed work.
Bridge.
A structure, including supports, erected over a depression or over an obstruction such as
water, highway or railway, or for elevated roadway, for carrying traffic or other moving loads,
and having a length, measured along the center of the roadway, of more than 20 feet between the
inside faces of end supports. A multiple-span box culvert is considered a bridge, where the
length between the extreme ends of the openings exceeds 20 feet.
Calendar day.
Every day shown on the calendar, ending and beginning at midnight.
Contract.
The term “Contract” means the entire and integrated agreement between the parties
thereunder and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or
oral. The Contract Documents form the Contract between the Department and the Contractor
Contract Documents.
The term “Contract Documents” includes: Advertisement for Proposal, Proposal,
Certification as to Publication and Notice of Advertisement for Proposal, Appointment of Agent
by Nonresident Contractors, Noncollusion Affidavit, Warranty Concerning Solicitation of the
Contract by Others, Resolution of Award of Contract, Executed Form of Contract, Performance
Bond and Payment Bond, Specifications, Plans (including revisions thereto issued during
construction), Addenda, or other information mailed or otherwise transmitted to the prospective
bidders prior to the receipt of bids, work orders and supplemental agreements, all of which are to
be treated as one instrument whether or not set forth at length in the form of contract.
Note: As used in Sections 2 and 3 only, Contract Documents do not include work orders,
and supplementary agreements. As used in Section 2 only, Contract Documents also do not
include Resolution of Award of Contract, Executed Form of Contract, and Performance and
Payment Bond.
Contract Bond.
The security furnished by the Contractor and the surety as a guaranty that the Contractor
shall fulfill the terms of the Contract and pay all legal debts pertaining to the construction of the
project.
Contract Letting.
The date that the Department opened the bid proposals.
Contract Time.
The number of calendar days allowed for completion of the Contract work, including
authorized time extensions.
Contractor.
The individual, firm, joint venture, or company contracting with the Department to
perform the work.
Culverts.
Any structure not classified as a bridge that provides an opening under the roadway.
Delay.
Any unanticipated event, action, force or factor which extends the Contractor’s time of
performance of any controlling work item under the Contract. The term “delay” is intended to
cover all such events, actions, forces or factors, whether styled “delay”, “disruption”,
“interference”, “impedance”, “hindrance”, or otherwise, which are beyond the control of and not
caused by the Contractor, or the Contractor’s subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or other
agents. This term does not include “extra work”.
Department.
State of Florida Department of Transportation.
Developmental Specification.
See definition for Specifications.
Engineer.
The Director, Office of Construction, acting directly or through duly authorized
representatives; such representatives acting within the scope of the duties and authority assigned
to them.
Note: In order to avoid cumbersome and confusing repetition of expressions in these
Specifications, it is provided that whenever anything is, or is to be done, if, as, or, when, or
where “acceptable, accepted, approval, approved, authorized, condemned, considered necessary,
contemplated, deemed necessary, designated, determined, directed, disapproved, established,
given, indicated, insufficient, ordered, permitted, rejected, required, reserved, satisfactory,
specified, sufficient, suitable, suspended, unacceptable, or unsatisfactory,” it shall be understood
as if the expression were followed by the words “by the Engineer,” “to the Engineer,” or “of the
Engineer.”
Equipment.
The machinery and equipment, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and
maintenance thereof, and all other tools and apparatus necessary for the construction and
acceptable completion of the work.
Extra Work.
Any “work” which is required by the Engineer to be performed and which is not
otherwise covered or included in the project by the existing Contract Documents, whether it be
in the nature of additional work, altered work, deleted work, work due to differing site
conditions, or otherwise. This term does not include a “delay”.
Holidays.
Days designated by the State Legislature or Cabinet as holidays, which include, but are
not limited to, New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King’s Birthday, Memorial Day, Independence
Day, Labor Day, Veterans’ Day, Thanksgiving Day and the following Friday, and Christmas
Day.
Inspector.
An authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to make official inspections of the
materials furnished and of the work performed by the Contractor.
Laboratory.
The official testing laboratory used by the Department.
Materials.
Any substances to be incorporated in the work under the Contract.
Plans.
The approved Plans, including reproductions thereof, showing the location, character,
dimensions, and details of the work.
Proposal Form.
The official form or the expedite program generated bid item sheets on which the
Department requires formal bids to be prepared and submitted for the work.
Proposal Guaranty
The security furnished by the bidder as guaranty that the bidder will enter into the
Contract for the work if the Department accepts the proposal.
Right-of-Way.
The land that the Department has title to, or right of use, for the road and its structures
and appurtenances, and for material pits furnished by the Department.
Roadbed.
The portion of the roadway occupied by the subgrade and shoulders.
Roadway.
The portion of a highway within the limits of construction.
Secretary.
Secretary of Transportation, State of Florida Department of Transportation, acting
directly or through an assistant or other representative authorized by him; the chief officer of the
Department of Transportation.
Section.
A numbered prime division of these Specifications.
Special Event.
Any event, including but not limited to, a festival, fair, run or race, motorcade, parade,
civic activity, cultural activity, charity or fund drive, sporting event, or similar activity
designated in the Contract Documents.
Special Provisions.
See definition for Specifications.
Specifications.
The directions, provisions, and requirements contained herein, together with all
stipulations contained in the Contract Documents, setting out or relating to the method and
manner of performing the work, or to the quantities and qualities of materials and labor to be
furnished under the Contract.
Standard Specifications: “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction” an electronic book, applicable to all Department Contracts containing adopted
requirements, setting out or relating to the method or manner of performing work, or to the
quantities and qualities of materials and labor.
Supplemental Specifications: Approved additions and revisions to the Standard
Specifications, applicable to all Department Contracts.
Special Provisions: Specific clauses adopted by the Department that add to or
revise the Standard Specifications or supplemental specifications, setting forth conditions
varying from or additional to the Standard Specifications applicable to a specific project.
Technical Special Provisions: Specifications, of a technical nature, prepared,
signed, and sealed by an Engineer registered in the State of Florida other than the State
Specifications Engineer or his designee, that are made part of the Contract as an attachment to
the Contract Documents.
Developmental Specification: A specification developed around a new process,
procedure, or material.
Standard Specifications.
See definition for Specifications.
State.
State of Florida.
Subarticle.
A headed and numbered subdivision of an Article of a Section of these Specifications.
Substructure.
All of that part of a bridge structure below the bridge seats, including the parapets,
backwalls, and wingwalls of abutments.
Superintendent.
The Contractor’s authorized representative in responsible charge of the work.
Superstructure.
The entire bridge structure above the substructure, including anchorage and anchor bolts,
but excluding the parapets, backwalls, and wingwalls of abutments.
Supplemental Agreement
A written agreement between the Contractor and the Department, and signed by the
surety, modifying the Contract within the limitations set forth in these Specifications.
Supplemental Specifications
See definition for Specifications.
Surety.
The corporate body that is bound by the Contract Bond with and for the Contractor and
responsible for the performance of the Contract and for payment of all legal debts pertaining
thereto.
Traveled Way.
The portion of the roadway providing for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of
shoulders and auxiliary lanes.
Unilateral Payment.
A payment of money made to the Contractor by the Department pursuant to
Section 337.11(12), Florida Statutes (2009), for sums the Department determines to be due to the
Contractor for work performed on the project, and whereby the Contractor by acceptance of such
payment does not waive any rights the Contractor may otherwise have against the Department
for payment of any additional sums the Contractor claims are due for the work.
Work Order.
A written agreement between the Contractor and the Department modifying the Contract
within the limitations set forth in these Specifications. Funds for this agreement are drawn
against the Initial Contingency Pay Item or a Contingency Supplemental Agreement.
Working Day.
Any calendar day on which the Contractor works or is expected to work in accordance
with the approved work progress schedule.
2-2 Proposals.
2-2.1 Obtaining Proposals: Obtain a proposal under the conditions stipulated in the
Advertisement. The proposal states the location and description of the work to be performed; the
estimate of the various quantities (if applicable); the items of work to be performed (if
applicable); the Contract Time; the amount of proposal guaranty; and the date, time, and place of
the opening of proposals.
The Plans, Specifications and other documents designated in the proposal are part
of the proposal, whether attached or not.
Upon receipt of a proposal order, the Department will provide a computer diskette
or CD-ROM for use on a personal computer that is suitable for preparing the bid. This diskette or
CD-ROM contains the Expedite Proposal file to be used by the Contractor to prepare the bid and
print a proposal form for submittal.
The Department is not responsible for loss of or damage to a diskette or CD-ROM
after it has been mailed or delivered to the bidder. If loss or damage occurs, the bidder may order
another diskette or CD-ROM.
As C
Ds
B
The subcontractor may receive compensation for any premium for acquiring a bond for the
additional or unforeseen work; provided, however, that such payment for additional
subcontractor bond will only be paid upon presentment to the Department of clear and
convincing proof that the subcontractor has actually provided and paid for separate bond
premiums for such additional or unforeseen work in such amount and that the subcontractor was
required by the Contractor to acquire a bond.
The Contractor shall require the subcontractor to provide a certification, in
accordance with 4-3.2.1 (1), as part of the cost proposal and provide such to the Engineer. Such
certification must be made by an officer or director of the subcontractor with authority to bind
the subcontractor. Timely certification is a condition precedent to any right of the Contractor to
recover compensation for such subcontractor costs, and failure to timely submit the certification
will constitute a full, complete, absolute and irrevocable waiver by the Contractor of any right to
recover such subcontractor costs.
4-3.3 No Waiver of Contract: Changes made by the Engineer will not be considered to
waive any of the provisions of the Contract, nor may the Contractor make any claim for loss of
anticipated profits because of the changes, or by reason of any variation between the
approximate quantities and the quantities of work actually performed. All work shall be
performed as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4-3.4 Conditions Requiring a Supplemental Agreement or Unilateral Payment: A
Supplemental Agreement or Unilateral Payment will be used to clarify the Plans and
Specifications of the Contract; to provide for unforeseen work, grade changes, or alterations in
the Plans which could not reasonably have been contemplated or foreseen in the original Plans
and Specifications; to change the limits of construction to meet field conditions; to provide a safe
and functional connection to an existing pavement; to settle documented Contract claims; to
make the project functionally operational in accordance with the intent of the original Contract
and subsequent amendments thereto.
A Supplemental Agreement or Unilateral Payment may be used to expand the
physical limits of the project only to the extent necessary to make the project functionally
operational in accordance with the intent of the original Contract. The cost of any such
agreement extending the physical limits of the project shall not exceed $100,000 or 10% of the
original Contract price, whichever is greater.
Perform no work to be covered by a Supplemental Agreement or Unilateral
Payment before written authorization is received from the Engineer. The Engineer’s written
authorization will set forth sufficient work information to allow the work to begin. The work
activities, terms and conditions will be reduced to written Supplemental Agreement or Unilateral
Payment form promptly thereafter. No payment will be made on a Supplemental Agreement or
Unilateral Payment prior to the Department’s approval of the document.
4-3.5 Extra Work: Extra work authorized in writing by the Engineer will be paid in
accordance with the formula in 4-3.2. Such payment will be the full extent of all monetary
compensation entitlement due to the Contractor for such extra work. Any entitlement to a time
extension due to extra work will be limited solely to that provided for in 4-3.2 for additional
work.
4-5 Rights in and Use of Materials Found on the Site of the Work.
4-5.1 Ownership and Disposal of Existing Materials: Take ownership and dispose of
all materials that are not designated as the property of other parties, in both roadway and
structures, found on the right-of-way, and all material in structures designated for removal. Such
materials do not include earth or other excavated material required for the construction of the
project. During construction, the Contractor may use materials from existing structures that are
required to be removed and that are designated to remain the property of the Department. Do not
cut or otherwise damage such material during removal unless the Engineer gives permission to
do so. Store material in an accessible location as the Engineer directs. The Department is not
responsible for the quality or quantity of any material salvaged.
4-5.2 Ornamental Trees and Shrubs: Take ownership of all ornamental trees or shrubs
existing in the right-of-way that are required to be removed for the construction operations and
which are not specifically designated in the Plans to be reset, or to be removed by others prior to
the construction operations.
7-13 Insurance.
7-13.1 Workers’ Compensation Insurance: Provide Workers’ Compensation Insurance
in accordance with Florida’s Workers’ Compensation law for all employees. If subletting any of
the work, ensure that the subcontractor(s) have Workers’ Compensation Insurance for their
employees in accordance with Florida’s Workers’ Compensation law. If using “leased
employees” or employees obtained through professional employer organizations (“PEO’s”),
ensure that such employees are covered by Workers’ Compensation insurance through the PEO’s
or other leasing entities. Ensure that any equipment rental agreements that include operators or
other personnel who are employees of independent Contractors, sole proprietorships or partners
are covered by insurance required under Florida’s Workers' Compensation law.
7-13.2 Commercial General Liability Insurance: Carry Commercial General Liability
insurance providing continuous coverage for all work or operations performed under the
Contract. Such insurance shall be no more restrictive than that provided by the latest occurrence
form edition of the standard Commercial General Liability Coverage Form (ISO Form
CG 00 01) as filed for use in the State of Florida. Cause the Department to be made an
Additional Insured as to such insurance. Such coverage shall be on an “occurrence” basis and
shall include Products/Completed Operations coverage. The coverage afforded to the
Department as an Additional Insured shall be primary as to any other available insurance and
shall not be more restrictive than the coverage afforded to the Named Insured. The limits of
coverage shall not be less than $1,000,000 for each occurrence and not less than a $5,000,000
annual general aggregate, inclusive of amounts provided by an umbrella or excess policy. The
limits of coverage described herein shall apply fully to the work or operations performed under
the Contract, and may not be shared with or diminished by claims unrelated to the contract. The
policy/ies and coverage described herein may be subject to a deductible. Pay all deductibles as
required by the policy. No policy/ies or coverage described herein may contain or be subject to a
Retention or a Self-Insured Retention. Prior to the execution of the Contract, and at all renewal
periods which occur prior to final acceptance of the work, the Department shall be provided with
an ACORD Certificate of Liability Insurance reflecting the coverage described herein. The
Department shall be notified in writing within ten days of any cancellation, notice of
cancellation, lapse, renewal, or proposed change to any policy or coverage described herein. The
Department’s approval or failure to disapprove any policy/ies, coverage, or ACORD Certificates
shall not relieve or excuse any obligation to procure and maintain the insurance required herein,
nor serve as a waiver of any rights or defenses the Department may have.
7-13.3 Insurance Required for Construction at Railroads: When the Contract includes
the construction of a railroad grade crossing, railroad overpass or underpass structure, or any
other work or operations within the limits of the railroad right-of-way, including any
Construction Details
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
SECTION 100
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
100-1 General.
Unless restricted to a specific type by the Contract Documents or the Engineer, the
Contractor may perform the work using equipment, tools, machinery, etc., of his own choosing.
Provide a unique alphanumeric identification number on all equipment (other than small tools)
used on the project. This number shall be a minimum of 2 inches high and appear on both sides
of the equipment. Place the number in such a manner so as to contrast sharply in color with the
background on which it is placed. Ensure that the number, which may be painted or otherwise
permanently affixed to the equipment, is clearly legible at all times. Provide, upon submittal of
Notice of Intent to Claim or Preliminary Time Extension Request in accordance with 5-12.2, a
list showing all equipment (other than small tools) for which the Contractor may request
compensation, it’s identification number with serial number, manufacturer, year manufactured,
model and description. Update this list to account for equipment moving to or from the project
and provide certification weekly, by close of business on Friday, the equipment, its unique
number and the dates and hours that the equipment was assigned to this project for the
proceeding week. No compensation will be made for any equipment used during any time period
when the said equipment is not listed in the weekly certification. Failure to provide this
information in the time specified may result in the Engineer withholding all Contract Payments
until receipt of such information. Note that facilities to be constructed under the Contract are
adequate to support only their design loads in their completed construction stage. If the
Contractor’s equipment or procedures during construction damage any part of the facility, the
Contractor will replace or repair it as directed by the Engineer at no expense to the Department.
101-1 Description.
Perform preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the
project, including, but not limited to, those operations necessary for the movement of personnel,
equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site and for the establishment of temporary
offices, buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, and sanitary and other facilities.
Include the costs of bonds and any required insurance and any other preconstruction
expense necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials.
102-1 Description.
Maintain traffic within the limits of the project for the duration of the construction period,
including any temporary suspensions of the work. Construct and maintain detours. Provide
facilities for access to residences, businesses, etc., along the project. Furnish, install and maintain
traffic control and safety devices during construction. Furnish and install work zone pavement
markings for maintenance of traffic (MOT) in construction areas. Provide any other special
requirements for safe and expeditious movement of traffic specified in the Plans. MOT includes
all facilities, devices and operations as required for safety and convenience of the public within
the work zone.
Do not maintain traffic over those portions of the project where no work is to be
accomplished or where construction operations will not affect existing roads. Do not obstruct or
create a hazard to any traffic during the performance of the work, and repair any damage to
existing pavement open to traffic.
Include the cost of any work that is necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents under the MOT pay item, when there is not a pay item provided.
102-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Bituminous Adhesive ..........................................Section 970
Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers…Section 990
Paint ................................................................…Section 971
Removable Tape .................................................Section 990
Glass Spheres ......................................................Section 971
Temporary Traffic Control Device Materials .....Section 990
Retroreflective and Nonreflective Sheeting
for Temporary Traffic Control Devices ..............Section 994
102-2.1 Temporary Traffic Control Devices: Use only the materials meeting the
requirements of Section 990, Section 994, Design Standards and the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD).
102-2.2 Detour: Provide all materials for the construction and maintenance of all
detours.
102-2.3 Commercial Materials for Driveway Maintenance: Provide materials of the
type typically used for base, including recycled asphalt pavement material, and having stability
and drainage properties that will provide a firm surface under wet conditions.
102-6 Detours.
102-6.1 General: Construct and maintain detour facilities wherever it becomes necessary
to divert traffic from any existing roadway or bridge, or wherever construction operations block
the flow of traffic.
102-6.2 Construction: Plan, construct, and maintain detours for the safe passage of
traffic in all conditions of weather. Provide the detour with all facilities necessary to meet this
requirement. Where pedestrian facilities are detoured, blocked or closed during the work,
provide safe alternate accessible routes through or around the work zone meeting the
requirements of the ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities.
When the Plans call for the Department to furnish detour bridge components,
construct the pile bents in accordance with the Plans, unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer.
Provide two Contractor representatives, who will be directly involved in the
erection of Department-owned temporary bridging, to attend a mandatory one-day training
session to be conducted at the Department’s storage facility. No bridging will be released to the
Contractor prior to the completion of this training.
Submit a letter with the following: company name, phone number, office address,
project contact person, names of the representatives who will attend the training described above,
project number, detour bridge type, bridge length, span length, location and usage time frames,
to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days before the intended pick-up date, to obtain the storage
facility location and list of components for the project. Upon receipt of letter, the Engineer will,
within 10 calendar days provide an approved material list to the Contractor and the appropriate
Department storage yard.
Provide a letter with an original company seal, identifying the representative with
authority to pick up components, to the Engineer at least 10 calendar days before the proposed
103-1 Description.
103-1.1 Scope of Work: Construct temporary work structures used solely to support
construction equipment. Temporary structures include but are not limited to work bridges,
elevated platforms and rail systems. Items such as barges, mats, or items such as falsework or
scaffolding are not included in this Section. If a temporary structure type other than the structure
type shown in the plans is chosen, assume responsibility for obtaining all necessary permit
revisions and the Engineer’s approval. Conform to any limitations contained in the plans and
permits. Do not place embankment outside the limits shown in the plans. The cost of the
embankment, placing, compaction, and removal will be included in the lump sum price for
Temporary Work Structure.
103-1.2 Materials: Construct the temporary work structure using materials sufficient to
handle the anticipated loads. Assume responsibility for the design of the temporary structure.
103-1.3 Navigation Requirements: Submit drawings showing the location of the
temporary work structures relative to the navigable waterway to the Coast Guard at least 60 days
prior to beginning construction of the structure, or as required by conditions of the permit.
Provide adequate lighting of the structure during the duration of construction as required by the
Coast Guard or local authorities.
104-1 Description.
Provide erosion control measures on the project and in areas outside the right-of-way
where work is accomplished in conjunction with the project, so as to prevent pollution of water,
detrimental effects to public or private property adjacent to the project right-of-way and damage
to work on the project. Construct and maintain temporary erosion control features or, where
practical, construct and maintain permanent erosion control features as shown in the Plans or as
may be directed by the Engineer.
104-2 General.
Coordinate the installation of temporary erosion control features with the construction of
the permanent erosion control features to the extent necessary to ensure economical, effective,
and continuous control of erosion and water pollution throughout the life of the Contract.
Due to unanticipated conditions, the Engineer may direct the use of control features or
methods other than those included in the original Contract. In such event, the Department will
pay for this additional work as unforeseeable work.
105-1 General.
105-1.1 Quality Control Documentation.
105-1.1.1 Submission of Materials Certification and Reporting Test Results:
Provide certifications prior to placement of materials. Report test results at completion of the test
and meet the requirements of the applicable Specifications.
105-1.1.2 Databases: Obtain access to the Department’s databases prior to testing
and material placement. Database access information is available through the Department’s
website. Enter all required and specified documentation and test results in the Department
databases.
105-1.1.3 Worksheets: Make available to the Department, when requested,
worksheets used for collecting test information. Ensure the worksheets at a minimum contain the
following:
1. Project Identification Number,
2. Time and Date,
3. Laboratory Identification and Name,
4. Training Identification Numbers (TIN) and initials,
5. Record details as specified within the test method.
105-1.2 Inspections to Assure Compliance with Acceptance Criteria.
105-1.2.1 General: The Department is not obligated to make an inspection of
materials at the source of supply, manufacture, or fabrication. Provide the Engineer with
unrestricted entry at all times to such parts of the facilities that concern the manufacture,
fabrication, or production of the ordered materials. Bear all costs incurred in determining
whether the material meets the requirements of these Specifications.
105-1.2.2 Quality Control (QC) Inspection: Provide all necessary inspection to
assure effective QC of the operations related to materials acceptance. This includes but is not
limited to sampling and testing, production, storage, delivery, construction and placement.
Ensure that the equipment used in the production and testing of the materials provides accurate
and precise measurements in accordance with the applicable Specifications. Maintain a record of
all inspections, including but not limited to, date of inspection, results of inspection, and any
subsequent corrective actions taken. Make available to the Department the inspection records,
when requested.
105-1.2.3 Notification of Placing Order: Order materials sufficiently in advance
of their incorporation in the work to allow time for sampling, testing and inspection. Notify the
Engineer prior to placing orders for materials.
Submit to the Engineer a fabrication schedule for all items requiring
commercial inspection, before or at the preconstruction meeting. These items include steel bridge
components, overhead cantilevered sign supports with cantilevered arms exceeding 41 feet,
moveable bridge components or any other item identified as an item requiring commercial
inspection in the Contract Documents.
Notify the Engineer at least 30 days before beginning any production and
include a production schedule.
TABLE 105-5
Experience Requirements for QC Inspectors/Technicians
And Facility Manager for Quality Control
Minimum Years of Experience Required
Structural Steel Member Type
QC Inspector/Technician Facility Manager for QC
Rolled beam bridges 1 year 3 years
Welded plate girders (I sections,
2 years 4 years
box sections, etc.)
Complex structures, such as trusses,
arches, cable stayed bridges, and 3 years 5 years
moveable bridges
Fracture critical (FC) members 3 years 5 years
107-1 Description.
Provide pickup, removal and disposal of litter within the project limits from the outside
edge of travel way to the right of way line. Include the median on divided highways, from the
inside edge of travel way to the inside edge of travel way. Litter includes; but is not limited to,
bottles, cans, paper, tires, tire pieces, lumber, vehicle parts, metal junk, and brush debris.
Exclude any inaccessible areas and area identified in the Plans as new landscaping in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Mow turf or vegetation within the project limits. Turf consists of grasses planted in
accordance with Section 570. Vegetation consists of planted and natural grasses, weeds, and
other natural vegetation that have been previously mowed. Exclude any areas identified in the
Plans as new landscaping in accordance with the Contract Documents.
107-2 Operation.
107-2.1 Frequency: Begin litter removal in conjunction with the beginning of the project
and continue per the frequency shown in the Plans, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Begin mowing when directed by the Engineer and continue per the frequency in the Plans, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. Continue litter removal and mowing until final acceptance in
accordance with 5-11. Mow all areas to obtain a uniform height of 6 inches.
After final acceptance, perform litter removal and mowing until new turf is
established in accordance with 570-4 at no cost to the Department. Maintain turf and vegetation
height between 6 inches and 12 inches. Do not include seed stalk or wildflowers when measuring
height.
Perform litter removal prior to and in conjunction with mowing; however, the
Engineer may direct litter pickups in addition to those performed in conjunction with mowing.
Do not mow new turf until a healthy root system is established. In designated
wildflower areas, avoid cutting wildflowers when in bloom and when re-seeding.
107-2.2 General: Mow shoulders and medians concurrently so that not more than one
mile will be left partially mowed at the conclusion of the working day. Mow turf and vegetation
on slopes or around appurtenances concurrent with the mowing operation.
In areas saturated with standing water, mow or cut to the surface of the water
using hand labor or other specialized equipment when standard equipment will cause damage.
Do not remove turf or other vegetation cuttings from the right-of-way, or rake or
pick up the cuttings unless the cuttings are in the traveled ways, bike lanes, or sidewalk; are
obstructing drainage structures; or are the result of cleaning the equipment.
107-2.3 Limitations: Maintain traffic in accordance with Section 102. When mowing
within four feet of a travel lane, operate the equipment in the same direction of traffic, unless the
adjacent lane is closed to traffic due to construction operations.
Perform all work during daylight hours.
107-2.4 Disposal of Litter and Debris: During each litter removal cycle, bag and
remove all litter or piles at the end of each working day. Dispose of litter in accordance with
applicable local and state laws. Do not store or stockpile litter within the project limits.
108-1 Description.
Provide settlement, vibration and groundwater monitoring in accordance with the
requirements of this Section. The work required under this Section does not modify the
requirements or responsibilities for preservation of existing property from damage in accordance
with 7-11.1.
Evaluate the need for, design of, and provide any necessary precautionary features to
protect existing structures from damage. Employ construction methods that will not produce
damaging vibrations, soil movement, soil loss, or instability of existing structures.
108-2 Construction.
108-2.1 Inspection and Settlement Monitoring:
108-2.1.1 Miscellaneous Structures: When constructing foundations for
miscellaneous structures such as sign, signal, lighting, or intelligent transportation system
structures, inspect and document the condition of the existing structures shown in the Plans, and
survey and monitor for settlement the existing structures shown in the Plans.
108-2.1.2 Structures other than Miscellaneous: When excavating or
constructing retaining walls and foundations for bridges, buildings, and structures other than
miscellaneous structures, inspect and document the condition of the following existing
structures, and survey and monitor for settlement the following existing structures:
1. as shown in the Plans.
2. within a distance of five shaft or auger cast pile diameters, or the
estimated depth of drilled shaft or auger cast pile excavation, whichever is greater, measured
from the center of these foundation elements.
3. within a distance of three times the depth of any other excavations.
4. within 200 feet of sheet pile installation and extraction operations.
5. within 100 feet of steel soldier pile installation and extraction
operations.
6. for projects with pile driving operations, inspect and document the
condition of all structures within a distance, in feet, of pile driving operations equal to 0.25 times
the square root of the impact hammer energy, in foot-pounds. Survey and monitor for settlement
all structures within a distance, in feet, of pile driving operations equal to 0.5 times the square
root of the impact hammer energy, in foot-pounds.
108-2.1.3 Roadway Compaction Operations: When performing embankment
and asphalt compaction, inspect and document the condition of the following existing structures,
and survey and monitor for settlement the following existing structures:
1. as shown in the Plans.
2. within 75 feet of vibratory compaction (in any mode) operations.
108-2.1.4 Inspection and Documentation Requirements: Inspect and document
the condition of the existing structures and all existing cracks with descriptions and pictures
using a qualified Specialty Engineer. Prepare two reports documenting the condition of the
structures: one report before beginning the construction operations that may affect the existing
structures such as but not limited to foundation construction, excavations, vibratory compaction,
dewatering and retaining wall construction, and a second report after completing such
construction operations. Include in the reports the Specialty Engineer’s assessment of any
SECTION 110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
110-1 Description.
Clear and grub within the areas of the roadway right-of-way and of borrow pits, sand-
clay base material pits, lateral ditches, and any other areas shown in the Plans to be cleared and
grubbed. Remove and dispose of all trees, stumps, roots and other such protruding objects,
buildings, structures, appurtenances, existing flexible asphalt pavement, and other facilities
necessary to prepare the area for the proposed construction. Remove and dispose of all product
and debris not required to be salvaged or not required to complete the construction.
Also, perform certain miscellaneous work the Engineer considers necessary for the
complete preparation of the overall project site, as follows:
1. Plug any water wells that are encountered within the right-of-way and that are
to be abandoned.
2. Level the terrain outside the limits of construction for purposes of facilitating
maintenance and other post-construction operations in accordance with 110-10.3.
3. Trim trees and shrubs within the project right-of-way that are identified in the
Contract Documents.
Meet the requirements for such miscellaneous work as specified in 110-10.
SECTION 120
EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
120-1 Description.
120-1.1 General: Excavate and construct embankments as required for the roadway,
ditches, channel changes and borrow material. Use suitable excavated material or authorized
borrow to prepare subgrades and foundations. Construct embankments in accordance with
Design Standards, Index 505. Compact and dress excavated areas and embankments.
For excavation and backfilling of structures, comply with the requirements of
Section 125. Excavate material for clearing and grubbing in accordance with the requirements of
Section 110. Material displaced by the storm sewer or drainage structure system is not included
in the earthwork quantities shown in the Plans.
120-1.2 Unidentified Areas of Contamination: When encountering or exposing any
abnormal condition indicating the presence of contaminated materials, cease operations
immediately in the vicinity and notify the Engineer. The presence of tanks or barrels; discolored
earth, metal, wood, ground water, etc.; visible fumes; abnormal odors; excessively hot earth;
smoke; or other conditions that appear abnormal may indicate the presence of contaminated
materials and must be treated with extreme caution.
Make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into uncontaminated
areas. Immediately provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make
provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any
potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provisions adhere to all applicable laws, rules or
regulations covering potentially hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate
with the gravity of the conditions.
The Engineer will notify the District Contamination Impact Coordinator (DCIC)
who will coordinate selecting and tasking the Department’s Contamination
Assessment/Remediation Contractor (CAR). Provide access to the potentially contaminated area.
Preliminary investigation by the CAR Contractor will determine the course of action necessary
for site security and the steps necessary under applicable laws, rules, and regulations for
additional assessment and/or remediation work to resolve the contamination issue.
The CAR Contractor will delineate the contamination areas, any staging or
holding area required; and, in cooperation with the Prime Contractor and Engineer, develop a
work plan that will provide the CAR Contractor’s operations schedule with projected completion
dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue.
The CAR Contractor will maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any outlined
contaminated areas and any associated staging holding areas. The CAR Contractor will be
responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous
access to these areas for the CAR Contractor and representatives of regulatory or enforcement
agencies having jurisdiction.
Both Contractors will use the schedule as a basis for planning the completion of
both work efforts. The Engineer may grant the Contract Time extensions according to the
provisions of 8-7.3.2.
Cooperate with the CAR Contractor to expedite integration of the CAR
Contractor’s operations into the construction project. The Prime Contractor is not expected to
120-6 Borrow.
120-6.1 Materials for Borrow: Do not open borrow pits until the Engineer has approved
their location.
Do not provide borrow materials that are polluted as defined in Chapter 376 of the
Florida Statutes (oil of any kind and in any form, gasoline, pesticides, ammonia, chlorine, and
derivatives thereof, excluding liquefied petroleum gas) in concentrations above any local, State,
or Federal standards.
Prior to placing any borrow material that is the product of soil incineration,
provide the Engineer with a copy of the Certificate of Materials Recycling and Post Burn
Analysis showing that the material is below all allowable pollutant concentrations.
120-6.2 Furnishing of Borrow Areas:
To obtain the Engineer’s approval to use an off-site construction activity area that
involves excavation such as a borrow pit or local aggregate pit, request in writing, a review for -
cultural resources involvement. Send the request to the Division of Historical Resources (DHR),
Department of State, State Historic Preservation Officer, Tallahassee, FL. As a minimum,
include in the request the Project Identification Number, the County, a description of the
property with Township, Range, Section, etc., the dimensions of the area to be affected, and a
location map. Do not start any work at the off-site construction activity area prior to receiving
clearance from the DHR that no additional research is warranted.
For certain locations, the DHR will require a Cultural Resources Assessment
(CRA) Survey before approval can be granted. When this is required, secure professional
archaeological services to complete an historical and archaeological survey report. Submit the
report to the DHR with a copy to the Department. The Engineer will determine final approval or
rejection of off-site construction activity areas based on input from the DHR.
Before receiving approval or before use of borrow areas, obtain written clearance
from the Engineer concerning compliance with the Federal Endangered Species Act and other
Wildlife Regulations as specified in 7-1.4 and Section 4(f) of the USDOT Act as specified in 7-
1.8.
The Department will adjust Contract Time in accordance with 8-7 for any
suspension of operations required to comply with this Article. The Department will not accept
any monetary claims due to delays or loss of off-site construction activity areas.
Except where the Plans specifically call for the use of a particular borrow or
dredging area, the Contractor may substitute borrow or dredging areas of his own choosing
provided the Engineer determines the materials from such areas meet the Department’s standards
and other requirements for stability for use in the particular sections of the work in which it is to
be placed, and the Contractor absorbs any increase in hauling or other costs. Stake the corners of
the proposed borrow area and provide the necessary equipment along with an operator in order
for the Engineer to investigate the borrow area. The Engineer will determine test locations,
Verification of
Shoulder-Only Areas,
Test Name Quality Control Verification
Shared Use Paths, and
Sidewalks
Standard Proctor
One per soil type One per soil type One per soil type
Maximum Density
One per four LOTS and
for wet conditions, the
Density One per LOT One per two LOTs
first lift not affected by
water
One per Standard One per Standard One per Standard
Soil Classification Proctor Maximum Proctor Maximum Proctor Maximum
Density Density Density
120-12 Construction.
120-12.1 Construction Tolerances: Shape the surface of the earthwork to conform to
the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown in the Plans. In final shaping of the surface of
earthwork, maintain a tolerance of 0.3 foot above or below the plan cross-section with the
following exceptions:
1. Shape the surface of shoulders to within 0.1 foot of the plan cross-section.
2. Shape the earthwork to match adjacent pavement, curb, sidewalk, structures,
etc.
3. Shape the bottom of ditches so that the ditch impounds no water.
4. When the work does not include construction of base or pavement, shape the
entire roadbed (shoulder point to shoulder point) to within 0.1 foot above or below the Plan
cross-section.
Ensure that the shoulder lines do not vary horizontally more than 0.3 foot from
the true lines shown in the Plans.
120-12.2 Operations Adjacent to Pavement: Carefully dress areas adjacent to
pavement areas to avoid damage to such pavement. Complete grassing of shoulder areas prior to
121-1 Description.
Furnish and place flowable fill as an alternative to compacted soil as approved by the
Engineer. Applications for conventional flowable fill include beddings; encasements; closures
for tanks and pipes; and general backfill for trenches, embankments and walls. Applications for
cellular concrete flowable fill include beddings; encasements; closures for tanks and pipes; and
general backfill for embankments and walls.
121-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Fine Aggregate* ..................................................Section 902
Portland Cement (Types I, II, or III) ...................Section 921
Water ...................................................................Section 923
Admixtures** ......................................................Section 924
Fly Ash, Slag and other Pozzolanic Materials ....Section 929
Preformed Foam............................................... ASTM C 869
*Any clean fine aggregate with 100% passing a 3/8 inch mesh sieve and not more
than 15% passing a No. 200 sieve may be used.
**High air generators or foaming agents may be used in lieu of conventional air
entraining admixtures and shall be added at jobsite and mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
121-6 Acceptance.
Acceptance of flowable fill will be based on the following documentation and a
minimum temperature of flowable fill at the point of delivery of 50ºF.
Furnish a delivery ticket to the Engineer for each load of flowable fill delivered to the
worksite. Ensure that each ticket contains the following information:
1. Project designation,
2. Date,
3. Time,
4. Class and quantity of flowable fill,
5. Actual batch proportions,
6. Free moisture content of aggregates,
7. Quantity of water withheld.
Leave the fill undisturbed until the material obtains sufficient strength. Sufficient
strength is 35 psi penetration resistance as measured using a hand held penetrometer in
accordance with ASTM C-403. Provide a hand held penetrometer to measure the penetration
resistance of the hardened flowable fill.
125-1 Description.
Excavate for box culverts, pipes, retaining walls, headwalls for pipes and drains, catch
basins, drop inlets, manholes, and similar structures. Construct and remove cofferdams, sheeting,
bracing, etc.; pump or otherwise dewater foundations; remove and dispose of any existing
structures or portions of structures not covered by other items in the Contract, including
foundations, abutments, piers, wings, and all other materials, obstructions, etc., found necessary
to clear the site for the proposed work; backfill, dispose of surplus material, and perform final
cleaning, as may be necessary for the proper execution of the work. This Section does not
include excavation for bases or pavements, curbs, curb and gutter, valley gutter, ditch pavement,
or rubble gutter.
125-1.1 Trench Excavation Safety System and Shoring, Special (Trench
Excavation): When performing trench excavation in excess of 5 feet in depth, comply with the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) trench safety standards, 29 CFR,
1926, Subpart P, and all subsequent revisions or updates adopted by the Department of Labor
and Employment Security. Ensure that trench boxes are wide enough to accommodate
compaction and density testing.
Submission of bid and subsequent execution of the Contract will serve as
certification that all trench excavation in excess of 5 feet in depth will be in compliance with
Section 553.62, Florida Statutes.
Consider all available geotechnical information when designing the trench
excavation safety system.
Consider these and any more stringent trench safety standards as minimum
Contract requirements.
125-2 Classification.
Consider all materials excavated as unclassified and as excavation regardless of the
material encountered.
125-3 Cofferdams.
125-3.1 Construction:
125-3.1.1 Methods: Construct all foundations by open excavation, and shore,
brace, or protect the foundation openings with cofferdams. Provide cofferdams or cribs for
foundation construction below the bottom of the footings. Provide sufficient clearance in the
cofferdam interiors to permit construction of forms and inspection of their exteriors, and for
pumping equipment.
125-3.1.2 Protection of Concrete: Construct cofferdams to protect green
concrete against damage from a sudden rising of the water and to prevent damage by erosion. Do
not leave timber or bracing in cofferdams or cribs that extend into the substructure masonry
except where permitted in writing by the Engineer.
125-3.1.3 Placing in the Dry: For placing footings in the dry, the Engineer may
require cofferdam sheeting to be driven to an elevation 6 feet below the elevation of the bottom
of the footings and require sufficient pumping equipment to dewater and maintain the cofferdam
in a comparatively dry condition.
125-4 Excavation.
125-4.1 Requirements for all Excavation: Perform all excavation to foundation
materials, satisfactory to the Engineer, regardless of the elevation shown in the Plans. Remove
rock, boulders or other hard lumpy or unyielding material to a depth of 12 inches below the
bottom of pipes and box culverts elevations. Remove muck or other soft material to the depth
indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
125-4.2 Earth Excavation:
125-4.2.1 Foundation Material other than the Rock: When masonry is to rest
on an excavated surface other than rock, take special care to avoid disturbing the bottom of the
excavation, and do not remove the final foundation material to grade until just before placing the
masonry. In case the foundation material is soft or mucky, the Engineer may require excavation
to a greater depth and to backfill to grade with approved material.
125-4.2.2 Foundation Piles: Where foundation piles are used, complete the
excavation of each pit before driving the piles. After the driving is completed, remove all loose
and displaced material, leaving a smooth, solid, and level bed to receive the masonry.
125-4.2.3 Removal of Obstructions: Remove boulders, logs, or any unforeseen
obstacles encountered in excavating. Compensation will be in accordance with the requirements
of 4-3.
125-4.3 Rock Excavation: Clean all rock and other hard foundation material, remove all
loose material, and cut all rock to a firm surface. Either level, step vertically and horizontally, or
serrate the rock, as may be directed by the Engineer. Clean out all seams, and fill them with
concrete or mortar.
125-4.4 Pipe Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches for pipes to the elevation of the
bottom of the pipe and to a width sufficient to provide adequate working room. Remove soil not
meeting the classification specified as suitable backfill material in 125-8.3.2.2, to a depth of
4 inches below the bottom of the pipe elevation. Where the soils permit, ensure that the trench
sides are vertical up to at least the mid-point of the pipe.
For pipe lines placed above the natural ground line, place and compact the
embankment, prior to excavation of the trench, to an elevation at least 2 feet above the top of the
pipe and to a width equal to four pipe diameters, and then excavate the trench to the required
grade.
For pipe trenches utilizing trench boxes, ensure that the trench box used is of
sufficient width to permit thorough tamping of bedding material under and around the pipes as
specified in 125-8.1.6.
Do not disturb the installed pipe and its embedment when moving trench boxes.
Move the trench box carefully to avoid excavated wall displacement or damage. As the trench
125-7 Pumping.
Pump from the interior of any foundation enclosure in such manner as to preclude the
possibility of any portion of the concrete materials being carried away. Do not pump while
placing concrete, or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless using a suitable pump
separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall.
125-8 Backfilling.
125-8.1 General Requirements for Structures and Pipe:
125-8.1.1 General: Backfill in the dry whenever normal dewatering equipment
and methods can accomplish the needed dewatering. A LOT is defined as one lift of backfill
material placement, not to exceed 500 feet in length or a single run of pipe connecting two
successive structures, whichever is less. Backfill for structures and pipe compacted in one
operation will be considered as one LOT within the cover zone. Backfill around structures
compacted separately from the pipe will be considered as separate LOTs. Backfill on each side
of the pipe for the first lift will be considered a separate LOT. Backfill on opposite sides of the
pipe for the remaining lifts will be considered separate LOTs, unless the same compactive effort
is applied. Same compactive effort is defined as the same type of equipment (make and model)
making the same number of passes on both sides of the pipe. For multiple phase backfill, a LOT
shall not extend beyond the limits of the phase.
When placing backfill within trench box each lift of backfill is considered
a LOT. Placement of backfill within trench box limits will be considered a complete operation
before trench box is moved for next backfill operation. When the trench box is moved for next
backfill operation this will start new LOTs for each lift. Follow the density testing frequency in
125-9.3.1.
125-8.1.2 Equipment and Methods: Provide normal dewatering equipment
including, but not limited to, surface pumps, sump pumps, wellpoints and header pipe and
trenching/digging machinery. Provide normal dewatering methods including, but not limited to,
constructing shallow surface drainage trenches/ditches, using sand blankets, perforated pipe
drains, sumps and siphons.
145-1 Description.
This Section specifies the construction requirements for geosynthetics used in:
geosynthetic reinforced soil slopes, and geosynthetic reinforced foundations constructed on soft
in-situ soils. Furnish and place geosynthetics and any associated facing material or drainage
blankets.
145-2 Responsibility.
Construct the geosynthetic reinforced feature, including materials, method, and
installation based on information provided in the Contract Documents and the geosynthetic
supplier’s recommendations. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 5 showing the
details and distribution of the selected geosynthetics that meet the design shown in the Plans.
Alternate designs optimizing the selected geosynthetic materials may be submitted.
For alternate designs, provide complete design calculations and details which include:
plan view, elevation view, and details in accordance with the Contract Documents. These shall
show the extent, number of layers of geosynthetic reinforcement, minimum properties of each
geosynthetic reinforcement layer, vertical spacing of geosynthetic reinforcement, orientation of
geosynthetic facing details, details at special structures or obstructions, typical construction
sequence, and top and bottom elevations of the geosynthetic reinforcement. Calculations shall be
submitted to substantiate the design meets the requirements of Chapter 31 of the PPM and in
accordance with the Contract Plans. As a minimum these shall clearly show the derivation of
reinforcement requirements (i.e., type, spacing, length, etc.) and determination of all design
parameters and factors. All plans and calculations are to be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer registered in the State of Florida.
145-3 Materials.
145-3.1 Geosynthetic Materials: Use materials meeting the requirements of Section 985
and are listed on the Approved Product List (APL).
Deliver geosynthetic materials (including facing and drainage elements) to the job
site in unopened shipping packages labeled with the supplier’s name and product name. During
shipping and storage, protect the geosynthetic from physical damage, debris and from
temperatures greater than 140°F. Follow the supplier’s recommendations regarding protection
from direct sunlight. At the time of installation, the Engineer will reject the material if it has
defects, tears, punctures, flaws, deterioration, or other damage. However, if approved by the
Engineer, the Contractor may repair torn or punctured sections by placing a patch over the
damaged area. Replace or repair any rejected geosynthetic at no additional expense to the
Department.
145-3.2 Backfill Materials: Use only free draining backfill material in the reinforced fill
volume as shown in the Plans meeting the following gradation limits as determined in
accordance with AASHTO T27 and FM 1-T011:
Do not use backfill material containing more than an average of 2.0% by weight
of organic material, as determined by FM 1-T267 and by averaging the test results for three
randomly selected, representative samples from each stratum or stockpile of a particular material.
Consider the stratum or stockpile unsuitable for construction of the reinforced fill volume if an
individual test value exceeds 3.0%.
Use backfill with a maximum plasticity index of six as determined by
AASHTO T90, and a maximum liquid limit of 15 as determined by AASHTO T89. Use backfill
materials with a pH between 4.5 and 10.0 as determined by FM 5-550. When metal pipes or
other metal items are embedded in the backfill, use backfill with a pH between 6.0 and 10.0. Do
not use soil cement or lime stabilized backfill unless approved by the Engineer.
Have the backfill material tested for every soil type for pH by a Department
approved independent testing laboratory prior to placement. Provide certification to the Engineer
that the results have met the requirements of this Section and are signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida.
145-4 Construction.
145-4.1 General: Obtain from the geosynthetic supplier, technical instructions, guidance
in preconstruction activities, and on-site technical assistance during construction. Submit a copy
of any instructions provided by the supplier to the Engineer prior to beginning installation.
145-4.2 Reinforced Soil Slopes:
145-4.2.1 Preparation: Remove all existing vegetation and all unsuitable
foundation materials. Prepare the foundation in accordance with Section 110, except as noted
herein.
Proof roll the graded area with a vibratory roller weighing a minimum of
8 tons or a sheepsfoot roller, where appropriate, exerting a compression of at least 250 pounds
psi on the tamper foot for at least five passes in the presence of the Engineer or as directed by the
Engineer. Remove and replace any soft or loose foundation subsoils that are, in the opinion of
the Engineer, incapable of sustaining the required proof rolling, in accordance with Section 125.
Provide proof rolled ground surfaces which are uniform, smooth, and free
of abrupt changes in slope, debris, and irregularities that might damage the reinforcement.
Promptly repair and restore to their original condition any areas outside the limits of disturbance
shown in the Plans which are damaged as part of this work at no expense to the Department.
Make every possible effort to avoid such damage.
145-4.2.2 Geosynthetic Placement: Place the geosynthetics at the proper
elevation, location and orientation as shown in the Plans. In general, place the geosynthetics used
for slope stabilization such that its primary direction of tensile strength is perpendicular to the
plan face of the slope. Pull the geosynthetic material tight, and secure it as necessary to lay flat
against the soil prior to fill placement.
Place adjacent rolls of geosynthetic to maintain 100% horizontal coverage
at the face of the slope. When placing geosynthetic for curved embankments, do not allow less
145-5 Certification.
Furnish certification from the supplier, at least ten days prior to placement, that the
products used are the same products listed on the APL, are in accordance with the project design
requirements and is recommended by the supplier for use at this location.
Acceptance of furnished material will be based on the supplier’s certification and visual
inspection by the Engineer.
Maximum Density One per soil type One per soil type
Density One per LOT One per four LOTs
Soil Classification, Gradation,
One per Maximum Density One per Maximum Density
LL & PI
Organic Content One per soil type One per soil type
In addition, test for pH at a minimum frequency of one test per soil type at point
of placement according to 145-3. The Engineer will collect enough material to split and create
two separate samples and retain one for resolution at point of placement until LOTs represented
by the samples are accepted.
145-6.5 Test Selection and Reporting: Determine test locations including stations and
offsets, using the random number generator approved by the Engineer. Do not use note pads or
work sheets to record data for later transfer to the density log book. Notify the Engineer upon
successful completion of QC testing on each LOT.
160-1 Description.
Stabilize designated portions of the roadbed to provide a firm and unyielding subgrade,
having the required bearing value specified in the Plans.
160-2 Materials.
160-2.1 Commercial Material: Meet the requirements of Section 914-2.1.
160-2.2 Local Material: Meet the requirements of Section 914.Test material from each
source, or if authorized by the Engineer, test blended materials. Submit test results to the
Engineer at least 14 days prior to the stabilization operation.
160-2.2.1 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) (Same Project): The Engineer
may allow the use of RAP material from the same project that is free of contaminants without
testing the source.
160-2.2.2 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) (Different Project) or RAP
Blended Material: When RAP is obtained from another project, the Engineer will determine the
acceptability of the material.
160-2.3 Existing Base: When the material from an existing base is used as all, or a
portion, of the stabilizing additives, no further testing is required unless directed by the Engineer.
160-2.4 Granular Subbase: The Engineer may allow, at no additional cost to the
Department, the substitution of 6 inches of granular subbase meeting the requirements of 290-2
and 290-3, when 12 inches of stabilization requiring a limerock bearing ratio (LBR) value of 40
is specified.
Verification for
Shoulder-Only, Shared
Test Name Quality Control Verification
Use Path and Sidewalk
Construction
Modified Proctor One per two One per eight
One per four LOTs
Maximum Density consecutive LOTs consecutive LOTs
Density One per LOT One per four LOTs One per two LOTs
Stabilizing Mixing
Three per 500 feet Witness one per LOT Witness one per LOT
Depth
One per two One per eight
LBR One per four LOTs
consecutive LOTs consecutive LOTs
Verification for
Shoulder-Only, Shared
Test Name Quality Control Verification
Use Path and Sidewalk
Construction
Organic Content,
One per eight
Gradation, LL/PI, and Not required One per four LOTs
consecutive LOTs
Soil Classification
Verification for
Shoulder-Only, Shared
Test Name Quality Control Verification
Use Path and Sidewalk
Construction
Asphalt Content,
One per two One per eight
Gradation, LL/PI, and One per four LOTs
consecutive LOTs consecutive LOTs
Soil Classification
162-1 Description.
162-1.1 Finish Soil Layer: Unless otherwise called for in the Plans, prepare a 6 inch
thick layer of existing soil mixed with imported material, if necessary, to achieve the pH and
organic matter levels required in Section 987, that is favorable to turf and ground cover growth
over areas of the project which are to be seeded, seeded and mulched, or planted, by mixing in an
organic material, compost, or commercially available soil amendments. Prepare finish soil layer
in areas to be sodded, when called for in the Plans.
162-1.2 Organic Soil Layer: When required by a permit, prepare a 6 inch thick layer of
organic soil, at locations shown in the Plans.
162-1.3 Blanket Material: When required by a permit, place a layer of blanket material
at the locations and to the depth shown in the Plans.
162-2 Materials.
162-2.1 Finish Soil Layer and Organic Soil Layer: Meet the requirements of
Section 987.
162-2.2 Blanket Material: Meet the material classification shown in the Plans and
Design Standards, Index No. 505.
175-1 Description.
Perform controlled cracking of concrete pavement and reseating of the cracked slabs, by
rolling, tamping, etc., on the underlying subgrade to provide a firm base for asphalt concrete
surfacing.
175-2 Equipment.
175-2.1 For Cracking: Provide pneumatic or gravity-type breakers, or other specifically
approved equipment that ensures controlled cracking to the size and extent of uniformity, etc.,
specified. Control the fall of gravity-type breakers by leads so that the fall will be straight and
vertical. Use hammers for both pneumatic and gravity-type breakers of a type that will crack the
concrete cleanly and not punch or unnecessarily shatter the concrete.
175-2.2 For Reseating Provide vibratory compacting equipment or traffic rollers. Use
traffic rollers that weigh at least 15 tons.
SECTION 200
ROCK BASE
200-1 Description.
Construct a base composed of base rock. Do not use recycled concrete aggregate (RCA)
base on interstate roadways.
200-2 Materials.
200-2.1 General: Meet the requirements of Section 911for the particular type of base to
be constructed. The Contractor may use more than one source of base rock on a single Contract
provided that a single source is used throughout the entire width and depth of a section of base.
Obtain approval from the Engineer before placing material from more than one source. Place
material to ensure total thickness single source integrity at any station location of the base.
Intermittent placement or “blending” of sources is not permitted. Base rock may be referred to
hereinafter as “rock”.
The reuse of existing base may be considered provided it meets the requirements
of this Section. Submit as a Cost Savings Initiative Proposal in accordance with Section 4.
200-2.2 Existing Rock: Meet the following requirements for use of existing rock on the
same project:
1. Notify the Engineer in writing prior to excavating existing rock.
2. Submit a process control plan, herein referred to as “Plan” consisting of the
following:
a. Locations where existing rock will be removed from the roadway.
b. Locations where existing rock will be used for new construction.
c. Method of excavation, transport, and placement to ensure excavated
rock will be kept separate from other approved stockpiles. Excavation methods that may result in
damage to the rock rendering it unfit to be used as base will not be approved.
d. Proposed measures to prevent contamination and segregation.
e. Proposed locations and methods for constructing stockpiles for
sampling and testing.
f. Method for sampling and reporting test results.
3. The Engineer will coordinate the review of the “Plan” with the District
Materials Office.
4. Upon the Engineer’s review of the “Plan”, build a preliminary stockpile, not to
exceed 1,000 cubic yards.
5. Collect and test a minimum of three samples from the preliminary stockpile.
Once the stockpile has been sampled, do not add any additional material to the stockpile.
Determine compliance with 200-2.1, with the exception of carbonate contents. Reject any
stockpile if the Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) is less than 100. The District Materials Office
will sample and test the preliminary stockpile to verify compliance with this Section.
6. If all test results meet the requirements of this Section, the Engineer will notify
the Contractor in writing of the approved status of the preliminary stockpile based on the
analysis of test data performed by the District Materials Office.
200-3 Equipment.
Use mechanical rock spreaders, equipped with a device that strikes off the rock uniformly
to laying thickness, capable of producing even distribution. For crossovers, intersections and
ramp areas; roadway widths of 20 feet or less; the main roadway area when forms are used and
any other areas where the use of a mechanical spreader is not practicable; the Contractor may
spread the rock using bulldozers or blade graders.
Mainline Pavement Lanes, Turn Lanes, Ramps, Parking Lots, Concrete Box Culverts and
Retaining Wall Systems
Test Name Quality Control Verification
Modified Proctor One per eight consecutive
One per 16 consecutive LOTs
Maximum Density LOTs
Density One per LOT One per four LOTs
Roadway Surface Ten per LOT Witness
Roadway Thickness Three per LOT Witness
The Engineer will compare the IV results with the Pit Proctor. If the IV
result is lower than or equal to the Pit Proctor plus 4.5 pcf, keep the option to use the Pit Proctor.
If the IV result is more than 4.5 pcf higher than the Pit Proctor the Engineer will test the
Resolution sample and compare the Resolution result with the Pit Proctor. If the Resolution
result is lower than or equal to the Pit Proctor plus 4.5 pcf, keep the option to use the Pit Proctor.
Otherwise return to the provisions of 200-7.2.2, 200-7.3.1.1, 200-7.3.2.1, and 200-7.4.1.
200-7.4.3 Density: When a Verification or Independent Verification density test
does not meet the requirements of 200-7.2.1 (Acceptance Criteria), retest at a site within a 5 feet
radius of the Verification test location and observe the following:
1. If the QC retest meets the Acceptance Criteria and compares favorably
with the Verification or Independent Verification test, the Engineer will accept the LOTs in
question.
2. If the QC retest does not meet the Acceptance Criteria and compares
favorably with the Verification or Independent Verification test, rework and retest the material in
that LOT. The Engineer will re-verify the LOTs in question.
3. If the QC retest and the Verification or Independent Verification test do
not compare favorably, complete a new equipment-comparison analysis as defined in 120-10.1.1.
Once acceptable comparison is achieved, retest the LOTs. The Engineer will perform new
204-1 Description.
Construct a base course composed of graded aggregate.
204-2 Materials.
Use graded aggregate material, produced from Department approved sources, which
yields a satisfactory mixture meeting all the requirements of these Specifications after it has been
crushed and processed as a part of the mining operations.
The Contractor may furnish the material in two sizes of such gradation that, when
combined in a central mix plant pugmill, the resultant mixture meets the required specifications.
Use graded aggregate base material of uniform quality throughout, substantially free
from vegetable matter, shale, lumps and clay balls, and having a Limerock Bearing Ratio value
of not less than 100. Use material retained on the No. 10 sieve composed of aggregate meeting
the following requirements:
Soundness Loss, Sodium, Sulfate: AASHTO T104 ...... 15%
Percent Wear: AASHTO T96 (Grading A)
Group 1 Aggregates ....................................................... 45%
Group 2 Aggregates ....................................................... 65%
Group 1: This group of aggregates is composed of limestone, marble, or
dolomite.
Group 2: This group of aggregates is composed of granite, gneiss, or
quartzite.
Use graded aggregate base material meeting the following gradation:
For Group 1 aggregates, ensure that the fraction passing the No. 40 sieve has a Plasticity
Index (AASHTO T90) of not more than 4.0 and a Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) of not more
than 25, and contains not more than 67% of the weight passing the No. 200 sieve.
For Group 2 aggregates, ensure that the material passing the No. 10 sieve has a sand
equivalent (AASHTO T176) value of not less than 28.
The Contractor may use graded aggregate of either Group 1 or Group 2, but only use one
group on any Contract. (Graded aggregate may be referred to hereinafter as “aggregate”.)
210-1 Description.
Rework (or rework and widen) the existing rock base, by adding new limerock material
as required by the Plans. Construct adjacent turnouts, entirely with new limerock.
210-2 Materials.
Meet the limerock material requirements as specified in Section 911 if new limerock is
needed. The Contractor may use limerock of either Miami Oolite or Ocala Formation but only
use limerock of one formation on any Contract.
210-3 Equipment.
Provide equipment meeting the requirements of 200-3.
230-1 Description.
Construct a base course composed of roadbed soil stabilized with limerock.
230-2 Materials.
Meet the limerock material requirements as specified in Section 911.
230-3 Equipment.
230-3.1 For Mixing: For mixing in the roadway, provide a heavy-duty rotary tiller or
other equipment approved by the Engineer as equally effective for this work.
230-3.2 For Compaction: Select the equipment for compacting the stabilized material,
except that for the final finish use a steel-wheeled roller.
234-1 Description.
Construct a Superpave asphalt concrete base course as defined in these Specifications.
Base course mixes are designated as Type B-12.5. The Contractor may use a Type SP-12.5
mixture, (Traffic Level B or C) in lieu of a Type B-12.5. The Contractor may substitute a
SP 12.5Traffic Level D or E mixtures in lieu of Type B-12.5 mixtures, not to exceed 500 tons for
a project, at no extra cost to the Department, if approved by the Engineer.
Obtain Superpave asphalt base from a plant that is currently on the Department’s
Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements
of Section 105.
234-2 Materials.
234-2.1 General: Use materials that conform to the requirements of Division III.
Specific references are as follows:
Superpave PG Asphalt Binder .......................... Section 916
Coarse Aggregate, Stone, Slag or
Crushed Gravel .................................................. Section 901
Fine Aggregate ................................................... Section 902
234-2.2 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): RAP may be used as a component
material of the asphalt mixture provided the requirements of 334-2.3 are met.
283-1 Description.
Construct a base course composed of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material. Use
RAP material as a base course only on non-limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or
other non-traffic bearing applications.
283-2 Materials.
Obtain the RAP material by either milling or crushing an existing asphalt pavement. Use
material so that at least 97% (by weight) pass a 3-1/2 inch sieve and is graded uniformly down to
dust.
When the RAP material is from a Department project and the composition of existing
pavement is known, the Engineer may approve material on the basis of the composition. When
the composition of obtained RAP is not known, the following procedure will be used for
approval:
1. Conduct a minimum of six extraction gradation analyses of the RAP material.
Take samples at random locations in the stockpile. The average asphalt cement content of the six
stockpile samples must be 4% or greater with no individual result below 3-1/2%.
2. Request the Engineer to make a visual inspection of the stockpile of RAP
material. Based on this visual inspection of the stockpiled material and the results of the
Contractor’s extraction gradation analyses, the Engineer will determine the suitability of the
materials.
3. The Engineer may require crushing of stockpiled material to meet the gradation
criterion. Perform all crushing before the material is placed.
285-1 Description.
Construct a base course composed of one of the optional materials shown on the typical
cross-sections.
285-2 Materials.
Meet the material requirements as specified in the Section covering the particular type of
base to be constructed.
Graded Aggregate .............................................. Section 204
Asphalt ............................................................... Section 234
Limerock ............................................................ Section 911
Shell Base .......................................................... Section 911
Shell-Rock ......................................................... Section 911
Cemented Coquina ............................................. Section 911
Recycled Concrete Aggregate (RCA)*.............. Section 911
*Do not use on interstate roadways.
The pay area shall not exceed 105% of the surface area.
There will be no adjustment of the pay area on the basis of thickness for base courses
constructed utilizing mixed-in-place operations.
For Superpave asphalt base course, the quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity.
286-1 Description.
Construct turnouts or extend existing turnouts on resurfacing and widening-resurfacing
projects.
The Department does not include placing of asphalt concrete surface course over turnouts
in this Section.
286-2 Materials.
For base material for turnouts, use any material currently specified by the Department for
base or surface construction, except do not use hot bituminous mixtures intended for use as
open-graded friction course. Proportion bituminous mixtures in accordance with a job-mix
formula approved by the Department.
In general, the Engineer will accept the material on the basis of visual inspection, with no
testing required.
286-3 Excavation.
Excavate the area over which turnout construction is to be accomplished to the
dimensions shown in the Plans or the Design Standards. If the surface of the underlying soil is
disturbed during the excavation operation, compact it to the approximate density of the
surrounding undisturbed soil.
If an existing paved turnout lies within the specified limits for turnout construction, leave
the existing base and surface in place, as directed by the Engineer.
287-1 Description.
Construct asphalt treated permeable base (ATPB) and outlet pipe for use under concrete
pavement, in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and the Design Standards, Index
No. 287. Meet the plant and equipment requirements of Section 320 and the general construction
requirements of Section 330, except as noted below.
287-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Coarse Aggregate, Stone, Slag, or Crushed Gravel
Grade No. 57 or 67..................................Section 901
Superpave PG Asphalt Binder (PG 67-22) (1) .............. 916-1
Hydrated Lime (2) ..................... AASHTO M-303-89 Type 1
Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipe (3) .................................Section 948
Polyethylene Pipe (3) ...........................................Section 948
Geosynthetic Material .........................................Section 985
(1) Use PG 67-22 in the ATPB containing 0.75% heat-stable anti-strip additive
(by weight of asphalt) from an approved source. Introduce and mix the anti-strip additive at the
terminal.
(2) For mixtures containing granite, add hydrated lime at a dosage rate of 1.0% by
weight of the total dry aggregate in lieu of adding 0.75% anti-strip additive. Provide certified test
results for each shipment of hydrated lime indicating compliance with the specifications. In
addition, meet the requirements of 337-9.2 and 337-9.3.
(3) Use either polyvinyl chloride pipe or polyethylene pipe, unless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents.
Table 287-1
ATPB Master Production Range
Characteristic Tolerance (1)
Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ± 0.60
Passing 1/2 inch Sieve (%) if using
Target ± 12.00
No. 57 stone
Passing 3/8 inch Sieve (%) if using
Target ± 12.00
No. 67 stone
(1) Tolerances for sample size of n = 1 from the verified mix design
287-5.1 Individual Test Tolerances for ATPB Production: In the event that an
individual Quality Control test result of a sublot for gradation (P-1/2 if No. 57 stone is used and P-
3/8 if No. 67 stone is used), or asphalt binder content does not meet the requirements of Table
287-1, take steps to correct the situation and actions taken shall be reported to the Engineer.
In the event that two consecutive individual Quality Control test results for
gradation (P-1/2 if No. 57 stone is used and P-3/8 if No. 67 stone is used) or asphalt binder content
do not meet the requirements of Table 287-1, the LOT will be automatically terminated and
production of the mixture stopped until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of
the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem
can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Evaluate any material represented by the
failing test result in accordance with 334-5.1.9.
Table 287-2
Small Quantity Pay Table for ATPB
Pay Factor 1-Test Deviation 2-Test Average Deviation
Asphalt Binder Content (%)
1.00 0.00-0.50 0.00-0.35
0.90 0.51-0.60 0.36-0.42
0.80 >0.60 >0.42
1/2 inch Sieve (%) if using No. 57 stone
1.00 0.00-11.00 0.00-7.78
0.90 11.01-12.00 7.79-8.49
0.80 >12.00 >8.49
3/8 inch Sieve (%) if using No. 67 stone
1.00 0.00- 11.00 0.00- 7.78
0.90 11.01-12.00 7.79-8.49
0.80 >12.00 >8.49
Table 287-3
Specification Limits for ATPB
Quality Characteristic Specification Limits
Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ± 0.45
Passing 1/2 inch sieve (%) if using
Target 10.00
No. 57 stone
Passing 3/8 inch sieve (%) if using
Target 10.00
No. 67 stone
288-1 Description.
288-1.1 General: Construct Cement Treated Permeable Base and Outlet Pipe as shown
in the Plans and Design Standards, Index No. 287. Use any one of the types of pipe listed in 288-
2, unless a particular type is specifically required by the Contract Documents. Use only
perforated pipe, and do not use open joints.
288-1.2 Concrete Plant and Cement Concrete pavement: Meet the requirements of
Section 346 for plant and equipment, and Section 350 for general construction requirements.
Work will be accepted in accordance with the applicable provisions in
Section 350.
288-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Coarse Aggregate ............................................... Section 901
Portland Cement................................................. Section 921
Water .................................................................. Section 923
Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipe .................................... Section 948
Polyethylene Pipe .............................................. Section 948
Geotextile Fabric................................................ Section 985
For Cement Treated Permeable Base, the concrete requirements of Section 346
are modified as follows:
Use Type I or II portland cement (no fly ash or other pozzolans permitted).
Composition:
Grade of coarse aggregate (stone) ..................... # 57 or # 67
Maximum Water/Cement ratio* .....................................0.40
Minimum cement factor** ......................................... 9 lb/ft3
Maximum Slump Range ............................... Not Applicable
Fine Aggregate .............................................................. None
Admixtures .................................................................... None
*The Engineer will approve the Water/Cement ratio.
**±2 lbs/ft3
Do not use materials which contain hardened lumps, crusts, or frozen matter, or are
contaminated with dissimilar material.
290-1 Description.
Construct a granular subbase as a component of an optional base.
290-2 Materials.
Select one of the materials listed below and conform to the following requirements:
Graded Aggregate ........................................................ 204-2
Limerock ............................................................ Section 911
Bank Run Shell .................................................. Section 911
Shell Rock .......................................................... Section 911
Cemented Coquina ............................................. Section 911
Recycled Concrete Aggregate (RCA)* ............. Section 911
*Do not use on interstate roadways.
SECTION 300
PRIME AND TACK COATS
300-1 Description.
Apply bituminous prime coats on previously prepared bases, and apply bituminous tack
coats on previously prepared bases and on existing pavement surfaces.
300-2 Materials.
300-2.1 Prime Coat: For prime coat, use a product listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL), meeting the requirements of 916-3, or other types and grades of bituminous
material if specified in the Contract Documents.
Where prime coats are to be diluted, certify the dilution was done in accordance
with the specific dilution requirements for each product and for each load of material used.
The Contractor may select any approved prime coat unless the Contract
Documents indicate the use of a specific material. The Engineer may allow types and grades of
bituminous material other than those specified above if the Contractor can show the alternate
material will properly perform the function of prime coat material.
300-2.2 Cover Material for Prime Coat: Uniformly cover the primed base by a light
application of cover material. However, if using EPR-1 prime material, the Engineer may waive
the cover material requirement if the primed base is not exposed to general traffic and
construction traffic does not mar the prime coat so as to expose the base. The Contractor may use
either sand or screenings for the cover material. For the sand, meet the requirements as specified
in 902-2 or 902-6, and for the screenings, meet the requirements as specified in 902-5. If the
primed base course will be exposed to general traffic, apply a cover material coated with 2 to 4%
asphalt cement. Apply the asphalt coated material at approximately 10 pounds per square yard.
Roll the entire surface of asphalt coated prime material with a traffic roller as required to
produce a reasonably dense mat.
300-2.3 Tack Coat: Unless the Contract Documents call for a specific type or grade of
tack coat, use PG 52-28 meeting the requirements of 916-2, heated to a temperature from
250 to 300ºF or use an undiluted emulsion listed on the APL, meeting the requirements of 916-3.
Heat the emulsion to the temperature recommended by the tack coat manufacturer.
For night paving, use PG 52-28 tack coat. The Engineer may approve an
emulsified tack coat for night paving if the Contractor demonstrates, at the time of use, the
emulsion will break and not affect the progress of the paving operation.
300-3 Equipment.
300-3.1 Pressure Distributor: Provide a pressure distributor equipped with pneumatic
tires having a sufficient width of rubber in contact with the road surface to avoid breaking the
bond or forming a rut in the surface. Ensure the distance between the centers of openings of the
outside nozzles of the spray bar is equal to the width of the application required, plus or minus
two inches. Ensure the outside nozzle at each end of the spray bar has an area of opening not less
than 25% or more than 75% in excess of the other nozzles. Ensure all other nozzles have uniform
Table 300-1
Prime Coat - Minimum Application Rates
Minimum Application Rate
Base Type
(gal/yd2)
Limerock, Limerock Stabilized, Shell-Rock, Recycled Concrete
0.10
Aggregate and Local Rock Bases
Sand-Clay, Cemented Coquina, Shell, and Shell Stabilized Bases 0.15
300-7.3 Sprinkling: If required by the Engineer, lightly sprinkle the base with water and
roll it with a traffic roller in advance of the prime coat application.
300-7.4 Partial Width of Application: If traffic conditions warrant, the Engineer may
require the application be made on only one-half the width of the base at one time, in which case,
use positive means to secure the correct amount of bituminous material at the joint.
300-8.5 Curing and Time of Application: Apply tack coat sufficiently in advance of
placing bituminous mix to permit drying, but do not apply tack coat so far in advance that it
might lose its adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust or other foreign material.
300-8.6 Protection: Keep the tack coat surface free from traffic until the subsequent
layer of bituminous hot mix has been laid.
1
V
V=
K (T - 60) + 1
Where:
320-1 General.
This Section specifies the basic equipment and operational requirements for hot mix
asphalt (including warm mix asphalt) production facilities used in the construction of asphalt
pavements and bases. Establish and maintain a quality control system that provides assurance
that all materials and products submitted for acceptance meet Contract requirements.
Table 320-1
Asphalt Plant - Materials Testing Frequencies
Material Property Minimum Testing Frequency
Once per 1,000 tons of incoming
Aggregate Gradation
aggregate
If daily production > 100 tons, once per
Asphalt Mix Asphalt Binder Content day; If daily production > 1,000 tons,
twice per day. *
If daily production > 100 tons, once per
Asphalt Mix Bulk Specific Gravity (Gmb) day; If daily production > 1,000 tons,
twice per day. *
If daily production > 100 tons, once per
Asphalt Mix Gradation day; If daily production > 1,000 tons,
twice per day. *
If daily production > 100 tons, once per
Asphalt Mix Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) day; If daily production > 1,000 tons,
twice per day. *
Each of first 5 loads, then once every
Asphalt Mix Temperature 5 loads thereafter, per day per mix
design.
RAP Asphalt Binder Content Once per 1,000 tons RAP
RAP Gradation Once per 1,000 tons RAP
RAP Maximum Specific Gravity (Gmm) Once per 5,000 tons RAP
*If less than 100 tons of mix is produced on each of successive days of production, resulting in a cumulative quantity of greater
than 100 tons, then perform the indicated test.
Table 320-2
Mix Temperature Master Range Tolerance
Location Acceptable Temperature Tolerance
Plant Mixing Temperature ±30 F
Roadway Compaction Temperature ±30F
Table 320-3
Mix Temperature Tolerance From Verified Mix Design
Any Single Measurement ±25°F
Average of Any Five Consecutive
±15°F
Measurements
327-1 Description.
Remove existing asphalt concrete pavement by milling to improve the rideability and
cross slope of the finished pavement, to lower the finished grade adjacent to existing curb before
resurfacing, or to completely remove existing pavement.
When milling to improve rideability, the Plans will specify an average depth of cut.
Take ownership of milled material.
327-2 Equipment.
Provide a milling machine capable of maintaining a depth of cut and cross slope to
achieve the results specified in the Contract Documents. Use a machine with a minimum overall
length (out-to-out measurement excluding the conveyor) of 18 feet and a minimum cutting width
of 6 feet.
Equip the milling machine with a built-in automatic grade control system that can control
the transverse slope and the longitudinal profile to produce the specified results.
To start the project, the Engineer will approve any commercially manufactured milling
machine that meets the above requirements. If it becomes evident after starting milling that the
milling machine cannot consistently produce the specified results, the Engineer will reject the
milling machine for further use.
The Contractor may use a smaller milling machine when milling to lower the grade
adjacent to existing curb or other areas where it is impractical to use the above described
equipment.
Equip the milling machine with means to effectively limit the amount of dust escaping
during the removal operation.
For complete pavement removal, the Engineer may approve the use of alternate removal
and crushing equipment instead of the equipment specified above.
327-3 Construction.
327-3.1 General: Remove the existing raised reflective pavement markers before
milling. Include the cost of removing existing pavement markers in the price for milling.
When milling to improve rideability or cross slope, remove the existing pavement
to the average depth specified in the Plans, in a manner that will restore the pavement surface to
a uniform cross-section and longitudinal profile. The Engineer may require the use of a stringline
to ensure maintaining the proper alignment.
Establish the longitudinal profile of the milled surface in accordance with the
milling plans. Ensure the final cross slope of the milled surface parallels the surface cross slope
shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Establish the cross slope of the milled surface
by a second sensing device near the outside edge of the cut or by an automatic cross slope
control mechanism. The Plans may waive the requirement of automatic grade or cross slope
controls where the situation warrants such action.
Operate the milling machine to minimize the amount of dust being emitted. The
Engineer may require prewetting of the pavement.
TABLE 327-1
Cross Slope Milling Acceptance Tolerance
Individual Absolute
Roadway Feature Average Absolute Deviation
Deviation
Tangent section
0.4% 0.2%
(including turn lanes)
Superelevated curve 0.4% 0.2%
Shoulder 0.5% 0.5%
In the event the distance between two edges of deficient areas is less than
100 feet, the correction work shall include the area between the deficient areas.
327-3.3 Verification: The Engineer will verify the Contractor’s cross slope
measurements by randomly taking a minimum of ten cross slope measurements per lane per mile
in tangent sections, at control points in transition sections, and a minimum of three cross slope
measurements in fully superelevated sections. The Engineer will measure the cross slope of the
milled surface by placing the level at the center of the lane and perpendicular to the roadway
centerline.
327-3.3.1 Cross Slope Deviations and Corrections: If the average absolute
deviation or an individual cross slope deviation falls outside the acceptance tolerance in Table
327-1, immediately make a comparison check at the QC test locations to verify the QC
measurements in the section. If the comparisons are beyond the acceptable comparison tolerance
in accordance with 327-3.2, stop the milling operation until the issue is resolved to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Correct any cross slope not meeting the individual deviation
acceptance tolerance at no cost to the Department. The Engineer reserves the right to check the
cross slope of the milled surface at any time by taking cross slope measurements at any location.
330-1 Description.
This Section specifies the basic equipment and construction requirements for hot mix
asphalt (including warm mix asphalt) pavements and bases. Establish and maintain a quality
control system that provides assurance that all materials, products and completed construction
submitted for acceptance meet Contract requirements.
Table 330-2
Thickness and Target Spread Rate Requirements
Mix Type Specification Section and Article
Type SP 334-1
Type FC 337-8
Type B 234-8
ATPB 287-8
330-8 Joints.
330-8.1 General: When laying fresh mixture against the exposed edges of joints, place it
in close contact with the exposed edge to produce an even, well-compacted joint after rolling.
330-8.2 Transverse Joints: Place the mixture as continuously as possible to minimize
transverse joints. When constructing permanent transverse joints, meet the surface requirements
as defined in 330-9. Construct temporary transverse joints in such a manner to allow traffic to
pass over it. When resuming the paving operation, construct a transverse joint by cutting back on
the previously placed pavement at a location where the straightedge requirements are met. At the
project limits, tie into the adjoining pavement layers as shown in the Plans.
330-8.3 Longitudinal Joints: Place each layer of pavement so all longitudinal
construction joints are offset 6 to 12 inches laterally between successive layers. Plan offsets in
advance so the longitudinal joints of the friction course are not in wheel path areas. The
longitudinal joints for friction course layers should be within 6 inches of the lane edge or at the
center of the lane. The Engineer may waive this requirement where offsetting is not feasible due
to the sequence of construction.
330-8.4 Placing Asphalt Next to Concrete Pavement: When placing asphalt next to
concrete pavement, construct the joint as shown in the Plans.
Table 330-4
Cross Slope Acceptance Tolerance
Roadway Feature Individual Absolute Deviation Average Absolute Deviation
Tangent section
0.4% 0.2%
(including turn lanes)
Superelevated curve 0.4% 0.2%
Shoulder 0.5% 0.5%
In the event the distance between two edges of deficient areas is less than
100 feet, the correction work shall include the area between the deficient areas.
330-9.3.3 Verification: The Engineer will verify the Contractor’s cross slope
measurements by randomly taking a minimum of ten cross slope measurements per lane per mile
in tangent sections, at control points in transition sections, and a minimum of three cross slope
measurements in fully superelevated sections.
The Engineer will measure the cross slope of the compacted pavement
surface by placing the level at the center of the lane and perpendicular to the roadway centerline.
330-9.3.3.1 Cross Slope Deviations and Corrections: If the average
absolute deviation or an individual cross slope deviation falls outside of the acceptance tolerance
in Table 330-4, immediately make a comparison check at the QC test locations to verify the QC
measurements in the section. If the comparisons are beyond the acceptable comparison tolerance
in accordance with 330-9.3.1, stop the paving operations until the issue is resolved to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Correct any cross slope not meeting the individual deviation
acceptance tolerance in accordance with 330-9.5 at no cost to the Department. The Engineer
reserves the right to check the pavement cross slope at any time by taking cross slope
measurements at any location.
334-1 Description.
334-1.1 General: Construct a Superpave Asphalt Concrete pavement with the type of
mixture specified in the Contract Documents, or when offered as alternates, as selected.
Superpave mixes are identified as Type SP-9.5, Type SP-12.5 or Type SP-19.0.
Obtain Superpave Asphalt Concrete from a plant that is currently on the
Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the
requirements of Section 105. Producers must meet the requirements of Section 320 for plant and
equipment and the general construction requirements of Section 330.
334-1.2 Traffic Levels: The requirements for Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures are
based on the design traffic level of the project, expressed in 18,000 pound Equivalent Single
Axle Loads (ESAL’s). The five traffic levels are as shown in Table 334-1.
Table 334-1
Superpave Traffic Levels
Traffic Level Traffic Level (1x106 ESAL’s)
A <0.3
B 0.3 to <3
C 3 to <10
D 10 to <30
E ≥30
The traffic levels for the project are as specified in the Contract Documents. A
Type SP mix one traffic level higher than the traffic level specified in the Contract Documents
may be substituted, at no cost to the Department (i.e., Traffic Level B may be substituted for
Traffic Level A, etc.).
334-1.3 Gradation Classification: The Superpave mixes are classified as fine and are
defined in 334-3.2.2.
The equivalent AASHTO nominal maximum aggregate size Superpave mixes are
as follows:
Type SP-9.5............................................................... 9.5 mm
Type SP-12.5........................................................... 12.5 mm
Type SP-19.0........................................................... 19.0 mm
334-1.4 Thickness: The total thickness of the Type SP asphalt layers will be the plan
thickness as shown in the Contract Documents. Before paving, propose a thickness for each
individual layer meeting the requirements of this specification, which when combined with other
layers (as applicable) will equal the plan thickness. For construction purposes, the plan thickness
and individual layer thickness will be converted to spread rate based on the maximum specific
gravity of the asphalt mix being used, as well as the minimum density level, as shown in the
following equation:
The weight of the mixture shall be determined as provided in 320-3.2. For target
purposes only, spread rate calculations should be rounded to the nearest whole number.
Note: Plan quantities are based on a Gmm of 2.540, corresponding to a spread rate
of 110 lbs/yd2-in. Pay quantities will be based on the actual maximum specific gravity of the mix
being used.
334-1.4.1 Layer Thicknesses: The allowable layer thicknesses for Type SP
Asphalt Concrete mixtures are as follows:
Type SP-9.5................................................. 1 to 1-1/2 inches
Type SP-12.5........................................ 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inches
Type SP-19.0..................................................... 2 to 4 inches
In addition to the minimum and maximum thickness requirements, the
following restrictions are placed on mixes when used as a structural course:
Type SP-9.5 - Limited to the top two structural layers, two layers
maximum.
Type SP-9.5 – May not be used on Traffic Level D and E
applications.
Type SP-19.0 - May not be used in the final (top) structural layer
below FC-5 mixtures. Type SP-19.0 mixtures are permissible in the layer directly below FC-9.5
and FC-12.5 mixtures.
334-1.4.2 Additional Requirements: The following requirements also apply to
Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures:
1. A minimum 1-1/2 inch initial lift is required over an Asphalt Rubber
Membrane Interlayer (ARMI).
2. When construction includes the paving of adjacent shoulders (less than
or equal to 5 feet wide), the layer thickness for the upper pavement layer and shoulder must be
the same and paved in a single pass, unless called for differently in the Contract Documents.
3. All overbuild layers must be Type SP Asphalt Concrete designed at the
traffic level as stated in the Contract Documents. Use the minimum and maximum layer
thicknesses as specified above unless called for differently in the Contract Documents. On
variable thickness overbuild layers, the minimum and maximum allowable thicknesses will be as
specified below, unless called for differently in the Contract Documents.
Type SP-9.5.................................................... 3/8 to 2 inches
Type SP-12.5.................................................. 1/2 to 3 inches
Type SP-19.0............................................... 1-1/2 to 4 inches
4. Variable thickness overbuild layers constructed using a Type SP-9.5 or
SP-12.5 mixtures may be tapered to zero thickness provided the contract documents require a
minimum of 1-1/2 inches of dense-graded mix placed over the variable thickness overbuild layer.
334-2 Materials.
334-2.1 General Requirements: Meet the material requirements specified in
Division III. Specific references are as follows:
Superpave PG Asphalt Binder ............................Section 916
Coarse Aggregate ................................................Section 901
Fine Aggregate ....................................................Section 902
Table 334-2
Asphalt Binder Grade for Mixes Containing RAP
Percent RAP Asphalt Binder Grade
0 - 15 PG 67-22
16 - 30 PG 58-22
>30 PG 52-28
334-2.4 Recycled Crushed Glass: Recycled crushed glass may be used as a component
of the asphalt mixture subject to the following requirements:
1. Consider the recycled crushed glass a local material and meet all requirements
specified in 902-6.
2. Limit the amount of recycled crushed glass to a maximum of 15% by weight of
total aggregate.
3. Use an asphalt binder that contains a minimum of 0.5% anti-stripping agent by
weight of binder. The anti-strip additive shall be one of the products listed on the Approved
Product List (APL). The anti-strip additive shall be introduced into the asphalt binder by the
supplier during loading.
4. Do not use recycled crushed glass in friction course mixtures or in structural
course mixtures which are to be used as the final wearing surface.
Table 334-3
Gyratory Compaction Requirements
Traffic Level Ndesign Number of Gyrations
A 50
B 65
C 75
D 100
E 100
Table 334-4
Limits for Potential Adjustments to Mix Design Target Values
Characteristic Limit from Original Mix Design
No. 8 sieve and Coarser ± 5.0%
No. 16 sieve ± 4.0%
No. 30 sieve ± 4.0%
No. 50 sieve ± 3.0%
No. 100 sieve 3.0%
No. 200 sieve 1.0%
(1)
Asphalt Binder Content 0.3%
Each Component of Aggregate Blend (2) 5.0 %
(1) Reductions to the asphalt binder content will not be permitted if the VMA during production is lower than 1.0% below the
design criteria.
(2) Revisions to FC-5 mixtures to be determined by the Engineer.
Submit all requests for revisions to mix designs, along with supporting
documentation, to the Engineer. In order to expedite the revision process, the request for revision
or discussions on the possibility of a revision may be made verbally, but must be followed up by
a written request. The verified mix design will remain in effect until the Engineer authorizes a
change. In no case will the effective date of the revision be established earlier than the date of the
first communication between the Contractor and the Engineer regarding the revision.
A new design mix will be required if aggregate sources change, or for any
substitution of an aggregate product with a different aggregate code, unless approved by the
Engineer.
Table 334-5
Master Production Range
Characteristic Tolerance (1)
Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ±0.55
Passing No. 200 Sieve (%) Target ±1.50
Air Voids (%) 2.30 – 6.00
Density (minimum % Gmm)(2) 89.50
(1) Tolerances for sample size of n = 1 from the verified mix design
(2) Based on an average of 5 randomly located cores
Table 334-6
Between-Laboratory Precision Values
Property Maximum Difference
Gmm 0.016
Gmb (gyratory compacted samples) 0.022
Gmb (roadway cores) 0.014
Pb 0.44%
P-200 FM 1-T 030 (Figure 2)
P-8 FM 1-T 030 (Figure 2)
If all of the specified mix characteristics compare favorably, then the LOT
will be accepted, with payment based on the Contractor’s QC test data for the LOT.
Table 334-7
Small Quantity Pay Table
Pay Factor 1 Sublot Test Deviation 2 Sublot Test Average Deviation
Asphalt Binder Content
1.05 0.00-0.23 0.00-0.16
1.00 0.24-0.45 0.17-0.32
0.90 0.46-0.55 0.33-0.39
0.80 >0.55 >0.39
No. 8 Sieve
1.05 0.00-2.25 0.00-1.59
1.00 2.26-4.50 1.60-3.18
0.90 4.51-5.50 3.19-3.89
0.80 >5.50 >3.89
No. 200 Sieve
1.05 0.00-0.55 0.00-0.39
1.00 0.56-1.10 0.40-0.78
0.90 1.11-1.50 0.79-1.06
0.80 >1.50 >1.06
Air Voids
1.05 0.00-0.50 0.00-0.35
1.00 0.51-1.00 0.36-0.71
0.90 1.01-1.70 0.72-1.20
0.80 1.71-2.00 1.21-1.41
0.70 2.01-2.50 1.42-1.77
0.55 >2.50 >1.77
Density (1)
1.05 0.00-0.50 0.00-0.35
1.00 0.51-1.00 0.36-0.71
0.95 1.01-2.00 0.72-1.41
0.90 2.01-3.00 1.42-2.12
0.80 >3.00 >2.12
334-8.2.3 Three or More Sublot Test Results: When three or more sublot test
results are available for a LOT, the variability-unknown, standard deviation method will be used
to determine the estimated percentage of the LOT that is within the specification limits. The
number of significant figures used in the calculations will be in accordance with requirements of
AASHTO R11-06, Absolute Method.
334-8.2.3.1 Percent Within Limits: The percent within limits (PWL) and
Pay Factors for the LOT will be calculated as described below. Variables used in the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the arithmetic mean X of the test values:
X
x
n
s
n x 2 x
2
nn 1
USL - X
QU
s
X LSL
QL
s
Table 334-8
Specification Limits
Quality Characteristic Specification Limits
Passing No. 8 sieve ( percent) Target ± 3.1
Passing No. 200 sieve ( percent) Target ± 1.0
Asphalt Content ( percent) Target ± 0.40
Air Voids ( percent) 4.00 ± 1.20
Density, vibratory mode ( percent of Gmm): 93.00 + 2.00, - 1.20
Density, static mode ( percent of Gmm): 93.00 + 3.00, - 1.50 (1)
(1): No vibratory mode in the vertical direction will be allowed. Other vibratory modes will be allowed, if approved by the
Engineer.
Table 334-9
Percent Within Limits
Percent within Limits for Selected Sample Size
Quality Index
n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6
0.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 50.00
0.05 51.38 51.67 51.78 51.84
0.10 52.76 53.33 53.56 53.67
0.15 54.15 55.00 55.33 55.50
0.20 55.54 56.67 57.10 57.32
334-8.2.3.2 Pay Factors (PF): Pay Factors will be calculated by using the
following equation:
Pay Factor = (55 + 0.5 x PWL) / 100
The PWL is determined from Step (8) of 334-8.2.3.1.
334-8.3 Composite Pay Factor (CPF): A CPF for the LOT will be calculated based on
the individual PFs with the following weighting applied: 35% Density (D), 25% Air Voids (Va),
25% asphalt binder content (Pb), 10% Passing No. 200 (P-200) and 5% Passing No. 8 (P-8).
Calculate the CPF by using the following formula:
CPF = [(0.350 x PF D) + (0.250 x PF Va) + (0.250 x PF Pb) +
(0.100 x PF P-200) + (0.050 x PF P-8)]
Where the PF for each quality characteristic is determined in either 334-8.2.2 or
334-8.2.3, depending on the number of sublot tests. Note that the number after each
multiplication will be rounded to the nearest 0.01.
The pay adjustment shall be computed by multiplying the CPF for the LOT by the
bid price per ton.
334-8.4 Payment: Payment will be made under:
Item No. 334- 1- Superpave Asphaltic Concrete - per ton.
337-1 Description.
Construct an asphalt concrete friction course pavement with the type of mixture specified
in the Contract Documents, or when offered as alternates, as selected. This Section specifies
mixes designated as FC-5, FC-9.5, and FC-12.5.
Obtain Superpave asphalt concrete friction course from a plant that is currently on the
Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the
requirements of Section 105. Producers must meet the plant and equipment requirements of
Section 320, as modified herein. Meet the general construction requirements of Section 330, as
modified herein.
337-2 Materials.
337-2.1 General Requirements: Meet the requirements specified in Division III as
modified herein. The Engineer will base continuing approval of material sources on field
performance. Warm mix technologies (additives, foaming techniques, etc.) listed on the
Department’s website may be used in the production of the mix. The URL for obtaining this
information, if available, is:
http://www.dot.state.fl.us/statematerialsoffice/quality/programs/warmmixasphalt/index.shtm.
337-2.2 Asphalt Binder: Meet the requirements of Section 916, and any additional
requirements or modifications specified herein for the various mixtures. For projects with a total
quantity of FC-5, FC-9.5, or FC-12.5 less than 500 tons, the Contractor may elect to substitute a
PG 76-22 (PMA) or PG 82-22 (PMA) for the PG 76-22 (ARB), meeting the requirements of
Section 916. Obtain asphalt rubber binder from a plant that is currently on the Department’s
Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements
of Section 916.
337-2.3 Coarse Aggregate: Meet the requirements of Section 901, and any additional
requirements or modifications specified herein for the various mixtures.
337-2.4 Fine Aggregate: Meet the requirements of Section 902, and any additional
requirements or modifications specified herein for the various mixtures.
337-2.5 Hydrated Lime: Meet the requirements of AASHTO M 303-89 (2010), Type 1.
Provide certified test results for each shipment of hydrated lime indicating compliance with the
specifications.
337-2.6 Liquid Anti-strip Additive: Meet the requirements of 916-4 and be listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
337-2.7 Fiber Stabilizing Additive (Required for FC-5 only): Use either a mineral or
cellulose fiber stabilizing additive. Meet the following requirements:
337-2.7.1 Mineral Fibers: Use mineral fibers (made from virgin basalt, diabase,
or slag) treated with a cationic sizing agent to enhance the disbursement of the fiber, as well as to
increase adhesion of the fiber surface to the bitumen. Meet the following requirements for
physical properties:
1. Size Analysis
Average fiber length: 0.25 inch (maximum)
Average fiber thickness: 0.0002 inch (maximum)
2. Shot Content (ASTM C612-10)
Table 337-1
FC-5 Gradation Design Range
3/4 inch 1/2 inch 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200
100 85-100 55-75 15-25 5-10 -- -- -- -- 2-4
337-3.3.2 FC-9.5: Meet the design gradation requirements for a SP-9.5 Superpave
fine mix as defined in 334-3.2.2.
337-3.3.3 FC-12.5: Meet the design gradation requirements for a SP-12.5
Superpave fine mix as defined in 334-3.2.2.
337-4.2 FC-9.5 and FC-12.5: Provide a mix design conforming to the requirements of
334-3.2 unless otherwise designated in the plans.
337-4.3 Revision of Mix Design: For FC-5, FC-9.5 and FC-12.5, meet the requirements
of 334-3.3. For FC-5, all revisions must fall within the gradation limits defined in Table 337-1.
Table 337-2
FC-5 Master Production Range
Characteristic Tolerance (1)
Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ± 0.60
Passing 3/8 inch Sieve (%) Target ± 7.50
Passing No. 4 Sieve (%) Target ± 6.00
Passing No. 8 Sieve (%) Target ± 3.50
(1) Tolerances for sample size of n = 1 from the verified mix design
337-6.2.1 Individual Test Tolerances for FC-5 Production: Terminate the LOT
if any of the following Quality Control (QC) failures occur:
1. An individual test result of a sublot for asphalt binder content does not
meet the requirements of Table 337-2,
2. Two consecutive test results within the same LOT for gradation on any
of the following sieve sizes (P-3/8, P-4, and P-8) do not meet the requirements of Table 337-2. The
two consecutive failures must be on the same sieve.
When a LOT is terminated due to a QC failure, stop production of the
mixture until the problem is resolved to the satisfaction of the QC Managers and/or Asphalt Plant
Level II Technicians responsible for the decision to resume production after a QC failure, as
identified in Section 105. In the event that it can be demonstrated that the problem can
immediately be or already has been resolved, it will not be necessary to stop production. When a
LOT is terminated, make all necessary changes to correct the problem. Do not resume production
(Any variation of this equipment requirement must be approved by the Engineer.) Establish an
appropriate rolling pattern for the pavement in order to effectively seat the mixture without
crushing the aggregate. In the event that the roller begins to crush the aggregate, reduce the
number of coverages or the PLI of the rollers. If the rollers continue to crush the aggregate, use a
tandem steel-wheel roller weighing not more than 135 PLI of drum width.
337-7.5 Temperature Requirements for FC-9.5 and FC-12.5:
337-7.5.1 Air Temperature at Laydown: Meet the requirements of Table 330-1.
337-7.5.2 Temperature of the Mix: Heat and combine the asphalt binder and
aggregate in a manner to produce a mix having a temperature, when discharged from the plant,
meeting the requirements of 320-6.3. Meet all requirements of 330-6.1.3 at the roadway.
337-7.6 Prevention of Adhesion: To minimize adhesion to the drum during the rolling
operations, the Contractor may add a small amount of liquid detergent to the water in the roller.
At intersections and in other areas where the pavement may be subjected to cross-
traffic before it has cooled, spray the approaches with water to wet the tires of the approaching
vehicles before they cross the pavement.
337-7.7 Transportation Requirements of Friction Course Mixtures: Cover all loads
of friction course mixtures with a tarpaulin, or waterproof cover, meeting requirements of 320-7.
Table 337-3
Small Quantity Pay Table for FC-5
Pay Factor 1-Test Deviation 2-Test Average Deviation
Asphalt Binder Content (%)
1.00 0.00-0.50 0.00-0.35
0.90 0.51-0.60 0.36-0.42
0.80 >0.60 >0.42
3/8 inch Sieve (%)
1.00 0.00-6.50 0.00-4.60
0.90 6.51-7.50 4.61-5.30
0.80 >7.50 >5.30
No. 4 Sieve (%)
1.00 0.00-5.00 0.00-3.54
0.90 5.01-6.00 3.55-4.24
0.80 >6.00 >4.24
No. 8 Sieve (%)
1.00 0.00-3.00 0.00-2.12
0.90 3.01-3.50 2.13-2.47
0.80 >3.50 >2.47
Table 337-4
Specification Limits for FC-5
Quality Characteristic Specification Limits
Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ± 0.45
Passing 3/8 inch sieve (%) Target 6.00
Passing No. 4 sieve (%) Target 4.50
Passing No. 8 sieve (%) Target 2.50
338-1 Description.
Construct Value Added Asphalt Pavement consisting of Asphalt Concrete Structural
Course and Asphalt Concrete Friction Course, subject to a three year warranty period after final
acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-11.
For purposes of this Specification, the Responsible Party, as designated herein, is
responsible for performance of the Value Added Asphalt Pavement including continued
responsibility for performing all remedial work associated with pavement distresses exceeding
threshold values determined in accordance with this Section, and as to which notice was
provided to the Responsible Party.
The work specified in this Section will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as
incidental to other Contract items.
TABLE 338-2
Category 2 Pavements
Type of Distress Threshold Values Remedial Work
Measured by Laser Profiler:
See Table 338-1
See Table 338-1
Rutting(1)
Manual Measurement: Avg. Remove and replace 1.5 inch(1a) the
Depth > 0.4 inch full lane width for the area plus 50 feet
Cumulative length of cracking
Cracking > 300 feet for Cracks > 1/8 See Table 338-1
inch
Surface Deterioration (2) See Table 338-1 See Table 338-1
Settlement/Depression(3) Depth ≥ 1/2 inch See Table 338-1
(1) Rutting: Rut depth to be determined by Laser Profiler in accordance with the Flexible Pavement Condition Survey Handbook.
For any LOT that cannot be surveyed by the Laser Profiler, the rut depth will be determined manually in accordance with the
Flexible Pavement Condition Survey Handbook, with the exception that the number of readings per LOT will be one every 20
feet. For partial LOT, minimum of three measurements not exceeding 20 feet apart will be checked. When the average of the
measurements obtained manually exceeds 0.40 inch, or if any individual measurement exceeds 0.6 inch, remedial work will be
required..
(1a) If pavement has an open graded friction course, remove and replace 2.0 inches.
(2) Surface Deterioration: As used in Table 338-2, Surface Deterioration includes Raveling and/or Delamination affecting the
Friction Course; Pot holes; Slippage Area(s); and Bleeding; all as defined and footnoted in Table 338-1.
(3)Settlement/Depression: Depth of the settlement/depression to be determined by a 6 foot manual straightedge.
TABLE 338-3
Category 3 Pavements
Type of Distress Threshold Values Remedial Work
Rutting N/A N/A
Cumulative length
of cracking > 500
Cracking See Table 338-1
feet for Cracks >
1/8 inch
338-5.5 Remedial Work: The Responsible Party will perform all necessary remedial
work described within this Section at no cost to the Department. If the pavement distresses
exceed threshold values and it is determined that the cause of the distress is due to the
embankment, subgrade, base or other activities performed by the Contractor, the Responsible
Party will be responsible for performing all remedial work associated with the pavement distress.
Should an impasse develop in any regard as to the need for remedial work or the extent required,
the Statewide Disputes Review Board will render a final decision by majority vote.
Remedial work will not be required if any one of the following conditions is
found to apply:
a. Determination that the pavement thickness design as provided by the
Department is deficient. The Department will make available a copy of the original pavement
thickness design package and design traffic report to the Responsible Party upon request. The
Responsible Party is responsible for performing all remedial work associated with the pavement
distress if the pavement design is provided by the Contractor.
b. Determination that the Accumulated ESALs (Number of 18 Kip
Equivalent Single Axle Loads in the design lane) has increased by 25% or more than the
Accumulated ESALs used by the Department for design purposes for the warranty period for the
pavement design life. In calculating ESALs, the Average Annual Daily Traffic (AADT) will be
obtained from the Department’s traffic count data and the T24 (Percent Heavy Trucks during a
24 hour period) will be obtained from the Department’s traffic classification survey data.
c. Determination that the deficiency was due to the failure of the existing
underlying layers that were not part of the Contract work.
d. Determination that the deficiency was the responsibility of a third party
or its actions, unless the third party was performing work included in the Contract.
If a measured distress value indicates remedial action is required per Table 338-1,
Table 338-2 and/or Table 338-3, the Responsible Party must begin remedial work within
45 calendar days of notification by the Department or a ruling of the Statewide Disputes Review
Board. The Disputes Review Board will determine the allowable duration for the completion of
the remedial work, but not to exceed 6 months.
In the event remedial action is necessary and forensic information is required to
determine the source of the distress, the Department may core and/or trench the pavement. The
Responsible Party will not be responsible for damages to the pavement as a result of any forensic
activities conducted by the Department.
As applicable to distress criteria for rutting, ride and cracking for Category 1 and
Category 2 pavements, when two LOTs requiring remedial action are not separated by three or
339-1 Description.
Construct asphalt pavement in areas where vehicular traffic does not travel, such as
pavement under guardrail, bicycle paths, median pavement, sidewalks, etc.
Also, chemically treat the underlying soil to prevent plant growth.
339-2 Materials.
For the pavement, use any plant-mixed hot bituminous mixture meeting the requirements
of a mix design verified by the Engineer, except do not use open-graded friction course (FC-5).
For bicycle paths, use a mixture that produces a finished pavement which will not distort or mar
under bicycle or mower wheel loads.
In general, the Engineer will accept the mixture on the basis of visual inspection with no
further testing required.
341-1 Description.
Construct an asphalt rubber membrane interlayer composed of a separate application of
asphalt rubber binder covered with a single application of aggregate. Obtain asphalt rubber
binder from a plant that is currently on the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers
seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 916.
341-2 Materials.
341-2.1 Asphalt Rubber Binder: Use a PG 76-22 (ARB) meeting the requirements of
Section 916 and listed on the Department’s Approved Products List (APL).
341-2.2 Cover Material: Use Size No. 6 stone, slag, or gravel meeting the requirements
of Section 901.
341-3 Equipment.
341-3.1 Power Broom: Provide a power broom for cleaning the existing pavement
capable of removing all loose material from the surface.
341-3.2 Spreading Equipment: Provide a self-propelled aggregate spreader that can be
adjusted to accurately apply the cover material at the specified rate and that spreads the material
uniformly.
341-3.3 Rollers: Provide self-propelled, pneumatic-tired traffic type rollers equipped
with at least 7 smooth-tread, low-pressure tires, and capable of carrying a gross load of at least
8 tons. Maintain a minimum tire inflation pressure of 90 psi, or as specified by the manufacturer,
such that in no two tires the air pressure varies more than 5 psi. Load the traffic roller as directed
by the Engineer.
341-3.4 Mixing Equipment: Use mixing equipment for asphalt rubber binder designed
for that purpose and capable of producing and maintaining a homogeneous mixture of rubber and
asphalt cement at the specified temperature.
341-3.5 Pressure Distributor: Use a pressure type distributor to apply asphalt rubber
binder capable of maintaining a homogeneous mixture of rubber and asphalt cement at the
specified temperature and consistently apply the material in a uniform manner.
346-1 Description.
Use concrete composed of a mixture of portland cement, aggregate, water, and, where
specified, admixtures, pozzolan and ground granulated blast furnace slag. Deliver the portland
cement concrete to the site of placement in a freshly mixed, unhardened state.
Obtain concrete from a plant that is currently on the Department’s Production Facility
Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105. If the
concrete production facility’s Quality Control (QC) Plan is suspended, the Contractor is solely
responsible to obtain the services of another concrete production facility with an accepted QC
Plan or await the re-acceptance of the affected concrete production facility’s QC Plan prior to the
placement of any further concrete on the project. There will be no changes in the Contract Time
or completion dates. Bear all delay costs and other costs associated with the concrete production
facility’s QC Plan acceptance or re-acceptance.
346-2 Materials.
346-2.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Coarse Aggregate ................................................Section 901
Fine Aggregate* ..................................................Section 902
Portland Cement..................................................Section 921
Water ...................................................................Section 923
Admixtures** ......................................................Section 924
Pozzolans and Slag .............................................Section 929
*Use only silica sand except as provided in 902-5.2.3.
**Use products listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Do not use materials containing hard lumps, crusts or frozen matter, or that is
contaminated with dissimilar material in excess of that specified in the above listed Sections.
346-2.2 Types of Cement: Unless a specific type of cement is designated elsewhere, use
Type I, Type IP, Type IS, Type II, Type II (MH) or Type III cement in all classes of concrete.
Use Type II (MH) for all mass concrete elements.
Use only the types of cements designated for each environmental condition in
structural concrete. A mix design for a more aggressive environment may be substituted for a
lower aggressive environmental condition. Do not use high alkali cement in extremely
aggressive environments or in mass concrete.
TABLE 1
BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURES
Slightly Aggressive Moderately Aggressive Extremely Aggressive
Component
Environment Environment Environment
Precast Superstructure
Type I, Type II, Type
and Prestressed Type I or Type III Type II (MH)
III, Type IP, or Type IS
Elements
Type I, Type II, Type
Cast In Place Type I Type II (MH)
IP, or Type IS
BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
346-2.3 Pozzolans and Slag: Fly ash or slag materials are required in all classes of
concrete. Use fly ash or slag materials as a cement replacement, on an equal weight replacement
basis with the following limitations:
1. Mass Concrete:
a. Fly Ash - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with fly ash is
18% to 50% by weight, except where the core temperature is expected to rise above 165°F. In
that case, ensure that the percentage of fly ash is 35% to 50% by weight.
b. Slag - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with slag is 50% to
70% by weight. Ensure that slag is 50% to 55% of total cementitious content by weight when
used in combination with silica fume, ultrafine fly ash and/or metakaolin.
c. Fly Ash and Slag (Ternary Blend) - Ensure that there is 10% to 20% fly
ash by weight, 50% to 60% slag by weight, and 30% portland cement by weight for mixes
containing portland cement, fly ash and slag.
2. Drilled Shaft:
a. Fly Ash - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with fly ash is
33% to 37% by weight.
b. Slag - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with slag is 58% to
62% by weight.
c. Fly Ash and Slag (Ternary Blend) - Ensure that there is 10% to 20% fly
ash, 50% to 60% slag by weight, and 30% portland cement by weight for mixes containing
portland cement, fly ash and slag.
3. Precast Concrete – Ensure that the precast concrete has a maximum of 25% fly
ash or a maximum of 70% slag. In extremely aggressive environments, ensure that the precast
concrete has a minimum of 18% fly ash or a minimum of 50% slag.
For fly ash and slag (ternary blend), ensure that there is 10% to 20% fly
ash, 50% to 60% slag by weight, and 30% portland cement by weight for mixes containing
portland cement, fly ash and slag..
4. For all other concrete uses not covered in (1), (2) and (3) above,
a. Fly Ash - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with fly ash is
18% to 30% by weight.
b. Slag - Ensure that the quantity of cement replaced with slag is 25% to
70% for slightly and moderately aggressive environments and 50% to 70% by weight when used
in extremely aggressive environments. Ensure that slag is 50% to 55% of total cementitious
content by weight when used in combination with silica fume, ultra fine fly ash and/or
metakaolin.
c. Fly Ash and Slag (Ternary Blend) - Ensure that there is 10% to 20% fly
ash, 50% to 60% slag by weight, and 30% portland cement by weight for mixes containing
portland cement, fly ash and slag.
5. Blended Cements:
TABLE 2
Specified Minimum Strength Target Slump Value (inches)
Class of Concrete
(28-day) (psi) (c)
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
I (a) 3,000 3 (b)
I (Pavement) 3,000 2
II (a) 3,400 3 (b)
II (Bridge Deck) 4,500 3 (b)
III (e) 5,000 3 (b)
III (Seal) 3,000 8
IV (d)(f) 5,500 3 (b)
IV (Drilled Shaft) 4,000 8.5
V (Special) (d)(f) 6,000 3 (b)
V (d)(f) 6,500 3 (b)
VI (d)(f) 8,500 3 (b)
346-3.2 Drilled Shaft Concrete: Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours before placing
drilled shaft concrete. Obtain slump loss tests results demonstrating that the drilled shaft concrete
maintains a slump of at least 5 inches throughout the concrete elapsed time before drilled shaft
concrete operations begin.
Obtain slump loss test results from an approved laboratory or from a field
demonstration. Slump loss test results for drilled shafts requiring 30 cubic yards of concrete or
less and a maximum elapsed time of five hours or less may be done in a laboratory. Obtain all
other slump loss test results in the field. Technicians performing the slump test must be ACI
Field Grade I qualified.
Ambient temperature conditions for placement of drilled shaft concrete for
summer condition is 85° or higher, and below 85° for normal condition. Perform the slump loss
test in one of the above ambient temperature conditions.
The concrete elapsed time is defined in Section 455. Obtain the Engineer’s
approval for use of slump loss test results including elapsed time before concrete placement
begins.
Test each load of concrete for slump to ensure the slump is within the limits of
346. Initially cure acceptance cylinders for 48 hours before transporting to the laboratory.
If the elapsed time during placement exceeds the slump loss test data, provide an
engineering analysis preformed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, and
knowledgeable in the area of foundations, to determine if the shaft is structurally sound and there
are no voids in the drilled shaft concrete. At the direction of the Engineer, excavate the drilled
shaft for inspection. Obtain approval from the Engineer before placing any additional shafts.
346-3.3 Mass Concrete: When mass concrete is designated in the Contract Documents,
use a Specialty Engineer to develop and administer a Mass Concrete Control Plan (MCCP).
Develop the MCCP in accordance with Section 207 of the ACI Manual of Concrete Practice to
ensure concrete core temperatures for any mass concrete element do not exceed the maximum
allowable core temperature of 180°F and that the temperature differential between the element
core and surface do not exceed the maximum allowable temperature differential of 35°F. Submit
the MCCP to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days prior to the first anticipated mass
concrete placement. Ensure the MCCP includes and fully describes the following:
TABLE 3
Class of Minimum Total Cementitious Materials Maximum Water to Cementitious
Concrete Content pounds per cubic yard Materials Ratio pounds per pounds*
I 470 0.53
I (Pavement) 470 0.50
II 470 0.53
TABLE 4
Maximum Allowable
Application/Exposure Environment Chloride Content,
pounds per cubic yard
Non Reinforced Concrete No Test Needed
Slightly Aggressive Environment 0.70
Reinforced Concrete
Moderately or Extremely Aggressive Environment 0.40
Prestressed Concrete 0.40
346-4.2.2 Control Level for Corrective Action: If chloride test results exceed
the limits of Table 4, suspend concrete placement immediately for every mix design represented
by the failing test results, until corrective measures are made. Perform an engineering analysis to
demonstrate that the material meets the intended service life of the structure on all concrete
produced from the mix design failing chloride test results to the previous passing test results.
Supply this information within 30 business days of the failing test results from a Professional
Engineer registered in the State of Florida, and knowledgeable in the areas of corrosion and
corrosion control.
TABLE 5
Description Method
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method* ASTM C 173
Making and Curing Test Specimens in the Field** ASTM C 31
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens*** ASTM C 39
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Core and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C 42
Initial Sampling of Concrete from Revolving Drum Truck Mixers or Agitators FM 5-501
Low Levels of Chloride in Concrete and Raw Materials FM 5-516
Density (Unit Weight), Yield and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete ASTM C 138
Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C 1064
Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete**** ASTM C 172
Static Segregation of Self Consolidating Concrete using Column Techniques ASTM C 1610
Slump Flow of Self Consolidating Concrete ASTM C 1611
Passing Ability of Self Consolidating Concrete by J-Ring ASTM C 1621
Concrete Resistivity as an Electrical Indicator of its Permeability FM 5-578
*The Department will use the same type of meter for Verification testing as used for QC testing. When using pressure type
meters, use an aggregate correction factor determined by the concrete producer for each mix design to be tested. Record and
certify test results for correction factors for each type of aggregate at the concrete production facility.
** Provide curing facilities that have the capacity to store all QC, Verification, “hold” and Independent Verification cylinders
simultaneously for the initial curing.
***The Verification technician will use the same size cylinders as the Quality Control technician.
**** Take the test sample from the middle portion of the batch in lieu of collecting and compositing samples from two or more
portions, as described in ASTM C172.
TABLE 6
Maximum Allowable Time
Non-Agitator Trucks Agitator Trucks
45 minutes 60 minutes
75 minutes* 90 minutes*
*When a water-reducing and retarding admixture (Type D, Type G or Type II) is used.
346-7.2.2 Placement Time: All the concrete in a load must be in its final
placement position a maximum of 15 minutes after the transit time has expired unless a time
extension is approved in advance by the Engineer.
346-7.3 On-site Batching and Mixing: Use a mixer of sufficient capacity to prevent
delays that may be detrimental to the quality of the work. Ensure that the accuracy of batching
equipment is in accordance with requirements of this Section.
346-7.4 Concreting in Cold Weather: Do not mix or place concrete when the air
temperature is below 40ºF. Protect the fresh concrete from freezing in accordance with
Section 400. The requirements of concreting in cold weather are not applicable to precast
concrete mixing and placement operations occurring in a temperature controlled environment.
346-7.5 Concreting in Hot Weather: Hot weather concreting is defined as the
production, placing and curing of concrete when the concrete temperature at placing exceeds
85ºF but is less than 100ºF.
Unless the specified hot weather concreting measures are in effect, reject concrete
exceeding 85ºF at the time of placement. Regardless of special measures taken, reject concrete
exceeding 100ºF. Predict the concrete temperatures at placement time and implement hot
weather measures to avoid production shutdown.
346-7.6 Adding Water to Concrete at the Placement Site: If the slump, as delivered, is
outside the tolerance range, reject the load. If the slump is within the tolerance range, that load
may be adjusted by adding water provided the addition of water does not exceed the water to
cementitious materials ratio as defined by the mix design. After adding water, perform a slump
test to confirm the concrete is within the slump tolerance range. If an adjustment is made at the
concrete production facility, perform a slump test on the next load to ensure the concrete is
within the slump tolerance range. Do not place concrete represented by slump test results outside
Table 7
Range of Average Compressive Strength Comparison Criteria
Less than 3500 psi 420 psi
3,501 – 4,500 psi 590 psi
4,501 – 6,500 psi 910 psi
6,501 – 8,500 psi 1,275 psi
Greater than 8,500 psi 1,360 psi
346-9.2 Sampling Frequency: As a minimum, sample and test concrete of each design
mix for water to cementitious materials ratio, air content, temperature, slump and compressive
strength once per LOT as defined by Table 8. When a mix design is used for a different
application, the LOT is defined by the application. The Engineer will randomly verify one of
every four consecutive LOTs of each design mix based on a random number generator. The
Department may perform Independent Verification testing to verify compliance with
specification requirements. All QC activities, calculations, and inspections will be randomly
confirmed by the Department.
TABLE 8
Class Concrete* LOT Size
I one day’s production
2,000 square yards, or one day’s production,
I (Pavement)
whichever is less
346-9.2.1 Reduced Frequency for Acceptance Tests: The LOT size may
represent 100 cubic yards when produced at the same mix design at the same concrete
production facility for the same prime contractor and subcontractor on a given Contract. Submit
test results indicating the average compressive strength is greater than two standard deviations
above the specified minimum strength for that class of concrete. Base calculations on a minimum
of ten consecutive strength test results for a Class IV or higher; or a minimum of five
consecutive strength results for a Class III or lower.
The average of the consecutive compressive strength test results, based on
the class of concrete, can be established using historical data from a previous Department
project. The tests from the previous Department project must be within the last 60 calendar days
or may also be established by a succession of samples on the current project. Only one sample
can be taken from each LOT. Test data must be from a laboratory meeting the requirements of
Section 105. Obtain Department approval before beginning reduced frequency LOT’s.
If at any time a strength test is not verified or the average strength of the
previous ten or five consecutive samples based on the class of concrete from the same mix
design and the same production facility is less than the specified minimum plus two standard
deviations, return to the maximum production quantity represented by the LOT as defined in
Table 8. Notify the Engineer that the maximum production rate is reinstated. In order to reinitiate
reduced frequency, submit a new set of strength test results.
346-9.3 Strength Test Definition: The strength test of a LOT is defined as the average
of the compressive strengths tests of three cylinders cast from the same sample of concrete from
the LOT.
346-9.4 Acceptance of Concrete:
Ensure that the hardened concrete strength test results are obtained in accordance
with 346-9.3. Do not discard a cylinder strength test result based on low strength (strength below
the specified minimum strength as per the provisions of this Section).
When one of the three QC cylinders from a LOT is lost, missing, damaged or
destroyed, determination of compressive strength will be made by averaging the remaining two
cylinders. If more than one QC cylinder from a LOT is lost, missing, damaged or destroyed, the
Contractor will core the structure at no additional expense to the Department to determine the
compressive strength. Acceptance of LOT may be based on verification data at the discretion of
the Engineer. Obtain the approval of the Engineer to core, and of the core location prior to
coring.
For each QC cylinder that is lost, missing, damaged or destroyed, payment for
that LOT will be reduced by $750.00 per 1,000 psi of the specified design strength [Example:
0 . 514
2 . 89
f c ( 28 ) 0 . 730 f c ( t ) e t
(Type II Cement)
0 . 191
5 . 38
f c ( 28 ) 0 . 483 f c ( t ) e t
(Type III Cement)
0 . 747
6 . 02
f c ( 28 ) 0 . 730 f c ( t ) e t
(Type II Cement)
0 . 672
2 . 36
f c ( 28 ) 0 . 826 f c ( t ) e t
(Type III Cement)
347-1 Description.
The requirements of this Section are applicable to concrete designated as Class NS
hereinafter referred to as concrete. Use concrete composed of a mixture of portland cement,
aggregates, and water, with or without chemical admixtures, slag, or pozzolanic materials.
Deliver concrete to placement site in a freshly mixed, unhardened state. Ensure the concrete is
placed and cured in a manner to ensure that the strength and durability of the concrete is
maintained.
347-2 Materials.
347-2.1 General: Certify that all materials used in concrete are from Department
approved sources, and free from frozen or other detrimental matter.
Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement..................................... Section 921
Coarse Aggregate ................................... Section 901
Fine Aggregate ....................................... Section 902
Water ...................................................... Section 923
Chemical Admixtures ............................ Section 924
Pozzolans and Slag ................................ Section 929
347-2.2 Admixture Requirements: Chemical admixtures may be added at the dosage
rates recommended by the manufacturer.
347-2.3 Substitution of Materials: Approved material sources may be substituted for
similar materials indicated on the originally approved mix design. Use originally approved mix
components and proportions, when unsatisfactory test results are obtained from the use of the
substituted material(s).
347-2.4 Material Storage: Use a concrete production facility that meets the following
requirements:
347-2.4.1 Cementitious Materials Storage: Provide a separate and clearly
labeled weatherproof facility to store each brand or type of cementitious material without mixing
or contamination. Provide a suitable, safe and convenient means of collecting cementitious
material samples at each storage facility.
347-2.4.2 Aggregate Storage: Provide suitable bins, stockpiles or silos to store
and identify aggregates without mixing, segregating or contaminating different grades or types
of materials. Identify Department approved pit number and aggregate gradation. Handle the
aggregates in a manner to minimize segregation and meet the specification requirements when
recovered from storage. Continuously and uniformly sprinkle coarse aggregate with water, for
24 hours preceding introduction into the concrete mix. Maintain stored aggregates in a
well-drained condition to minimize free water content.
350-1 Description.
Construct Portland cement concrete pavement in one course, on a prepared subgrade. Use
either the fixed-form or the slip-form method of construction. When reinforced cement concrete
pavement is specified or required, use concrete reinforced with steel bars or welded wire
reinforcement, in accordance with details shown in the Plans. The Engineer may require a
demonstration of equipment and paving operations.
If any uncontrolled cracks appear during the life of the Contract, remove and replace the
cracked concrete at no expense to the Department. Investigate and implement immediate
effective solutions to eliminate further cracks, in consultation with, and subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
350-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Concrete, Class I or Class I (Pavement) .............Section 346
Grinding Concrete Pavement ..............................Section 352
Curing Materials .................................................Section 925
Embedded Items..................................................Section 931
Joint Seal .............................................................Section 932
For concrete pavement placed using the slip-form method of construction, utilize
Concrete Class I (Pavement). For concrete pavement placed by hand in constructed forms, utilize
Concrete Class I or Concrete Class I (Pavement). LOT size for the use of either material shall be
as stated in Section 346 for Concrete Class I (Pavement).
350-3 Equipment.
350-3.1 General: Ensure the equipment and tools that are to be used meet the following:
The capability of handling materials and performing all parts of the work.
To be of such capacity that the paver operates continuously and at a constant rate
of production, with starting and stopping held to a minimum.
When equipment operates on the side forms, use scraping devices to clean
accumulations from the top of the forms and wheels.
The forms will be a rigid material and mortar tight. Ensure that the alignment and
grade of all forms are in accordance with the contract documents, prior to the placing of
concrete.
350-3.2 Slip-Form Paver: Provide a slip-form paver that is self-propelled and equipped
to spread, strike-off, consolidate, screed, and float-finish the freshly placed concrete in one
complete pass of the equipment, in such a manner that a minimum amount of hand-finishing will
be necessary to provide a dense and homogeneous pavement. Ensure that the equipment is of
such dimensions and arrangement as to cover the full width of the pavement strip being placed.
Use equipment that is adjustable as to crown and superelevation and that can shape and compact
the concrete into a dense and stable mass, to the required cross-section. Ensure that the crown
adjustment is readily controllable for accuracy in crown transitions.
350-11 Curing.
350-11.1 General: After completing the finishing operations and as soon as the concrete
has hardened sufficiently to not mar the surface, cover and cure the entire surface and, when the
slip-form method is used, cover and cure the edges of the newly placed concrete in accordance
with one or more of the methods described below. In cases where curing requires the use of
water, ensure that curing has prior right to use all water supplies. If the Contractor fails to
provide sufficient curing materials to adequately cure the concrete in place in a timely manner,
that portion of the concrete pavement section addressed in the QCP will be suspended. Do not
leave the concrete exposed for a period in excess of 30 minutes between stages of curing or
during the curing period.
Continuously cure the freshly placed concrete for a period of 72 hours, exclusive
of any periods when the temperature of the surface of the concrete falls below 50ºF.
350-11.2 White-Pigmented Curing Compound: Under this method, uniformly apply
white-pigmented curing compound to the surfaces to be cured, in a single coat, continuous film,
at the minimum rate of 1 gallon to every 200 ft2, by a mechanical sprayer.
At the time of use, thoroughly mix the compound in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
Do not apply curing compound during periods of rainfall. Do not apply curing
compound to the inside faces of joints to be sealed. Should the film become damaged from any
350-12 Joints.
350-12.1 General: Construct joints at the locations and in accordance with the details
shown in the Design Standards, Index Nos. 305 and 306 and the Contract Documents.
350-12.2 Longitudinal Joints:
350-12.2.1 Longitudinal Construction Joints: Where the pavement is poured in
strips less than the full width of the pavement, construct longitudinal construction joints in
accordance with the details shown in the Plans.
350-12.2.2 Longitudinal Lane-tie Joints: Construct longitudinal lane-tie joints
within the limits of a strip of pavement, in accordance with the details shown in the Plans.
Construct the plane of weakness by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete. Complete sawing
as soon as possible but in no case longer than 72 hours after placing the concrete.
350-12.2.3 Tie Bars and Bolt Assemblies: Place deformed steel tie bars or tie
bolt assemblies at the required depth, parallel to the finished surface, at right angles to the joint
and at the uniform spacing specified or required in the Plans. Place them in the plastic concrete
using approved equipment, or rigidly support them on the subgrade by approved devices capable
of preventing displacement prior to placing of the concrete. Do not paint or coat the bars with
any material before placing them in the concrete.
If placing tie bars along a longitudinal construction joint using the method
of inserting bars with a 90 degree bend in the edge of the plastic concrete and after the concrete
hardens straightening these bars, use Grade 40 reinforcing steel for such tie bars. Replace any bar
broken while being straightened in an approved manner.
350-12.3 Transverse Joints:
350-12.3.1 Transverse Construction Joints: Construct transverse construction
joints at the end of all pours and at other locations where the paving operations are stopped for as
long as 30 minutes. Do not place construction joints, however, within 10 feet of any other
transverse joint or within 10 feet of either end of a section of pavement. If sufficient concrete has
not been placed to form a slab at least 10 feet long, remove the excess concrete, back to the last
preceding joint. Form the joints by placing a wood or metal bulkhead accurately and securely in
place, in a plane perpendicular to the profile and centerline of the pavement. Install dowel bars at
the construction joints. Saw or form construction joints, in a manner similar to contraction joints,
so that a groove will be formed for holding the joint sealing compound.
350-12.3.2 Transverse Contraction Joints: Construct transverse contraction
joints at the interval indicated in the Plans consisting of planes of weakness created by sawing a
352-1 Description.
Grind existing concrete pavement in the areas designated on the Plans.
Grind new concrete pavement the full width of the travel lanes. Do not grind shoulders
unless indicated in the Plans or required to promote drainage.
352-2 Equipment.
Provide a power driven self-propelled machine that is specifically designed to grind
portland cement concrete pavement with diamond-impregnated grinding blades. Provide,
operate, and maintain in working condition all necessary equipment to ensure performance of the
work in the allotted time. Use equipment of the size, shape, and dimensions that does not restrict
the movement of traffic in areas outside the designated limits of construction. The equipment
will be of a size that can cut or plane at least 3 feet wide or as approved by the Engineer. Use
equipment that is capable of grinding specified surfaces without causing spalls at cracks, joints,
or other locations. The equipment will be capable of removing any slurry or residue resulting
from the grinding operation.
353-1 Description.
Replace the existing defective area of concrete pavement with portland cement concrete
free of any uncontrolled cracks. Repair the damaged area of adjacent slabs, caused by slab
removal at no cost to the Department.
353-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement Concrete ..................................Section 346
Coarse Aggregate ................................................Section 901
Fine Aggregate ....................................................Section 902
Portland Cement..................................................Section 921
Water ...................................................................Section 923
Admixtures ..........................................................Section 924
Curing Materials .................................................Section 925
Post-Installed Anchor Systems For Structural
Applications In Concrete Elements ....................Section 937
Pozzolans and Slags* ..........................................Section 929
Embedded Items..................................................Section 931
Calcium Chloride ......................... AASHTO M-144, Type 1
*For concrete pavement slab replacement, the use of pozzolans and slag is
optional.
Concrete pavement containing only dowel bars will be considered non-reinforced
concrete.
353-8 Curing.
Cure the slab as specified in 350-11, except for time and temperature restrictions. Use
curing compounds as specified in 350-11.2 after completing the finishing operations. After the
curing compound has been applied, cover the surface and exposed edges with two layers of white
burlap-polyethylene curing blanket conforming to Section 925 or insulating blankets approved
by the Engineer. Cover the slab with the curing materials as soon as the slab hardens enough to
353-9 Joints.
353-9.1 General: Construct transverse joints as specified in 350-12 and as shown on the
Design Standards, except that dowels bars are installed per 353-9.2. Tie bars will not be placed
along the longitudinal joints unless shown in the Contract Documents. Apply a liquid bond
breaker recommended by the manufacturer for the intended application to all vertical faces of the
adjacent slabs.
Clean and seal joints in accordance with Section 350.
353-9.2 Dowel Bars: Provide dowel bars in accordance with the details shown in the
Contract Documents.
353-9.2.1 Dowel Bars at Transverse Joint Between two Replacement Slabs:
Follow the requirements of 350-12 when providing dowel bars at a transverse joint between two
freshly placed replacement slabs.
353-9.2.2 Dowel Bars at Transverse Joints Between Existing and
Replacement Slabs: Follow the requirements of 350-12, except drill holes and install dowel bars
into the sawed face or end of the existing slab. Develop load transfer between existing and
freshly placed replacement slab. The dowels shall be free to move inside the replacement slab
and epoxy-bonded into the existing slab.
353-9.2.3 Dowel Bar Installation: Install dowel bars in accordance with
Section 416 except as modified herein. Use a gang drill (several drills mounted parallel in a rigid
frame), when enough operating space is available. Drill parallel to the centerline of the concrete
pavement.
Inject epoxy into the hole after cleaning and prior to dowel insertion. Start
injection at the back of the hole to force the epoxy to move forward during dowel insertion.
Twist the dowel a minimum of one full turn during the insertion to ensure that the epoxy
completely surrounds the dowel. The injection process and viscosity of the epoxy shall be
adequate to insure that the space between the surface of the dowel and the inside of the hole is
completely filled with epoxy.
Do not allow the epoxy to escape from the front of the hole after inserting
the dowel in the hole. Use a grout retention disk 1/8 inch thick, fabricated from nylon or plastic,
to hold epoxy in the hole during dowel insertion.
355-1 Description.
Construct Value Added Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Concrete Pavement),
subject to a five year warranty period after final acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-
11. This Section applies only to new pavements, including added lanes.
Furnish a copy of each mix design to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to any paving
work.
Perform all the associated work specified in this Section including continued
responsibility for performing all remedial work associated with pavement distresses exceeding
threshold values determined in accordance with this Section and as to which notice was provided
to the Contractor.
The work specified in this Section will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as
incidental to other Contract items.
TABLE 355-1
Concrete Pavement Threshold Values and Remedial Work
Type of Distress Threshold Values Remedial Work
Grind all deficient lots and
Ride Ride Number < 3. 50 partial lots in accordance with
Section 352.
Four areas in any Lane Mile Full depth slab replacement
exceeding 1 inch in width and for a minimum of 6 feet in
Spalling in the wheel path exceeding 6 inches in length OR length and the full width of
any single area exceeding 3 inches the slab in accordance with
in width. Section 353.
Four areas in any Lane Mile Full depth slab replacement
exceeding 1 1/2 inches in width for a minimum of 6 feet in
Spalling outside the wheel path and 12 inches in length OR any length and the full width of
single area exceeding 3 inches in the slab in accordance with
width and 12 inches in length. Section 353.
Full depth slab replacement
Four Cracks in any Lane Mile for a minimum of 6 feet in
Cracking with width exceeding 1/8 inch OR length and the full width of
any Crack exceeding 3/16 inch. the slab in accordance with
Section 353.
Cracking patterns that divide the Full slab replacement in
Shattered Slab
slab into three or more segments accordance with Section 353.
370-1 Description.
Construct special expansion joints for concrete pavement near the bridge approach slabs
that consist of a section of reinforced concrete subslab supporting the roadway concrete
pavement, with a portion of the roadway pavement over the subslab interrupted by a galvanized
sheet metal strip, in accordance with the details shown in the Design Standards, Index No. 306
and the Contract Documents.
370-2 Materials.
Bar Reinforcement: Use bar reinforcing steel meeting the requirements of 931-1.1.
Concrete: For the expansion joint subslab, use concrete meeting the requirements of
Section 347.
Galvanized Sheet Metal: Use galvanized sheet metal meeting the requirements shown in
the Plans.
Seal: Use compression seals in accordance with Section 932 and Design Standards
Index No. 306.
SECTION 400
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
400-1 Description.
Construct concrete structures and other concrete members, with the exception of
pavement and incidental concrete construction (which are specified in other Sections).
Refer to Section 450 for prestressed construction requirements additional to the
requirements of this Section.
For precast concrete structures meet the requirements of Section 450 for inserts and
lifting devices, handling, storage, shipping, and erection.
Obtain incidental precast products from a plant that is currently on the Department’s
Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements
of Section 105.
400-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Concrete .............................................. Sections 346 and 347
Penetrant Sealer ................................................. Section 413
High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM)**
........................................................................... Section 413
Reinforcing Steel ............................................... Section 415
Water .................................................................. Section 923
Curing Materials* .............................................. Section 925
Epoxy Bonding Compounds** ........... Sections 926 and 937
Joint Materials**................................................ Section 932
Bearing Pads ...................................................... Section 932
Non-Shrink Grout** .......................................... Section 934
Class 5 Applied Finish Coatings** .................... Section 975
Galvanizing Compound** ................................. Section 562
Dowel Bar Assembly** ..................................... Section 931
Filter Fabric........................................................ Section 985
*The Engineer will allow clean sand and sawdust for certain curing, when and as
specified.
**Use products listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
400-4 Falsework.
400-4.1 Plans: At the Engineer’s request, furnish detailed plans for falsework or
centering to the Department. The Contractor is responsible for results obtained by using these
plans.
400-4.2 Design and Erection: Design and construct all falsework to provide the
necessary rigidity and to support the loads without appreciable settlement or deformation. Use
400-5 Forms.
400-5.1 General: Provide forms, either of wood or metal, that are as follows: externally
secured and braced where feasible; substantial and unyielding; of adequate strength to contain
the concrete without bulging between supports and without apparent deviation from the neat
lines, contours, and shapes shown in the Plans. Design forms to withstand the additional forces
of vibration without apparent deviation from the desired shape or position. Assemble forms to be
mortar-tight. If using lumber forms, construct them of dressed wood of uniform thickness. Use
form liners on wooden forms where Class 3 surface finish is specified. Construct assembled
forms to render a concrete surface of smooth, uniform finish. Make provisions to remove forms
without injury to concrete surfaces. Remove blocks and bracing with the forms, and do not leave
any portion of the forms in the concrete. Use the same form system for a type of work
throughout.
400-5.2 Inspection and Approval: Do not place concrete in a form until the form has
been inspected and approved. Although the Engineer inspects and approves the forms, the
Contractor is responsible for obtaining satisfactory concrete surfaces, free from warping,
bulging, or other objectionable defects. Pay special attention to the ties and bracing. Where the
forms appear to be insufficiently braced or unsatisfactorily built, stop and correct defects to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
400-5.3 Non-metallic Form Materials:
400-5.3.1 Lumber: For all surfaces, use lumber that is not less than 3/4 inch in
thickness, dressed, and free of knot holes, loose knots, cracks, splits, warps, and other defects.
Proportion the spacing of studs, joists, and wales to exclude warps and bulges and to produce
true and accurate concrete surfaces. Only use structurally sound lumber.
400-5.3.2 Form Liners: Use form liners of durable, abrasion resistant materials
that are unaffected by water. Use liners with a hard surface texture capable of rendering concrete
surfaces of a smooth, uniform texture, without grain marks, patterns, or blemishes. Use form
liner material of sufficient thickness to eliminate the reflection of irregularities, undesirable
patterns, and marks from the forms to the surfaces. Replace liners as necessary to produce a
consistent concrete surface texture. Use form liners in large sheets and with true, tight-fitted
joints which are logically located. Obtain the Engineer’s approval of the layout of sheets. Do not
use liners which have been patched. Use liner material of the same stock throughout.
Non- Top
Polymer sheeting Polymer sheeting Polymer sheeting
cellular Cover
required on bottom side required on bottom side required on bottom side
form Sheet
with Top Non-
Cover cellular Polymer sheeting Polymer sheeting Polymer sheeting
Sheet required on top side required on both sides* required on both sides*
form
No polymer sheeting
Cellular form Not permitted Not permitted
allowed or required
* Polymer sheeting not required on bottom side of form located within box girders and U-beams.
400-8 Seals.
400-8.1 General: Wherever practicable, dewater all foundation excavations, and deposit
the concrete in the dry as defined in 455-15.2. Where conditions are encountered which render it
When using the percent of required strength, cast test cylinders for each mix for
compressive strength determination or develop a curing concrete strength versus time curve (S/T
Curve) which can be used in lieu of multiple test cylinders to determine when percent of required
strength has been met.
Prior to curve use; obtain the Engineer’s approval of the S/T Curve and its supporting
data. An approved testing laboratory may be used to provide this information with approval of
the Engineer. Plot S/T Curves using at least three different elapsed times that begin once test
cylinders are cast; however, one of the elapsed times must be prior to the Contractor’s intended
form removal. Each elapsed time plotted must have a corresponding compressive strength
computed by averaging the compressive strength of two test cylinders.
Cure such test cylinders as nearly as practical in the same manner as the concrete in the
corresponding structural component, and test them in accordance with ASTM C39 and
ASTM C31. Perform cylinder casting, curing, and testing at no expense to the Department and
under the observation of the Engineer. When the S/T Curve indicates a compressive strength
equal to or greater than the percentage of specified strength shown in the table above for form
removal, the Contractor may remove the forms. When the ambient air temperature falls 15ºF or
more below the ambient air temperature that existed during development of a S/T Curve, use a
S/T Curve that corresponds to the lower temperature and that is developed in accordance with
this section.
Do not remove forms at any time without the consent of the Engineer. Even when the
Engineer provides consent to remove the forms, the Contractor is responsible for the work.
0.004< x ≤ NT PS EI PS EI EI PS
(6) (3) (6) (3) (3) (6)
0.008
0.008< x ≤ NT PS EI
(6)
0.012
Elevation: 0 to 6 ft AMHW
0.012< x ≤ PS
(6) Investigate to Determine Appropriate
0.016
Repair (4, 5) or Rejection
0.016< x ≤
0.020
0.020< x ≤
0.024 Reject and Replace
0.024< x ≤
0.028
x > 0.028
Crack Width SA MA EA SA MA EA SA MA EA SA MA EA
x ≤ 0.004 NT NT PS NT PS PS PS PS PS PS
(6) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6)
0.004< x ≤ NT PS EI PS PS EI PS EI
Elev.: More Than 6 ft to 12 ft AMHW
More Than
x ≤ 0.004 NT NT NT NT PS PS PS PS PS PS
Land or
0.004< x ≤ NT PS PS PS PS EI PS EI EI PS
(6) (6) (6) (6) (3) (6) (3) (3) (6)
0.008
x ≤ 0.004 N NT NT NT NT NT NT NT NT
T
0.004< x ≤ N NT NT NT NT EI/M NT EI/ EI/M
0.008 T M
0.008< x ≤ N NT EI/ NT NT EI/M EI/ EI/
0.012 T M M M
AMHW
407-1 Description.
Design and construct a three-sided precast concrete culvert for the three-sided concrete
culvert structure shown in the Contract Documents. Three-sided precast concrete culverts are
defined as monolithic arched segments, frame segments with vertical walls and either horizontal
or arched top slabs, or three-sided proprietary precast concrete bridge systems.
Meet the requirements of 449-1.
407-2 Materials.
Ensure that the materials used for the construction of precast culverts have certification
statements from each source, showing that they meet the applicable requirements of the
following:
Portland Cement Concrete ..............................................Section 346
Reinforcing Steel ............................................................Section 415
Precast Concrete Drainage Products ...............................Section 449
Riprap ..............................................................................Section 530
Coarse Aggregate* ..........................................................Section 901
Fine Aggregate* ..............................................................Section 902
Curing Materials .............................................................Section 925
Materials for Concrete Repair .........................................Section 930
Non-Shrink Grout ...........................................................Section 934
Geotextile Fabrics ...........................................................Section 985
*The gradation requirements of aggregates are not applicable when using dry-cast
concrete.
407-7 Fabrication.
407-7.1 Casting: Cast precast elements in unyielding beds and forms. Ensure bearing
surfaces in casting forms are level and straight, and vertical surfaces are plumb prior to casting.
Ensure surfaces within the forms, against which concrete will be cast, are clean and free from
rust and hardened residual concrete. Provide full concrete cover clearance to all form wires and
other miscellaneous pieces of metal, except as permitted by Section 415. Bend all tie wires away
from the form surface to provide maximum concrete cover. Provide inserts and lifting devices in
accordance with 450-9.2.1.
407-7.2 Surface Finish: Finish the precast elements in accordance with 400-15.1.
407-7.3 Curing: Perform the curing by any method prescribed in Sections 400 and 450,
or by any other Department approved alternative curing method included in the manufacturer’s
QC Plan, or combinations thereof that have provided satisfactory results.
407-7.4 Fabrication Tolerances:
407-7.4.1 Internal Dimensions: Ensure the internal dimensions do not vary more
than one percent or two inches, whichever is less, from the design dimensions, with a maximum
of 3/4 inches. The haunch dimensions shall not vary more than 3/4 inches from the design
dimensions.
407-8 Joints.
Produce precast units with keyways at the adjoining surfaces or with butt joints between
adjacent units. In the keyways, use a non-shrink grout listed on the APL. Design and construct
the adjoining surfaces so that when placed together, they make a continuous line of units with a
smooth interior free of appreciable irregularities within the permissible variations given in
Section 11 of ASTM C1504. Seal all joints between precast units with a bituminous seal or low
modulus silicone sealant listed on the APL, and provide an external sealing band in accordance
with ASTM C877 along the outside of the joint. Determine the minimum width of sealing bands
by substituting the larger of the clear rise or span of the precast concrete box section, for the
equivalent pipe diameter in ASTM C877 Tables 1 and 2. Install external sealing band wrap in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Cover the external sealing band with a strip of
filter fabric adhered to the precast unit. Ensure that the filter fabric strip is a minimum of
24 inches wide and meets the requirements of Section 985. Obtain the Engineer’s approval of the
adhesive used. Exercise care during backfilling to prevent damage to the filter fabric.
407-11 Marking.
Clearly mark indelibly the following information on the interior of each precast unit by
indention, water proof paint, or other approved method as described in the producer QC Plan:
three sided structure span, rise, maximum and minimum design earth cover, skew angle, date of
manufacture, serial number, project number, and name or trademark of manufacturer.
410-1 Description.
Provide precast four-sided concrete box culverts as an alternative to the structure shown
in the Contract Documents. Only monolithic segments, or two-piece segments with three-sided
bottom sections and a simple support top slab section, are permitted. Two-piece segments are
limited to installations with a minimum of two feet fill height above the top slab.
Construct headwalls, wingwalls and other special features using cast-in-place concrete.
Precast wingwalls, cut-off walls or headwalls are not permitted unless otherwise noted in the
Contract Documents.
Meet the requirements in 449-1.
410-2 Materials.
Ensure that the materials used for the construction of precast box culverts have
certification statements from each source, showing that they meet the applicable requirements of
the following:
Portland Cement Concrete ................................. Section 346
Reinforcing Steel ............................................... Section 415
Precast Concrete Drainage Products .................. Section 449
Wire for Site Cage Machines ............................. Section 931
Coarse Aggregate* ............................................. Section 901
Fine Aggregate* ................................................. Section 902
Curing Materials for Concrete ........................... Section 925
Materials For Concrete Repair** ....................... Section 930
Non-Shrink Grout** .......................................... Section 934
Liner Repair Systems ......................................... Section 948
Joint Materials............................ ASTM C443, ASTM C877
..................................................................... or ASTM C990
Geotextile Fabrics .............................................. Section 985
* The gradation requirements of aggregates are not applicable when using
dry-cast concrete.
** Use products listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
410-6 Fabrication.
410-6.1 Casting: Cast precast elements in unyielding beds and forms. Ensure bearing
surfaces in casting forms are level and straight, and vertical surfaces are plumb prior to casting.
Ensure surfaces within the forms against which concrete will be cast, are clean and free from rust
and hardened residual concrete. Provide full concrete cover clearance to all form wires and other
miscellaneous pieces of metal, except as permitted by Section 415. Bend all tie wires away from
the form surface to provide maximum concrete cover. Provide inserts and lifting devices in
accordance with 450-9.2.1.
410-6.2 Surface Finish: Finish the precast elements in accordance with 400-15.1.
410-6.3 Curing: Perform the curing by any method prescribed in Sections 400 and 450,
or by any other Department approved alternate curing method included in the approved Producer
QC Plan, or combinations thereof that have provided satisfactory results.
410-6.4 Fabrication Tolerances:
410-6.4.1 Internal Dimensions: Ensure the internal dimensions do not vary more
than 1% from the design dimensions, with a maximum of 3/4 inch. Ensure the haunch
dimensions do not vary more than 1/4 inch from the design dimensions.
410-6.4.2 Slab and Wall Thickness: Ensure the slab and wall thickness are not
be less than that shown in the plans or approved shop drawings by more than 5 percent or
3/16 inch, whichever is greater. A thickness more than that required in the design will not be a
cause for rejection although payment will be for plan quantity only.
410-6.4.3 Length of Opposite Surfaces: Ensure the variations in laying lengths
of two opposite surfaces of the box section are not more than 1/8 inch per foot of clear span, with
a maximum of 5/8 inches for precast boxes with a clear span of up to 7 feet and a maximum of
3/4 inches for boxes with a clear span greater than 7 feet. The exception to this is when beveled
ends, for the purpose of laying curves, or skewed ends are specified by the Engineer.
410-6.4.4 Length of Section: Ensure the under run in length of sections is not
more than 1/8 inch per foot of length with a maximum of 1/2 inches in any box section.
410-6.4.5 Tongue and Groove Joints or Ends: Ensure the planes formed by the
ends of box sections do not vary perpendicular from the joint axis by more than the following:
1. Profiled Rubber Gasket Joints (ASTM C1677): 1/8 inch per foot of
internal span with a maximum 5/8 inches for internal spans or heights less than or equal to 7 feet,
and a maximum of 3/4 inches for internal spans greater than 7 feet.
2. Preformed Flexible Joints (ASTM C990): 1/4 inches for internal spans
or heights less than 5 feet, or more than 3/8 inches for internal spans or heights of 5 feet or
greater.
410-6.4.6 Position of Reinforcement: Meet the requirements of 415-5.10.2 for
the maximum variation in the position of slab steel. Meet the requirements of 415-5.8.2 for the
maximum variation of wall steel, except that the concrete cover must not be less than 1/4 inches
nor more than 1/2 inches from the design dimensions.
410-6.4.7 Area of Reinforcement: Provide the area of reinforcement as indicated
in the plans or approved shop drawings as a minimum. If welded wire reinforcement is utilized
in lieu of mild steel reinforcement, the provisions of 415-6 apply.
Vertically cast walls and slabs for four-sided sections 1000 psi
Three-sided box culvert bottom section 2500 psi
Horizontally cast self-supporting slabs or walls 2500 psi
Vertically cast and stored elements (walls and slabs) 1000 psi
Form/pallet supported elements (walls or slabs) 1000 psi
Self-supporting four-sided sections 1000 psi
Self-supporting horizontal slabs or three-sided sections 2500 psi
Limit the flexural tension stresses from handling to a maximum allowable stress
of three times the square root of the concrete compressive strength in psi, prior to the concrete
attaining the required 28-day strength.
410-9 Marking.
Ensure each section of Precast Box Culvert has permanently and clear marking on an
inside face by indentation, waterproof paint, or as specified in the Producer QC Plan, showing
the manufacture date, serial number, project number, and manufacturer’s name or symbol. The
top of the box culvert must also be clearly indicated with waterproof paint or as specified in the
Producer QC Plan.
410-11 Joints.
410-11.1 General: Make field joints for precast concrete box culvert sections with either
profile rubber gaskets or preformed joint sealants, unless otherwise detailed in the plans or
approved shop drawings. Joint openings at the outside face must not exceed 1-1/2 inches in the
assembled position at any location along the joint perimeter. Ensure a minimum 50% overlap of
the joint tongue and groove around the entire perimeter of the box in the assembled position.
Completely wrap the outside of each joint with Type D-3geotextile filter fabric as
specified in Section 985. Provide fabric with a minimum width of 2 feet and a length sufficient
to ensure a minimum overlap of 24 inches. The filter fabric must extend a minimum of 12 inches
beyond each side of the joint. Secure the fabric tightly against the box culvert sections with
metal or plastic strapping. Other methods which will hold the fabric securely against the wall of
the culvert until the backfill is placed and compacted, may be used when approved by the
Engineer. When specified in the plans, secure the joint by a suitable device capable of holding
the sections to line and grade as well as fully home. Remove these devices and repair locations
as necessary if intrusive into the concrete after placing and compacting sufficient backfill to
secure the sections.
410-11.2 Profile Rubber Gaskets: Install field joints in accordance with the joint
manufacturer’s instructions and meet the following:
1. Meet the requirements of ASTM C1677,
2. Store all gaskets in a cool place prior to use,
3. Furnish to the Engineer written details regarding configuration of the joint and
gasket required to create a soil-tight seal. Do not apply mortar, joint compound or other filler
which would restrict the flexibility of the joint.
410-11.3 Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants: Install field joints in accordance with the
joint manufacturer’s instructions and meet the following:
1. Meet the requirements of ASTM C990,
2. Furnish to the Engineer a written recommendation of the size (cross-sectional
area) of joint sealant which will create a soil-tight seal. Ensure that this amount is the minimum
quantity of bitumen sealant used. Do not brush or wipe joint surfaces which are to be in contact
with the joint sealant with cement slurry. Fill minor voids with non-shrink grout,
3. Thoroughly clean and dry all joint surfaces which are to be in contact with the
sealant material. When recommended by the sealant manufacturer, apply a primer of the type
recommended to all joint surfaces which are to be in contact with the sealant material.
411-1 Description.
Inject epoxy into cracks in portland cement concrete.
411-2 Materials.
Meet the requirements of Section 926 and as follows:
Use Type E compound epoxy for injection.
Use Type F-1 compound epoxy for sealing crack surfaces in preparation for
injection.
Use epoxy materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
411-3 Equipment.
For the equipment used to inject the epoxy, meet the recommendations of the epoxy
injection material manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Use equipment that has the capacity to automatically proportion the material
components within the mix ratio tolerances set by the epoxy materials manufacturer.
2. Use equipment that has the capacity to automatically mix the epoxy component
materials within the pump and injection apparatus. The Engineer will not allow batch mixing.
3. Use equipment that has the capacity to inject the epoxy resin under controlled
variable pressures up to 200 psi, with a pressure gauge mounted at or near the nozzle to indicate
the actual working pressure.
411-9 Acceptance.
Drill three cores located in each day’s work as directed by the Engineer. Take drilled core
samples containing representative crack sizes. The Engineer will accept the epoxy injection work
represented by the core samples when the core samples indicate that 90% of the crack void
greater than 0.006 inch wide is filled with epoxy resin and the concrete of the core sample is
bonded through the crack into a unit.
Reinject epoxy injection work which does not satisfy the acceptance criteria, and correct
it as necessary at no expense to the Department. Install additional injection ports as required to
achieve satisfactory reinjection of epoxy resin.
After the epoxy injection work is completed and accepted, fill the core holes with an
epoxy mortar consisting of one part by volume epoxy injection resin and four parts by volume
clean, dry sand. Supply the sand in moisture proof bags. Do not use previously opened bags of
sand for making epoxy mortar. The Contractor may use one part by volume epoxy material for
sealing with one part by volume clean, dry sand in lieu of the above.
413-1 Description.
Seal concrete surfaces and cracks in concrete using materials, surface preparation, and
application of penetrant sealers and high molecular weight methacrylates (HMWM) as specified
in this Section and in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. Consult with the
FDOT State Materials Office (SMO) in the event of conflict between the manufacturer’s
recommendations and this specification. Perform surface preparation and application to all areas
as shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
415-1 Description.
Furnish and place reinforcing steel of the quality, type, size, and quantity designated.
415-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Bar Reinforcement .................................................... 931-1.1
Welded Wire Reinforcement .................................... 931-1.2
416-1 Description.
Prepare and install post-installed anchor systems and dowels in hardened concrete as
indicated in the Plans, as directed by the Engineer, and in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and this Section.
Post-installed anchors and dowels in this Section are intended for use in structural
applications where designated in the Plans.
416-2 Materials.
416-2.1 Adhesive Bonded Anchors and Dowels: Use adhesive bonding material
systems which meet the requirements of Section 937 and are included on the Approved Product
List (APL). Use anchors and dowels installed in positions ranging from vertically downward to
horizontal.
416-2.1.1 Type HV Adhesives: Use Type HV adhesive bonding materials for all
installations other than constructing doweled pile splices. Do not use Type HV adhesives as a
substitute for Type HSHV adhesives.
416-2.1.2 Type HSHV Adhesives: Use higher strength Type HSHV adhesive
bonding materials for installation of traffic railing reinforcement and anchor bolts into existing
concrete bridge decks and approach slabs. Type HSHV adhesives may be used as a substitute for
Type HV adhesives provided the length and diameter of the anchor bolt and drilled hole remain
as designed for the Type HV adhesive.
416-2.1.3 Storage of Materials: Store materials delivered to the job site in the
original unopened containers within an appropriate facility capable of maintaining storage
conditions consistent with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
416-3 Equipment.
Install adhesive-bonded anchor systems with equipment conforming to the
manufacturer’s recommendation for the type of system installed.
416-7 Acceptance.
The Engineer will base acceptance of post-installed anchor systems on determining that
the material requirements of Section 937, the installation and testing requirements of this Section
and the placement requirements of the Plans have been met.
425-1 Description.
Construct inlets, manholes, and junction boxes from reinforced concrete as shown in the
Design Standards and the Plans. Furnish and install the necessary metal frames and gratings.
Construct yard drains from concrete meeting the requirements of Section 347. Adjust structures
shown in the Plans to be adjusted or requiring adjustment for the satisfactory completion of the
work.
For precast structures, meet the requirements in 449-1.
425-3 Materials.
425-3.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Sand (for mortar)..............................................................902
Portland Cement..................................................Section 921
Water ...................................................................Section 923
Reinforcing Steel ............................................... 931 and 415
Liner Repair Systems ..........................................Section 948
Brick and Concrete Masonry Units.....................Section 949
Castings for Frames and Gratings ....................................962
425-3.2 Gratings, Covers, and Frames: Use gratings and frames fabricated from
structural steel or cast iron as designated in the appropriate Design Standard. When “Alt. G”
grates are specified in the Plans, provide structural steel grates that are galvanized in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM A123.
Use rigid frames and covers either 24 inches or 36 inches or optional three-piece
adjustable frames and covers as indicated in Design Standards, Index No. 201.
For three-piece adjustable frames, the inner frame may include replaceable
resilient seats to support the cover. In addition, the inner frame shall indicate it is adjustable, by
clearly having the word “adjustable” imprinted into the exposed portion of the inner frame so
”adjustable” is visible from the roadway after installation.
425-4 Forms.
Design and construct wood or metal forms so that they may be removed without
430-1 Description.
Furnish and install drainage pipe and end sections at the locations called for in the Plans.
Furnish and construct joints and connections to existing pipes, catch basins, inlets, manholes,
walls, etc., as may be required to complete the work.
Obtain pipe culverts and drainage products from a plant that is currently on the
Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the
requirements of Section 105.
At the beginning of each project, provide a notarized certification statement to the
Engineer in accordance with Section 6. The Quality Control Manager’s stamp on each product
indicates certification that the product was fabricated in conformance with the Producer QC
Plan, the Contract, and this Section. Ensure that each shipment of drainage products to the
project site is accompanied with a QC signed or stamped delivery ticket providing the
description and the list of the products.
When the Producer Quality Control Program is suspended by the Department, accept
responsibility of either obtaining products from a plant with an approved Quality Control
Program, or await re-approval of the plant. The Engineer will not allow changes in Contract
Time or completion dates as a result of the plant’s loss of qualification. Accept responsibility for
all delay costs or other costs associated with the loss of the plant’s qualification.
Construct structural plate pipe culverts or underdrains in accordance with Sections 435
and 440.
For pipe culverts installed by jack & bore, install in accordance with Section 556.
430-2 Materials.
430-2.1 Pipe: Meet the following requirements:
Concrete Pipe .........................................................................Section 449
Steel Pipe ...............................................................................556-2.1
Round Rubber Gaskets ..........................................................Section 942
Resilient Connectors* ............................................................Section 942
Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arch ....................................Section 943
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Pipe Arch ...........................Section 945
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe ...............................................Section 948
Steel Reinforced Polyethylene Ribbed Pipe ..........................Section 948
Corrugated Polypropylene Pipe .............................................Section 948
Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe ..........................Section 948
Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Pipe......................................Section 948
Liner Repair Systems .............................................................Section 948
*Use resilient connector products listed on the Department’s Approved Product
List (APL).
430-2.2 Joint Materials: Use joint materials specified in 430-7 through 430-9 according
to type of pipe and conditions of usage.
430-2.3 Mortar: Use mortar composed of one part Portland cement and two parts of
clean, sharp sand, to which mixture the Contractor may add hydrated lime in an amount not to
exceed 15% of the cement content. Use mortar within 30 minutes after its preparation.
When rubber gaskets are to be installed in the pipe joint, the gasket must be the
sole element relied on to maintain a tight joint. Soil tight joints must be watertight to 2 psi.
Water-tight joints must be water-tight to 5 psi unless a higher pressure rating is required in the
Plans.
When laying pipes that pass through mechanically stabilized earth (MSE)
reinforced fill, connect the portion of the pipe within the wall to the external portion of the pipe
run only after the full height of the wall supported embankment is in place.
When Wall Zone Pipes are shown in the Plans, meet the following requirements:
1. Use resilient connectors on pipes entering and leaving drainage
structures.
2. Provide a 2 to 4 inch pipe overhang beyond the drainage structure
internal walls.
3. For pipes without welded joints, meet the following additional
requirements:
a. Pipe joints must be watertight to 10.8 psi when pulled out
2 inches from the fully home joint alignment.
b. Do not allow the gap between sections of pipe to exceed
5/8 inch for all pipe diameters.
430-4.2 Trench Excavation: Excavate the trench for storm and cross drains, and side
drains as specified in Section 125.
430-4.3 Foundation: Provide a suitable foundation, where the foundation material is of
inadequate supporting value, as determined by the Engineer. Remove the unsuitable material and
replace it with suitable material, as specified in 125-8. Where in the Engineer’s opinion, the
removal and replacement of unsuitable material is not practicable, he may direct alternates in the
design of the pipe line, as required to provide adequate support. Minor changes in the grade or
alignment will not be considered as an adequate basis for extra compensation.
Do not lay pipe on blocks or timbers, or on other unyielding material, except
where the use of such devices is called for in the Plans.
Non-SI Units
Pipe Size Gasket Diameter
12 inches through 36 inches (with 1/2 inch depth corrugations) 13/16 inch
42 inches through 96 inches (with 1/2 inch depth corrugations) 7/8 inch
36 inches through 120 inches (with 1 inch depth corrugations) 1-3/8 inches
Non SI Units
Band Thickness Pipe Wall Thickness
0.079 inch 0.109 inch or lighter
0.109 inch 0.138 inch or heavier
3/4 inch wide 0.109 inch or lighter
1 inch wide 0.138 inch or heavier
Furnish two 1/2 inch diameter connection bolts with each band, that
conform to ASTM A307, Grade A and are electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
Use a gasket with the joint that is a hydrocarbon blend of butyl rubber
meeting the chemical composition and physical properties of 942-2.2. Use a 3/8 by 3/4 inch
gasket for pipe fabricated from 0.109 inch or lighter material and a 3/8 by 1 inch gasket for pipe
fabricated from 0.138 inch and heavier material.
The Contractor may use a flange band coupler without the gasket for all
applications other than side drain, storm and cross drain, and gutter drain.
Do not use the flange band coupler to join dissimilar types of pipe.
430-9 Specific Requirements for Steel Reinforced Polyethylene Ribbed Pipe, Corrugated
High-Density Polyethylene Pipe, Polypropylene Pipe, and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe.
430-9.1 Sampling Requirements: Submit a sample of each pipe material and diameter
used on each project to the Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the installation, provided
that the pipe meets all of the following:
1. Pipe material is PVC, HDPE, steel reinforced polyethylene, or
polypropylene
2. Pipe is corrugated or ribbed
3. Pipe diameter is 12” or larger
4. Pipe is not perforated, unless the material is PVC or polypropylene
5. Pipe is intended for applications requiring 100 year design service life
as defined in the Florida Department of Transportation Drainage Manual.
The length of each sample pipe section must comprise at least seven regular
corrugations (not including the first three corrugations of the pipe on the bell or spigot ends).
430-9.2 Field Joints: Use gasketed joints to seal side drain, and storm and cross drain.
Use gaskets meeting the requirements of Section 449. Ensure that the pipe manufacturer
provides a joint design approved by the Engineer before use.
430-9.3 Installation Requirements Including Trenching, Foundation and Backfilling
Operations: Check structure shape regularly during backfilling to verify acceptability of the
construction method used.
Replace pipe deflected 5% or more of the certified actual mean diameter of the
pipe at final inspection at no cost to the Department.
431-1 Description.
Rehabilitate drainage pipe by installing a pipe liner in accordance with the requirements
of this Section. The Plans will indicate the location of the pipe to be rehabilitated, the material
composition and the alternate liner types that may be used to rehabilitate the pipe, and the
method of liner installation.
431-2 Materials.
Meet the requirements of Section 948.
431-5 Acceptance.
Inspect the complete rehabilitation by means of closed circuit television. Obtain written
approval from the Engineer prior to allowing persons to enter a host pipe. Provide the Engineer
with videos of all preliminary and final inspections.
435-1 Description.
Construct structural plate pipe and pipe arch culverts as shown in the Plans.
Obtain pipe culverts from a plant currently on the Department’s list of Producers with
Accepted Quality Control Programs. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the
requirements of 105-3.
At the beginning of each project, provide a notarized certification statement to the
Engineer from a company designated representative certifying that the structural steel plant will
manufacture the products in accordance with the requirements set forth in the Contract
Documents and plant’s approved Quality Control (QC) Plan. The QC Manager’s stamp on each
product indicates certification that the product was fabricated in conformance with the
Contractor’s QC Plan, the Contract, and this Section. Ensure that each shipment of structural
plate products to the project site is accompanied with a QC signed or stamped delivery ticket
providing the description and the list of the products.
When the producer’s Quality Control Program is suspended by the Department,
accept responsibility of either obtaining products from a plant with an approved Quality Control
Program, or await re-approval of the plant.
The Engineer will not allow changes in Contract Time or completion dates as a
result of the plant’s loss of qualification. Accept responsibility for all delay costs or other costs
associated with the loss of the plant’s qualification.
435-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Steel Pipe ...............................................................................Section 944
Aluminum Pipe ......................................................................Section 945
Liner Repair Systems .............................................................Section 948
When the Plans call for bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch, meet the coating
requirements of 944-4.
When other types of coating material are shown in the Plans, use a coating that consists
of at least two coats of the specified material, applied at the job site. Apply the coating by brush
or by spray.
435-4 Assembly.
Assemble the plates to form the pipe or pipe arch structure in accordance with the
diagram furnished by the manufacturer. Connect the plates by bolting tightly in all bolt holes
provided.
436-1 Description.
Construct Trench Drain, with one of the materials listed below, for the purpose of
collecting and removing surface run-off from paved areas. Furnish and install trench drain in
accordance with the Design Standards, at the locations shown in the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
436-2 Materials.
Provide preformed channels or pipe with sufficient strength to withstand construction
handling and placement of concrete backfill without deforming or deviating from line and grade.
Furnish the Engineer with certification from the manufacturer that the trench drain system meets
the requirements of this Section.
436-2.1 Channels/Pipe: Meet the following requirements:
Steel Pipe ............................................................Section 943
Aluminum Pipe ...................................................Section 945
Polyethylene......................... Section 948 and ASTM D3350
Polymer Concrete............................................ASTM D6783
Fiberglass ........................................................ASTM D3517
436-2.2 Concrete Backfill: Use concrete that meets the requirements of Section 347.
436-2.3 Grates: Provide steel grates and supporting frames that meet the requirements of
Section 962. Ductile iron frames and grates must meet the requirements of ASTM A536. Ensure
that ductile iron grates and frames are compatible and from the same manufacturer. Frames must
be anchored into the concrete backfill with studs bolts or lugs. Grates must have at least 30%
open area and fasten securely to frames to avoid rattling, Grates must be removable for the entire
channel length and have vandal resistant locking devices. Ensure that frames have a minimum of
4 inch long studs, bolts or lugs at all four corners.
436-2.4 Clean-Out covers for Type 1 Drains: Install steel or ductile iron covers that
meet the requirements of Section 962.
436-2.5 Outlet Pipe: Connect outlet pipe to the trench drain with standard manufactured
connectors. Unless a particular type is called for in the Plans, use any of the following types of
pipe:
Concrete ..............................................................Section 449
Steel.....................................................................Section 943
Aluminum ...........................................................Section 945
Polyvinyl Chloride .................................................... 948-1.7
Polyethylene ...............................................................948.2.3
436-3 Installation.
Submit to the Engineer the proposed method of installation, noting any deviation from
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Place concrete backfill in the trench against undisturbed
material at the sides and bottom of the trench in a manner that will prevent floating or shifting of
the trench drain, and will prevent voids in, or segregation of the concrete. Tamp and spade to
440-1 Description.
Construct underdrains, underdrain cleanout structures, underdrain inspection boxes and
underdrain outlet pipes. Use any one of the types of pipe listed in 440-2, unless a particular type
is specifically required. Use only perforated pipe, and do not use open joints.
440-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Concrete Pipe ..................................................... Section 449
Filter Aggregate ................................................. Section 902
Corrugated Steel Pipe ........................................ Section 943
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe ............................... Section 945
Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipe .................................... Section 948
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipe ..... Section 948
Corrugated Polypropylene Pipe ......................... Section 948
Steel Reinforced Polyethylene Ribbed Pipe ...... Section 948
Filter Fabric Sock............................................... Section 948
Geotextile Fabrics .............................................. Section 985
Use bitumized-fiber pipe only when called for in the Contract Documents.
443-1 Description.
Construct french drains, utilizing one of the authorized types of pipe, with coarse
aggregate, or ballast rock when specified, and filter fabric.
443-2 Materials.
443-2.1 Pipe: Unless a particular type is specified in the Plans, pipe furnished may be
any of the following types:
1. Concrete Pipe (Bell & Spigot): Slotted or perforated concrete pipe may be
used. Meet the requirements of Section 449 for concrete pipe. Do not use gaskets. Fully insert
the spigot in the bell, and bring home. Conform to Design Standards, Index No. 285 for slotted
pipe. Use perforated pipe having perforations equally located 360 degrees around the pipe. Use
pipe having not less than 30 round perforations, 3/8 inch each, per square foot of inside pipe
surface. Extend perforations to within 6 inches of the bell or spigot area. The Engineer will
permit other perforations not less than 5/16 inch nor more than 3/8 inch in the least dimension if
they provide an opening area not less than 3.31 in2/ft2 of pipe surface.
2. Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Perforated Pipe: Meet the requirements of
Section 945. Use perforated pipe having perforations equally located 360 degrees around the
pipe. Locate perforations either on the inside crests or on the neutral axis of all corrugations
except that perforations are not required within 4 inches of each end of each length of pipe or in
a corrugation where seams are located.
Provide pipe having not less than 30 round perforations, 3/8 inch each, per square
foot of pipe surface. The Engineer will permit other perforations not less than 5/16 inch nor more
than 3/8 inch in the least dimension if they provide an opening area not less than 3.31 in2/ft2 of
pipe surface.
3. Corrugated Steel Perforated Pipe: Meet the requirements of Section 943. Space
the perforations and meet the requirements as specified in (2) above.
4. Bituminous Coated Corrugated Steel Perforated Pipe: Meet the requirements of
Section 943. Space the perforations and meet the requirements as specified in (2) above. Place
the perforations prior to the bituminous coating. The Engineer will accept the minimum opening
of not less than 3.31 in2/ft2 of pipe if 50% of the opening area is maintained after coating.
5. Corrugated High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: Meet the requirements of
948. Space the perforations and meet the requirements as specified in (2) above.
6. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Meet the requirements of 948. Space the
perforations and meet the requirements as specified in (2) above.
7. Corrugated Polypropylene Pipe: Meet the requirements of Section 948. Space
the perforations and meet the requirements as specified in (2) above.
443-2.2 Coarse Aggregate: Meet the requirements of 901-1.4 for No. 4 stone.
443-2.3 Select Fill: Use select fill meeting the requirements of Section 911.
446-1 Description.
Construct Edgedrain (Draincrete), and Edgedrain Outlet Pipe as shown in the Plans and
Design Standards, Index No. 287. Use any one of the types of pipe listed in 446-2, unless a
particular type is specifically required within the Contract Documents. Use only perforated pipe,
and do not use open joints.
446-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement Concrete* ............................... Section 347
Coarse Aggregate ............................................... Section 901
Portland Cement................................................. Section 921
Water .................................................................. Section 923
Polyvinyl-Chloride Pipe .................................... Section 948
Polyethylene Pipe .............................................. Section 948
Filter Fabric........................................................ Section 985
*For Draincrete, the concrete requirements of Section 347 are modified as
follows:
Use Type I or II portland cement (no fly ash or other pozzolans permitted).
Composition:
Grade of coarse aggregate (stone) ... #57, #67 or #89
Maximum Water/Cement ratio ...........................0.38
Minimum cement factor ...... 385 lb/yd3 of Draincrete
Maximum Slump Range ................... Not Applicable
Fine Aggregate .................................................. None
Admixtures ........................................................ None
Do not use materials which contain hardened lumps, crusts, or frozen matter, or are
contaminated with dissimilar material.
446-4 Construction.
446-4.1 Excavating Trench: Meet the requirements of Section 440.
446-4.2 Laying Pipe: Meet the requirements of Section 440.
446-4.3 Placement of Draincrete: Obtain the Engineer’s approval before placing the
draincrete. Deliver the draincrete to the site of placement in a freshly mixed unhardened state.
Deposit draincrete in the form or trench by a method approved by the Engineer, to ensure
uniform distribution. Do not use vibrators. Avoid displacement or damage to the pipe or filter
fabric.
449-1 Description.
Precast concrete drainage products hereinafter called products, may include but are not
limited to, round concrete pipe, elliptical concrete pipe, underdrains, manholes, endwalls, inlets,
junction boxes, three-sided precast concrete culverts, and precast concrete box culverts.
Ensure that all precast drainage products are designed and manufactured in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Obtain precast concrete pipes, box culverts, and drainage structures from a plant that is
currently on the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list
shall meet the requirements of Section 105.
At the beginning of each project, provide a notarized certification statement to the
Engineer from a company designated representative certifying that the plant will manufacture the
products in accordance with the requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and Producer
Quality Control (QC) Plan. The Quality Control Manager’s stamp on each product indicates
certification that the product was fabricated in conformance with the Producer QC Plan, the
Contract, and this Section. Ensure that each shipment of precast concrete products to the project
site is accompanied with a QC signed or stamped delivery ticket providing the description and
the list of the products.
When the Producer Quality Control Program is suspended by the Department, accept
responsibility of either obtaining products from a plant with an approved Quality Control
Program, or await re-approval of the plant. The Engineer will not allow changes in Contract
Time or completion dates as a result of the plant’s loss of qualification. Accept responsibility for
all delay costs or other costs associated with the loss of the plant’s qualification.
449-2 Materials.
Ensure that the materials used for the construction of the precast drainage products have a
certification statement from the source, showing that they meet the applicable requirements of
the Specifications with the following modifications:
449-4.6 Rejection of Concrete Pipe: Specific causes for rejection of concrete pipe, in
addition to any failure to meet the general requirements specified in the Contract Documents, are
as follows:
1. Failure to meet the requirements listed in ASTM C76 for permissible variations
in dimensions with the modifications outlined in 449-4.1 and 449-4.2.
2. Occurrence of defects listed in ASTM C76.
450-1 Description.
Fabricate, store, transport and erect precast/prestressed concrete members prestressed by
the pretensioning method. Pretensioned precast prestressed concrete products are products
prestressed by the pretensioning method. In this method, steel components are stressed and
anchored; the concrete for the product is then cast and cured, and finally the stress in the steel
components is released from the anchorages to the concrete through bond, after the concrete has
attained its specified release strength.
A precast prestressed concrete plant, hereinafter called plant, is an independent operating
facility capable of performing all the operations necessary to fabricate precast/prestressed
concrete products.
Obtain precast/prestressed products from a plant that is currently on the Department’s
Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements
of Section 105.
When the plant’s Quality Control Program is suspended, accept responsibility of either
obtaining precast/prestressed products from a precast/prestressed concrete plant with an accepted
Quality Control Program, or await re-approval of the Producer Quality Control Program. The
Engineer will not allow changes in Contract Time or completion dates as a result of the concrete
plant’s Quality Control Program suspension. Accept responsibility for all delay costs or other
costs associated with the plant’s Quality Control Program suspension.
450-3 Materials.
450-3.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Concrete ..................................................Section 346
Steel Strands*..........................................Section 933
Steel Bars ................................................Section 933
Steel Accessories ....................................Section 933
Reinforcing Steel and Metal Welded Wire
Reinforcement** ..................... Sections 415 and 931
Embedded Duct Enclosures ....................Section 462
Membrane Curing compounds*** ..........Section 925
Epoxy Resin Compounds........................Section 926
Burlap ......................................................Section 925
Curing Blanket ............................................... 400-16
Penetrant sealer*** .................................Section 413
Methacrylate ...........................................Section 413
Epoxy Injection of Cracks ......................Section 411
* Do not use strands from more than one source in any individual
prestressed element, with the exception of the partially tensioned strands (dormant strands).
** The steel spirals for reinforcing in concrete piling may be
manufactured from stock meeting the requirements of any grade of reinforcing steel, as shown in
ASTM A615 for steel bars, or ASTM A1064 for steel wire.
*** Use membrane curing compounds and sealers that are compatible
with coating or other materials that are applied to concrete surface.
Use inserts in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and
within their certified capacities and application qualifications. Do not use aluminum inserts.
Use draped strand devices of sufficient rigidity having adequate support to retain
the position of the strand unchanged under the induced load. Do not allow the devices to induce
friction to the tendons such that the required jacking force and elongation cannot be attained.
450-3.2 Strand Chucks and Splice Chucks: For pretensioning, use strand chucks that
are capable of anchoring the strands without slippage after seating and ensure against strand
failure within the grips at loads less than 95% of ultimate strength.
Provide manufacturer’s certification that splice chucks used to transmit the
prestressing force from one prestressing tendon to another are capable to hold at least 95% of the
ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing strand.
Do not use wedges that become worn, cracked, deformed, or that allow dead end
seating in excess of 3/8 inch. Use components from the same manufacturer to make up chucks
and to provide proper wedge fit.
450-6 Forms.
450-6.1 General: Use metal side and bottom forms, unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. For members with special shapes such as corner sheet piles, wood forms
are permitted. Slab units and sheet piles may be cast on concrete surfaces meeting the profile
dimensional tolerances of 450-6.3. Apply release agents in accordance with the manufacturer’s
450-11 Detensioning.
450-11.1 General: The required concrete strength at which the prestressing force may be
transferred to the concrete in a product will be a minimum of 4,000 psi, unless specified
otherwise in the Plans. Verify the release strength by compressive strength cylinder tests or other
approved means, no later than 24 hours after casting and every 24 hours thereafter until release
strength is developed. In lieu of every 24 hour testing, the contractor is permitted to estimate the
strength development of concrete by the maturity method in accordance with ASTM C1074, the
pulse velocity method in accordance with ASTM C597, or any other nondestructive test method
acceptable to the Engineer, until the time of the detensioning. Before detensioning, verify the
concrete release strength by testing the compressive strength test cylinders. Make a minimum of
two compressive strength release test cylinders daily for each individual mix or for each LOT, or
fraction thereof, of given concrete mix design where the daily consumption exceeds this volume
or when non-continuous batching or dissimilar curing is used. The release strength test,
representing the LOT, is the average compressive strength of two test cylinders, which are cured
under conditions similar to the product or match-cured test specimens, which are match cured
until the time of release. For products cured using accelerated curing, release the prestressing
force immediately after terminating the accelerated curing process. After the detensioning
operation is completed, continue to 72 hour curing period using one of the methods listed in 450-
10.6. For products cured using methods other than accelerated curing, release the prestressing
force within a detensioning time limit, not to exceed five calendar days after the verification of
release strength by compressive strength cylinder test or other approved strength gain monitoring
system. For all products in a casting line, use the same test method for determining their release
strengths. Ensure the detensioning time limit is included in the Producer QC Plan. Cure concrete
cylinders used for detensioning strength tests in the same manner and location as the prestressed
concrete products.
For I-girders, where side forms are loosened upon setting of concrete or removed before
the 72 hour curing period is complete, the top flange dormant strands may be released after the
concrete reaches a compressive strength of 2,000 psi.
451-1 Description.
Construct prestressed soil anchors consisting of a high strength steel tendon anchored to
the retaining wall on one end and to the soil on the other end through a bulb of pressure injected
portland cement concrete grout. Test each anchor by prestressing to the load indicated in the
Contract Documents before locking off to the retaining wall.
Select the prestressed soil anchor type and the installation method, and determine the
bond length and anchor diameter. Assume responsibility for installing prestressed soil anchors
that develop the load-carrying capacity indicated in the Plans in accordance with 451-7.
Provide corrosion protection for permanent prestressed soil anchors. The Engineer will
not require corrosion protection for temporary prestressed soil anchors. Protect anchor tendons
from corrosion as shown in the Plans in accordance with 451-8.
451-2 Definitions.
1. Anchorage Devices: The anchor head wedges or nuts which grip the prestressing steel.
2. Bearing Plate: The steel plate which distributes the prestressed soil anchor force to the
structure.
3. Bond Length: The length of the prestressed soil anchor which is bonded to the ground
and transmits the tensile force to the soil or rock. For a compression prestressed soil anchor, the
bond length will be different from the tendon bond length.
4. Factored Design Load: The maximum anticipated load that will be applied to the
prestressed soil anchor during its service life after completing stressing and testing. The factored
design load includes appropriate load factors to ensure that the overall structure has adequate
strength for its intended use.
5. Fine-grained Soils: Soils with at least 50% of the material smaller than the No. 200
sieve size.
6. Tendon: The complete anchor assembly, excluding grout, consisting of anchorage and
prestressing steel with sheathing and coating when required.
7. Coupling: The means by which the prestressing force may be transmitted from one
partial-length of prestressing tendon to another.
8. Sheathing: Enclosure around the prestressing steel to avoid temporary or permanent
bond between the prestressing steel and the surrounding grout or to provide corrosion protection.
9. Coating: Material used to protect against corrosion or lubricate the prestressing steel.
10. Anchor Grout: Portland cement grout that is injected into the anchor hole to provide
anchorage at the bond length of the tendon.
11. Proof Load: Temporary loading of an anchor to its factored design load for testing
purposes.
12. Transfer (Lock-Off) Load: Prestressing force in an anchor after proof loading
immediately after the force has been transferred from the jack to the stressing anchorage.
13. Stressing Anchorage: That portion of assembly not within the earth fill.
14. Alignment Load: A small load maintained on an anchor during testing sufficient to
keep the testing equipment positioned.
15. Performance Test: Incremental test loading and unloading of a prestressed anchor
recording the movement of the tendon at each increment.
451-3 Qualifications.
The Contractor or subcontractor performing the work described in this Section shall have
installed prestressed soil anchors for a minimum of five years. At the preconstruction conference,
the Contractor shall submit a list containing at least five projects, completed within the last five
years, where the Contractor has installed prestressed soil anchors. Include a brief description of
each project and a reference for each project listed. As a minimum, include with the reference an
individual's name and current phone number.
Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit a list identifying his engineer, drill
operators, and on-site supervisors who will be assigned to the project. Include in the list a
summary of each individual’s experience.
Assign a Specialty Engineer to supervise the work with at least five years of experience
in the design and construction of permanently-anchored structures. Do not use manufacturers'
representatives in order to meet the requirements of this Section. Provide drill operators and on-
site supervisors that have a minimum of one year experience installing permanent prestressed
soil anchors with the Contractor’s organization.
The Engineer will approve or reject the Contractor’s qualifications and staff within
15 working days after receipt of the submission. Do not start work on any prestressed soil anchor
wall system or order materials until receiving approval of the qualifications. The Engineer may
suspend the prestressed soil anchor work if the Contractor or subcontractor substitutes
unqualified personnel for approved personnel during construction. If work is suspended due to
451-4 Materials.
451-4.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Concrete ............................................................. Section 346
Prestressed Construction .................................... Section 450
Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals ........ Section 460
451-4.2 Prestressing Steel: Use prestressed soil anchor tendons fabricated from single or
multiple elements of one of the following prestressing steels, unless otherwise shown in the
Plans:
1. Steel bars meeting the requirements of AASHTO M275.
2. 7-wire, low-relaxation strands meeting the requirements of AASHTO M203.
3. “Compact” 7-wire, low-relaxation strands meeting the requirements of
ASTM A779.
451-4.3 Anchorage Covers (include for temporary anchors only when shown in the
Plans): Use exposed anchorage covers fabricated from steel or ductile cast iron with a minimum
thickness of 0.10 inches. Ensure that the cover is securely attached to the anchorage device or
bearing plate. If the cover is to be grease filled, ensure the cover forms a permanent watertight
enclosure for the anchorage device.
451-4.4 Anchorage Devices: Use anchorage devices capable of developing 95% of the
minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel tendon. Use anchorage
devices that meet the static strength requirements of Section 3.1.6(1) and Section 3.1.8(1) of the
Post Tensioning Institute “Guide Specification for Post-tensioning Materials”. Use couplers for
tendon sections capable of developing 95% of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength.
451-4.5 Cement Grout: Use grout for anchorage consisting of a pumpable mixture of
Type I, II, or III portland cement meeting the requirements of AASHTO M85, sand, water, and
admixtures. The Contractor may use admixtures which control bleed, improve flowability,
reduce water content, and retard set in the grout subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor may only add expansive admixtures to the grout used for filling sealed
encapsulations, trumpets, and anchorage covers. Do not use accelerators. Use admixtures
compatible with the prestressing steels and mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Do not perform strength testing as system performance will be measured by
proof-testing each anchor. The Department may require grout cube testing if the Contractor uses
admixtures or irregularities occur in anchor testing. Use grout that attains a minimum cube
strength of 3,400 psi within seven days.
451-4.6 Bearing Plate: Use bearing plates fabricated from steel meeting the
requirements of AASHTO M270 or ASTM A709.
451-4.7 Bondbreaker: Use bondbreaker fabricated from a smooth plastic tube or pipe
having the following properties:
1. Resistant to chemical attack from aggressive environments, grout, or grease
2. Resistant to aging by ultra-violet light
3. Fabricated from material non-detrimental to the tendon
451-6 Installation.
451-6.1 General:
451-6.1.1 Drilling: Core drilling, rotary drilling, percussion drilling, auger
drilling, or driven casing may be used. At the ground surface, locate the drill hole within
12 inches of the location shown in the Plans or the approved shop drawings. Locate the drill hole
so that the longitudinal axis of the drill hole and the longitudinal axis of the tendon are parallel.
In particular, do not drill the prestressed soil anchor hole in a location that requires the tendon to
Plot the prestressed soil anchor movement versus load for each load
increment marked with an asterisk (*) in the performance test schedule, and plot the residual
movement of the tendon at each alignment load versus the highest previously applied load.
451-7.2.2 Proof Test: Perform the proof test by incrementally loading the
prestressed soil anchor in accordance with the following schedule:
Compare the proof test results to the performance test results. If there is
any significant variation from the performance test results, perform a performance test on the
next anchor.
Plot the prestressed soil anchor movement versus load for each load
increment in the proof test.
451-7.3 Criteria for Performing a Creep Test: Perform the creep test by incrementally
loading and unloading the prestressed soil anchor in accordance with the performance test
schedule given above. At the end of each loading cycle, hold the load constant for the
observation period indicated in the creep test schedule below. Use the following times for
reading and recording the prestressed soil anchor movement during each observation period: 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, and
451-7.4 Lock-Off: Upon satisfactory completion of all testing, reduce the load to the
lock-off load, and transfer the load to the anchorage device. Use a lock-off load that is 80% of
the prestressed soil anchor service load. The Contractor may completely unload the prestressed
soil anchor prior to lock-off. After transferring the load and prior to removing the jack, take a
lift-off reading. Use a lift-off reading that is within 10% of the specified lock-off load. If the load
is not within 10% of the specified lock-off load, reset the anchorage, and take another lift-off
reading. Repeat this process until obtaining the desired lock-off load.
451-7.5 Cutting of Tendon Protrusions: After an anchor has been accepted by the
Engineer, saw cut the portion of the anchor tendon extending beyond the anchorage. Take care
not to damage the tendon or the tendon anchorage.
451-7.6 Prestressed Soil Anchor Load Test Acceptance Criteria: The Engineer will
accept a performance or proof-tested prestressed soil anchor with a 10 minute load hold if the:
1. prestressed soil anchor carries the maximum test load with less than
0.04 inches of movement between 1 minute and 10 minutes; and
2. total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80% of the theoretical elastic
elongation of the unbonded length.
The Engineer will accept a performance or proof-tested prestressed soil anchor
with a 60 minute load hold if the:
1. prestressed soil anchor carries the maximum test load with a creep rate
that does not exceed 0.08 inches/log cycle of time; and
2. total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80% of the
theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length.
The Engineer will accept a creep tested prestressed soil anchor if the:
1. prestressed soil anchor carries the maximum test load with a creep rate
that does not exceed 0.08 inches/log cycle of time; and
2. total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80% of the
theoretical elastic elongation of the unbonded length.
451-8 Corrosion Protection (include for temporary anchors only when shown in the Plans).
451-8.1 General: Protect prestressed soil anchors against corrosion using materials and
procedures described herein. The following materials may be used independently or in various
combinations:
1. Portland cement grout
2. Plastic pipe or tubing
3. Steel pipe or tubing
4. Greases specially compounded for post-tensioning
5. Bitumens
6. Heat shrinkable polyethylene tubing
Use corrosion protection materials with properties that are not detrimental to the
prestressing steel and that prevent the intrusion of corrosive environments. Use coating materials
that also have the following properties:
1. Free from cracks and not brittle or fluid over the entire anticipated
range of temperature
2. Chemically stable for the life of the tendon
3. Nonreactive with the surrounding materials such as concrete, tendons,
or sheathing
4. Corrosion-inhibiting
5. Impervious to moisture
When acidic water can enter the bore hole during the period subsequent to the
drilling and flushing operation and prior to tendon insertion and grouting, introduce chemical
additives for neutralizing purposes. Maintain a minimum pH of 9.0 when the prestressing steel is
in contact with this water. During prolonged periods, monitor the pH at regular intervals, and add
additional neutralization as required. Concentrated sodium hydroxide and calcium hydroxide
have proven effective for this purpose.
451-8.2 Protection Systems:
451-8.2.1 Bond Length:
451-9 Submittals.
Prepare and submit Shop drawings and a design submission describing the prestressed
soil anchor system or systems intended for use to the Engineer for review and approval
30 working days prior to the commencement of the prestressed soil anchor work. Include the
following in the shop drawings and design submission:
1. A prestressed soil anchor schedule providing the following:
a. Prestressed soil anchor number
452-1 Description.
Fabricate, store, transport and erect precast structural concrete superstructure and/or
substructure segments on a prepared foundation, to the established lines and grades, in
accordance with the design, dimensions and details shown on the Plans and in accordance with
this Section.
Reinforcing steel, embedded items and all appurtenant items are included.
Base the bid on the design shown in the Plans.
The work in this Section does not include longitudinally post-tensioned beams upon
which a concrete slab is cast-in-place.
452-3 Definitions.
The following definitions apply to segmental bridge construction:
452-3.1 Segment: A modular section of the superstructure and/or substructure
consisting of a certain cross-section shape and length as detailed in the Plans.
452-3.2 Match Cast: A precast concrete fabrication process whereby a segment
is cast against the preceding segment producing a matching interface which permits the
re-establishment of the cast geometry at erection time. Match casting is accomplished by either
the short line or long line casting method.
452-3.3 Short Line Casting: Casting segments one at a time in a casting cell
between a bulkhead at one end and a previously cast segment at the other. The first segment is
cast between the bulkhead and another, temporary bulkhead.
452-3.4 Long Line Casting: Casting segments on a casting bed of sufficient
length to permit the cumulative casting of segments for the entire length of a span or cantilever
between field closure pours without repositioning the segments on the casting bed. With this
method, the first segment is cast between bulkheads and successive segments are cast between a
movable bulkhead on one end and the previously cast segment on the other.
452-3.5 Casting Cell: A special formwork arrangement usually consisting of a
fixed vertical bulkhead of the cross section shape at one end and adjustable soffit, side and core
forms all designed and assembled into a machine for making a single superstructure segment. A
casting cell for a substructure pier shaft segment consists of exterior and interior side forms and a
soffit form of the cross section shape.
452-3.6 Wet Joint System: Where segments are made in a casting cell between
two bulkheads and are not match cast. The segments are then erected in the superstructure with a
narrow cast-in-place joint between each segment. (During erection, all the segments of a span or
multiple spans are supported by falsework, truss or other technique until the joints have gained
strength and the longitudinal post-tensioning installed to make them self supporting.)
452-3.7 Span By Span (Erection): Placing a specified number of segments on a
temporary support system, aligned and post-tensioned longitudinally forming a completed span
of the superstructure.
452-5 Materials.
452-5.1 General: Use materials which conform to this Section and the requirements
prescribed in Division III, Materials, for the particular kind and type of material specified.
452-5.2 Concrete: Use concrete as specified in Section 346 except as specifically
modified herein. Use No. 67 coarse aggregate in the concrete for segments.
Screenings are not allowed as a substitute for silica sand for use in concrete for
Precast Superstructure Segments.
452-5.3 Reinforcing Steel: Use ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel which meets
the requirements of Section 415. When welding reinforcing steel, meet the requirements of the
American Welding Society’s Structural Welding Code D1.4. The Engineer may allow shop
prepared welded reinforcing grillages. Field welding of reinforcing steel is not allowed.
452-5.4 Post-Tensioning Systems: Use post-tensioning hardware components meeting
the requirements of Section 462. Components are not interchangeable and must comply with the
details of the approved shop drawings.
453-1 Description.
Furnish, mix and apply a two-component epoxy bonding system to the match cast faces
of joints between precast concrete superstructure and/or substructure segments in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
In its workable state, or open time, the epoxy bonding agent must function as a lubricant
for joining the segments. In its hardened state, the epoxy bonding agent must provide a
watertight seal between the precast concrete segments. The hardened epoxy bonding agent must
provide intimate contact for stress transfer by completely filling all interstitial space between the
match cast segment faces.
This Section applies to precast segmental structures with multiple shear joints in webs
and joints with suitable shear keys in precast substructure segments.
453-4 Material.
453-4.1 General: Use only epoxy bonding agents for match-cast joints between precast
segments which are thermosetting 100% solid compositions that do not contain solvent or any
non-reactive organic ingredient except for pigment required for coloring and meet the
requirements of ASTM C881, Type VI Grade 3 as modified below. Use epoxy bonding agents
composed of two components, a resin and a hardener, with each component distinctly pigmented
so that mixing produces a third color similar to the concrete in the segments.
Epoxy bonding agents must be insensitive to damp conditions during application
and, after curing, must exhibit high bonding strength to cured concrete, good water resistivity,
low creep characteristics and tensile strength greater than the concrete.
453-4.2 Packaging, Identification and Use: Use only components packaged in two
parts, in sealed containers, proportioned in the proper reacting ratio, ready for combining and
mixing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Each container must bear a label
and/or stamp designating the manufacturer’s name, brand name, the component type (resin or
hardener), the range of substrate (surface of concrete) temperature over which the application is
Determine compressive yield strength in accordance with ASTM D695 with the following
conditions:
1. Pour the epoxy-bonding agent into the mold for forming specimens
within ten minutes after starting mixing of the components.
2. Prior to testing, cure the specimens at the minimum temperature of the
formulation range for the time periods specified above.
453-4.5.4 Bond Strength: Bond strength shall be:
Normal-Set Epoxy ...................... 1,000 psi at 48 hours after joining
Slow-Set Epoxy ............................ 1,000 psi at 14 days after joining
Determine the bond strength in accordance with ASTM C882 with the following modifications:
1. The test cylinder of concrete shall have a compressive strength of at
least 6,000 psi at seven days age.
2. Delay joining of the sloped surfaces for the following period of time,
measured from the time the epoxy was mixed:
Normal-Set Epoxy ................................... 60 minutes
Slow-Set Epoxy .............................................6 hours
3. During the period between mixing of the epoxy and joining of the
sloped surfaces, the specimens will be uncovered and maintained at the minimum temperature of
the application range for the formulation tested.
4. After joining, cure at the minimum temperature of the formulation
range for the time periods specified above prior to testing.
Index
A. GENERAL
B. PILING
455-3 Description.
Furnish and install concrete, steel, or wood piling including driving, jetting, preformed
pile holes, cutting off, splicing, dynamic load testing, and static load testing of piling.
455-4 Classification.
The Department classifies piling as follows:
1. Treated timber piling.
2. Prestressed concrete piling.
3. Steel piling.
4. Test piling.
5. Sheet piling.
a. Concrete sheet piling.
b. Steel sheet piling.
6. Polymeric Piles (see Section 471 for requirements).
For other pile sizes, use the diameter of the drills shown in the Plans or
approved by the Engineer. Accurately drill the pile holes with the hole centered over the Plan
location of the piling. Maintain the location and vertical alignment within the tolerances allowed
for the piling.
For predrilled holes required through rock or other hard (i.e. debris,
obstructions, etc.) materials that may damage the pile during installation, predrill hole diameters
approximately 2 inches larger than the largest dimension across the pile cross-section. Fill the
annular space around the piles as described in 455-5.9.1 with clean A-3 sand or sand meeting the
requirements of 902-3.3.
In the setting of permanent and test piling, the Contractor may initially
predrill holes to a depth up to 10 feet or 20% of the pile length whichever is greater, except that,
where installing piles in compacted fill, predrill the holes to the elevation of the natural ground
surface. With prior written authorization from the Engineer, the Contractor may predrill holes to
greater depths to minimize the effects of vibrations on existing structures adjacent to the work
and/or for other reasons the Contractor proposes. Perform such work the Engineer allows but
does not require at no expense to the Department. When the Engineer requires such work, the
Department will pay for such work as Preformed Pile Holes as described in 455-5.9.
455-5.1.2 Underwater Driving: Underwater driving is defined as any driving
through water which is above the pile head at the time of driving.
When conducting underwater driving, provide a diver equipped with voice
communications to aid in placing the hammer back on the pile for required cushion changes or
for subsequent redriving, to attach or recover instrumentation the Engineer is using, to inspect
the condition of the pile, or for other assistance as required.
Select one of the following methods for underwater driving:
1. Accomplish underwater driving using conventional driving
equipment and piling longer than authorized so that the piling will extend above the water
surface during final driving. When choosing this option, furnish a pile hammer that satisfies the
requirements of this Section for use with the longer pile.
2. Accomplish underwater driving using an underwater hammer
that meets the requirements of this Section and is approved by the Engineer. When choosing this
where:
sapc= maximum allowed pile compressive stress, psi
sapt= maximum allowed pile tensile stress, psi
f′c= specified minimum compressive strength of concrete, psi
fpe= effective prestress (after all losses) at the time of driving, psi, taken as
0.8 times the initial prestress force (fpe= 0 for dowel spliced piles).
c. Steel Piles: Ensure the maximum pile compression and tensile
stresses as predicted by the Wave Equation, and/or measured during driving are no greater than
0.9 times the yield strength (0.9 fy) of the steel.
d. Timber Piles: Ensure the maximum pile compression and tensile
stresses as predicted by the wave equation, and/or measured during driving are no greater than
3.6 ksi for Southern Pine and Pacific Coast Douglas Fir and 0.9 of the ultimate parallel to the
grain strength for piles of other wood.
455-5.11.3 Temporary Piles: Submit for the Engineers review, an analysis
signed and sealed by a Specialty Engineer which establishes the pile lengths for temporary piles,
and submit for the Engineers approval, a Wave Equation analysis signed and sealed by a
Specialty Engineer which establishes the driving criteria for temporary piles at least five working
days prior to driving temporary production piles. The required driving resistance is equal to the
sum of the factored design load plus the scour and down drag resistances shown in the Plans,
divided by the appropriate resistance factor or the nominal bearing resistance shown in the Plans,
whichever is higher.
The maximum resistance factor is 0.45 when only wave equation analysis
is performed. However, a larger resistance factor may be applicable when additional testing is
provided by the Specialty Engineer in accordance with Section 3.5.6 of Volume 1 of the FDOT
Structures Manual.
455-5.11.4 Dynamic Load Tests: Dynamic load testing consists of estimating
pile capacity by the analysis of electronic data collected from blows of the hammer during
driving of an instrumented pile.
455-5.11.5 Static Load Tests: Static load testing consists of applying a static load
to the pile to determine its capacity. Use The Modified Quick Test Procedure in accordance with
455-2.2.1.
455-5.11.6 Fender Pile Installation: For piles used in fender systems, regardless
of type or size of pile, either drive them full length or jet the piles to within 2 feet of cutoff and
drive to cutoff elevation to seat the pile. The Engineer will not require a specific driving
resistance unless noted in the Plans. Use methods and equipment for installation that do not
damage the piles. If the method or equipment used causes damage to the pile, modify the
methods or equipment at no expense to the Department.
455-5.11.7 Structures Without Test Piles: For structures without test piles or
100% dynamic testing, the Engineer will dynamically test the first pile(s) in each bent or pier at
455-7.9 Pile Cut-offs: After the completion of driving, cut piles off which extend above
the cut-off elevation with an abrasive saw. Make the cut the depth necessary to cleanly cut
through the prestressed strands. Take ownership and dispose of cut-off sections not used
elsewhere as allowed by this Section.
455-11.6 Steel Sheet Piling: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity area, in
square feet, measured from top of pile elevation to the bottom of pile elevation and beginning
and end wall limits as shown in the Plans with no allowance for variable depth surface profiles.
Approved alternate support structures would be paid for as plan quantity computed for sheet pile.
Sheet piling used in cofferdams and to incorporate the Contractor’s specific means and methods,
and not ordered by the Engineer, will be paid for as required in Section 125.
C. DRILLED SHAFTS
455-13 Description.
Construct drilled shaft foundations consisting of reinforced concrete drilled shafts
without bell footings.
455-14 Materials.
455-14.1 Concrete: For all concrete materials, meet the requirements of Section 346.
Use concrete that is specified in the Plans.
455-14.2 Reinforcing Steel: Meet the reinforcing steel requirements of Section 415.
Ensure that reinforcing steel is in accordance with the sizes, spacing, dimensions, and the details
shown in the Plans.
Bear all costs relating to this additional length including but not limited to the cost
of extra excavation, extra concrete, and extra reinforcing steel.
Remove all casings from shaft excavations except those used for the Permanent
Casing Method. Ensure that the portion of casings installed under the Permanent Casing Method
of construction below the shaft cut-off elevation remains in position as a permanent part of the
drilled shaft. The Contractor may leave casings if in the opinion of the Engineer the casings will
not adversely affect the shaft capacity in place. When casings that are to be removed become
bound in the shaft excavation and cannot be practically removed, drill the shaft excavation
deeper as directed by the Engineer to compensate for loss of capacity due to the presence of the
casing. The Department will not compensate for the casing remaining. The Department will pay
for the additional length of shaft under Pay Item No. 455-88.
If temporary casing is advanced deeper than the minimum top of rock socket
elevation shown in the Plans or actual top of rock elevation if deeper, withdraw the casing from
the rock socket and overream the shaft. If the temporary casing cannot be withdrawn from the
rock socket before final cleaning, extend the length of rock socket below the authorized tip
elevation one-half of the distance between the minimum top of rock socket elevation or actual
elevation if deeper, and the temporary casing tip elevation.
When the shaft extends above ground or through a body of water, the Contractor
may form the exposed portion with removable casing except when the Permanent Casing
Method is specified (see 455-23.7). When approved, the Contractor may form drilled shafts
extending through a body of water with permanent or removable casings. However, for
permanent casings, remove the portion of metal casings between an elevation 2 feet below the
lowest water elevation or 2 feet below ground whichever is higher and the top of shaft elevation
after the concrete is cured. Dismantle casings removed to expose the concrete as required above
in a manner which will not damage the drilled shaft concrete. Dismantle removable casings in
accordance with the provisions of 455-17.5.
Generally when removal of the temporary casing is required, do not start the
removal until completing all concrete placement in the shaft. The Engineer will permit
movement of the casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure, and tapping it to facilitate
extraction, or extraction with a vibratory hammer. Extract casing at a slow, uniform rate with the
pull in line with the axis of the shaft. Withdraw temporary casings while the concrete remains
fluid.
When conditions warrant, the Contractor may pull the casing in partial stages.
Maintain a sufficient head of concrete above the bottom of the casing to overcome the
hydrostatic pressure of water outside the casing. At all times maintain the elevation of the
The Contractor may adjust the limits in the above table when field
conditions warrant as successfully demonstrated in a test hole or with other methods approved by
the Engineer. The Engineer must approve all changes in writing before the Contractor can
continue to use them.
Perform tests to determine density, viscosity, and pH value to establish a
consistent working pattern, taking into account the mixing process and blending of freshly mixed
mineral slurry and previously used mineral slurry. Perform a minimum of four sets of tests to
determine density, viscosity, and pH value during the first 8 hours mineral slurry is in use.
When the results show consistent behavior, discontinue the tests for pH
value, and only carry out tests to determine density and viscosity during each four hours mineral
slurry is in use. If the consistent working pattern changes, reintroduce the additional tests for pH
value for the time required to establish consistency of the test values within the required
parameters.
3. The Department may perform comparison tests as determined
necessary during the mineral slurry operations.
During construction, maintain the level of mineral slurry in the shaft
excavation within the excavation and at a level not less than 4 feet above the highest expected
piezometric water pressure along the depth of a shaft.
At any time the wet construction method of stabilizing excavations fails,
in the opinion of the Engineer, to produce the desired final result, discontinue this method of
construction, and propose modifications in procedure or alternate means of construction for
approval.
455-15.8.2 Polymer Slurry for Shafts for Sign, Signal, Lighting and ITS
Structures:
Materials manufactured expressly for use as polymer slurry for drilled
shafts may be used as slurry for drilled shaft excavations installed to support sign, signal,
lighting and ITS structures. A representative of the manufacturer must be on-site or available for
immediate contact to assist and guide the construction of the first three drilled shafts at no
additional cost to the Department. This representative must also be available for on-site
assistance or immediate contact if problems are encountered during the construction of the
remaining drilled shafts as determined by the Engineer. The Engineer will not allow polymer
slurries during construction of drilled shafts for bridge foundations. Use polymer slurry only if
the soils below the casing are not classified as organic, and the pH of the fluid in the hole can be
maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations. Submit the SDS
where:
F= factor to adjust pay quantities to compensate for smaller shafts.
D1= casing inside diameter specified = shaft diameter specified.
D2= casing inside diameter provided (D2 = D1 minus twice the wall
thickness).
455-23.2 Drilled Shafts (Unreinforced): The quantity to be paid for will be the length,
in feet, of unreinforced concrete drilled shaft of the diameters shown in the Plans, completed and
accepted. The length will be determined as the difference between the top of shaft elevation as
shown in the Plans and the final bottom of shaft elevation as authorized and accepted. When the
Contractor elects to use O.D. casing, the quantity as determined above will be multiplied by the
factor “F” determined as described in 455-23.1.
455-23.3 Unclassified Shaft Excavation: The quantity to be paid for will be the length,
in feet, of unclassified shaft excavation of the diameter shown in the Plans, completed and
accepted, measured along the centerline of the shaft from the ground surface elevation after any
required excavation per 455-1.2 to the plan bottom of shaft elevation authorized and accepted
plus up to 15 feet or 3 shaft diameters, whichever is deeper, of additional excavation as
authorized by the Engineer. When drilled shafts are constructed through fills placed by the
Contractor, the original ground surface before the fill was placed will be used to determine the
quantity of unclassified shaft excavation. When the Contractor elects to use O.D. casing, the
quantity as determined above will be multiplied by the factor “F” determined as described in
455-23.1.
455-23.4 Unclassified Extra Depth Excavation: When excavation is required by the
Engineer to extend more than 15 feet or 3 shaft diameters, whichever is deeper, below the bottom
of the shaft elevation shown in the Plans, the work will be considered as Unforeseeable Work.
455-23.5 Test Holes: The cost of all test holes will be included in the cost of drilled
shafts.
455-23.6 Core (Shaft Excavation): The quantity to be paid for will be the length, in feet,
measured from the bottom of shaft elevation to the bottom of the core-hole, for each authorized
core drilled below the shaft excavation, completed and accepted. When the Engineer authorizes
pilot holes extending through part or all of the shaft, prior to excavation, to some depth below the
shaft bottom, the quantity paid as core (shaft excavation) will be the length in feet, measured
from the top elevation to the bottom elevation authorized by the Engineer, completed and
accepted. When SPT tests are substituted for coring or pilot holes as provided in 455-15.6, the
quantity will be determined as described above in this Section.
455-23.7 Casings: The quantity to be paid for will be the length, in feet, of each size
casing as directed and authorized to be used. The length will be measured along the casing from
the top of the shaft elevation or the top of casing whichever is lower to the bottom of the casing
at each shaft location where casing is authorized and used, except as described below when the
top of casing elevation is shown in the Plans. Casing will be paid for only when the Permanent
Casing Method is specified, when the Plans show a casing that becomes a permanent part of the
shaft, or when the Engineer directs the Contractor to leave a casing in place which then becomes
D. SPREAD FOOTINGS
455-25 Description.
Construct reinforced concrete spread footing foundations, including dewatering when
necessary, excavating to the required limits, compacting the underlying soil as required, and
constructing seals when required.
455-28 Dewatering.
The Contractor is responsible for the design, installation, and operation of an adequate
dewatering system to dewater excavations for spread footings. Use a well point or well system.
Submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer for his records before beginning construction.
Use well points or wells where the piezometric water level is above an elevation 3 feet
below the bottom of the excavation. Maintain the water table 3 feet or more below the maximum
depth of excavation. Provide continuous dewatering until completing construction of the footing
and backfill the excavation at least 3 feet above the piezometric water table elevation. Continue
dewatering until the Engineer considers conditions safe to discontinue dewatering. In the event
of a dewatering failure, assist the Engineer as required in determining the effects of such a failure
on the foundation soils, and take whatever corrective measures are required at no additional
expense to the Department. When the Engineer approves the discontinuing of dewatering,
decrease the rate of pumping, allowing the water level to rise slowly. Use a rate, in feet per hour,
that the water table is allowed to rise equal to the total number of feet the water table was
lowered, divided by ten hours or a rate of 1 foot per hour, whichever is less.
Install one piezometer well approximately every 15 feet of footing perimeter. Provide a
minimum of two and a maximum of six piezometers at locations within 2 feet from the outside
of the footing perimeter. Install piezometer wells to a depth at least 10 feet below the bottom of
footing elevation or as directed by the Engineer. Measure water elevation in the piezometer wells
prior to excavation and at 12-hour intervals between excavation and discontinuation of
dewatering. Maintain the piezometers in working condition throughout the dewatering process,
and repair or replace them when damaged at no expense to the Department.
455-29 Excavations:
If the excavation must be carried deeper than shown in the Plans to obtain a satisfactory
foundation, the Engineer will revise the Plans in accordance with the following:
1. When the change in bottom elevation of the footing is 12 inches or less, the
Engineer will keep the top of the footing at the elevation shown in the original Plans and will
increase the thickness to obtain a satisfactory foundation.
2. When the change in elevation of the bottom of footing exceeds 12 inches, the
Engineer will revise the Plans and lower the footing, thereby increasing the height of stem, to
obtain a satisfactory foundation. Generally, the Engineer will also increase the thickness and
width of footing over that shown in the original Plans.
455-29.1 Dry Excavations: Dry excavations are excavations that can be completed
without the need to lower the piezometric water level. Perform dry excavations when the
piezometric water level at the time of construction is and, in the opinion of the Engineer, will
remain at least 3 feet below the bottom of the authorized excavation or over-excavation.
Demonstrate to the Engineer that a stable excavation can be made without dewatering. Make
adequate provisions to divert surface runoff and to collect and remove any water entering the
excavation.
Excavate to the bottom of footing, to the over-excavation limits shown in the
Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Save any suitable materials for backfill. Provide areas for
the disposal of all unsuitable materials, and dispose of them in a satisfactory method. Compact
455-32 Forming.
Form spread footings if it cannot be demonstrated that the natural soil or rock is strong
enough to prevent caving during construction. For forms, meet the applicable requirements of
400-5. When forms are not required, meet the requirements of 400-5.4.4.
455-33 Materials.
455-33.1 Concrete: Meet the requirements of Section 346.
455-33.2 Reinforcing Steel: Meet the requirements of Section 415. For spread footing
reinforcing steel, use Grade 60.
455-38 Description.
Furnish and install auger cast piles used for structural support, other than bridge
foundations.
455-40 Materials.
Meet the following material requirements:
Portland Cement and Blended Cement ..............Section 921
Pozzolans and Slag ............................................Section 929
Fine Aggregate (Sand)* .....................................Section 902
Admixtures .........................................................Section 924
Water ..................................................................Section 923
Fluidifier ......................................................... ASTM C 937
* The Engineer will only permit Silica Sand except as provided in 902-5.2.3.
PLR = RC/UC
Where: PLR = Equivalent Pile Length Reduction in feet
RC = Total Reduction in payment, dollars
UC = Unit Cost of pile, dollars /foot
458-1 Description.
Furnish and install bridge deck joints of the types and at the locations shown in the Plans.
This Section covers the following types of joints:
Poured Joint
Poured Joint with Backer Rod System
Strip Seal Joint System
Modular Joint
458-2 Materials.
458-2.1 General: Transport, store and prepare all joint materials and components for all
joint types as per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
458-2.2 Poured Joint: Furnish a Type D silicone sealant material meeting the
requirements of Section 932 that is listed on the Approved Product List (APL).
458-2.3 Poured Joint with Backer Rod System: Furnish poured joint with backer rod
systems consisting of Type D silicone sealant material, foam backer rods, sidewalk cover plates
(as required) and all associated miscellaneous components.
The Type D silicone sealant material used in the system shall be listed on the APL
and meet the requirements of Section 932.
458-2.4 Strip Seal Joint System: Furnish strip seal joint systems in accordance with
ASTM D5973 and Design Standards, Index No. 21100 that are listed on the APL. Manufacturers
seeking evaluation of their product for the APL shall submit an application in accordance with
Section 6. Design documentation showing the expansion joint system shall include installation
details and temporary or sacrificial support brackets, bolts, clamps, etc. that are compatible with
decks constructed with or without block-outs. Furnish joint systems consisting of watertight steel
edge rails, elastomeric strip seals, sidewalk cover plates (as required) and all associated
miscellaneous components. Obtain the elastomeric strip seals from the edge rail manufacturer.
458-2.5 Sidewalk Cover Plates: Furnish slip resistant, random hatch matrix or suitable
pattern, galvanized steel sidewalk cover plates fabricated from steel meeting the requirements of
ASTM A36 or ASTM A709, Grade 36 or 50. Do not use diamond plate or surface applied slip
resistant tapes, films, nonmetallic coatings or other similar materials. Fabricate cover plates in
accordance with Design Standards, Index Nos. 21100 and 21110. After shop fabrication, hot-dip
galvanize cover plates in accordance with Section 962. Galvanized sidewalk cover plates shall
have a minimum coefficient of friction on the top surface of 0.8 in dry condition, and 0.65 in a
wet condition, as determined by ASTM F1677-05 or ASTM F1679-04. Furnish flat head
stainless steel sleeve anchors in accordance with ASTM F593 Group 1 Alloy 304 for attaching
sidewalk cover plates. Install sleeve anchors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
458-2.6 Modular Joint: Furnish modular joints meeting the requirements of this Section.
Provide manufacturer certification that modular joint components meet the following material
requirements.
Supply test results from the manufacturer verifying the maximum coefficient of
friction between mating surfaces. Testing must be performed by an independent testing
laboratory according to the manufacturer’s stated precompression values for the system to a
minimum of two million cycles. Maximum allowed coefficient of friction is 0.10.
Provide PTFE bonded steel sliding plates using a heat cured, high temperature
epoxy capable of withstanding temperatures of minus 40°F to plus 250°F.
Use preformed elastomeric joint seals of multiple-web design that comply with
ASTM D3542. Use preformed elastomeric joint seals of the strip type that comply with
ASTM D5973.
For springs, bearing, and equidistance devices (i.e. control springs), use the same
material composition and formulation, manufacturer, fabrication procedure and configuration as
those used in the prequalification test.
459-1 Description.
Furnish and apply bituminous coating and primer, or install polyethylene sheeting and
lubricant to prestressed concrete piles.
459-2 Materials.
459-2.1 Bituminous Coating: Use an asphalt type bituminous coating meeting the
requirements of Section 916, with a minimum viscosity (at 140ºF) of 3,000 poises and a
maximum of 1,000 poises. Apply bituminous coating uniformly over an asphalt primer.
459-2.2 Primer: Meet the requirements of ASTM-D 41.
459-2.3 Polyethylene Sheeting: Use polyethylene sheeting that is 6 mils thick and is
clean, new and has a smooth surface.
459-2.4 Lubricant: Use a lubricant between the two layers of sheeting that is either a
vegetable oil or other approved environmentally and functionally acceptable lubricant.
460-1 Description.
460-1.1 General: Prepare, fabricate, assemble, erect, and perform all nondestructive
testing for structural steel or miscellaneous metal structures, or portions thereof in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
Obtain Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals from a fabricator that is
currently on the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Fabricators seeking inclusion on the
list shall meet the requirements of Section 105.
As used in this specification, the following terms shall apply:
Main or primary load-carrying member or component: This designation
refers to the following;
1. Longitudinal or transverse rolled beams or fabricated girders
(I or box, curved or straight)
2. All truss members not designated as cross frames
3. Cross frames, diaphragms and connection plates of horizontally
curved beams or girders
4. Rib members of steel arches
5. Bracing members subjected to and specifically designed for
traffic live load and/or other loads
6. Cross frames or diaphragms at pier and abutment supports of tub
or box girders (trapezoidal members) and their connection plates
7. Attachments and components of the above such as splice, cover,
cross frame and diaphragm connection and gusset plates, but not transverse and bearing
stiffeners (unless acting as a cross frame or diaphragm)
8. Cables, moment release pins and links, and hangers
9. All steel substructure members except those designated as
secondary in the Contract Documents
10. Other members as may be identified in the Contract
Documents
Miscellaneous components - This designation refers to, but is not limited
to, the following:
1. Ladders
2. Platforms
3. Bearings
4. Railings
5. End Wall Grates
6. Roadway Gratings
7. Metal Drainage Components
8. Steel Expansion Joint and Components
460-1.2 Fabrication Categories: As a prerequisite for being on the Department’s
Production Facility Listing, fabricators must currently be accredited in accordance with one of
the programs in Table 460-1, by fabrication category/categories of the products that they are
producing.
Table 460-1
Fabrication Categories
Accepted Accreditation
Structure Type
Program
Advanced Bridge: Tub or trapezoidal box girders, closed boxed
girders, large or non-preassembled truss bridges, arches, cable
AISC Advanced Bridge
supported bridges, moveable bridges, and bridges with curved radii
tighter than defined for intermediate bridge.
Intermediate Bridge: A rolled beam bridge with field or shop slices,
either straight or with a radius over 500 feet: a built-up I-shaped
plate girder bridge with constant web depth (except for dapped
ends), with or without splices, either straight or with a radius over
500 feet: a build-up I-shaped plate girder with variable web depth AISC Intermediate Bridge
(e.g. haunched) either straight or with a radius over 1000 feet; a
truss bridge with a length of 200 feet or less that is entirely or
substantially preassembled at the certified facility and shipped in no
more than three subassemblies.
Simple Bridge: Unspliced rolled sections and pedestrian bridges AISC Simple Bridge
Highway Metal Components, including Aluminum: Fence materials,
guardrails, handrails, reinforcing steel (rebar), casing pipes, metal
drainage items, stay-in-place forms, light poles, high mast poles,
metal buildings, steel strain poles, bridge rail, stairs, walkways, grid AISC Highway Metal
decks, scuppers, expansion joints, bearings, ballast plates, complex Components
expansion joints, high load multi-rotational bearings, bracing not ISO 9001
designed for primary loads (diaphragms, cross frames, and lateral AWS CWF
bracing), moveable bridge machinery and sign or signal structures
erected partially or completely over the traveled roadway or
mounted on bridges.
NOTES:
An AISC fracture critical (FC) endorsement is required for all FC work.
Other accreditations programs may be submitted to the FDOT State Materials Office for review and consideration in addition to
the programs listed in the table above.
460-2 Materials.
Provide the materials specified in the Contract Documents in accordance with Sections 6,
105, ASTM A6, and AASHTO/AWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code. Fabricate all unpainted steel
elements using steels with weathering characteristics as defined in ASTM A709 for grades with a
“W” suffix.
Structural components designated as “fracture critical” shall conform to the provisions of
the AASHTO/AWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code, Clause 12-AASHTO/AWS Fracture Critical
Control Plan for Non-Redundant Members, in addition to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Meet the additional following requirements:
Table 460-2
Maximum Temperature Limits for Heat Applications
ASTM A 709 Grade Maximum Temperature, °F
36, 50, 50S, 50W & HPS 50W 1,200
14bD
R
F yt
in. (Equation 4.1)
7500b
R
Fy
in. (Equation 4.2)
where:
Table 460-3
Bolt Hole Geometry
Short-Slotted Long-Slotted
Bolt Diameter Standard Oversize
(Width, inch by (Width, inch by
(d), inch (Diameter, inch) (Diameter, inch)
Length, inch) Length, inch)
1/2 9/16 5/8 9/16 x 11/16 9/16 x 1 1/4
5/8 11/16 13/16 11/16 x 7/8 11/16 x 1 9/16
3/4 13/16 15/16 13/16 x 1 13/16 x 1 7/8
7/8 15/16 1 1/16 15/16 x 1 1/8 15/16 x 2 3/16
1 1 1/16 1 1/4 1 1/16 x 1 5/16 1 1/16 x 2 1/2
(d + 1/16) x (d + (d + 1/16) x
> 1 1/8 d + 1/16 D + 5/16
3/8) (2.5 x d)
Note: Except as shown elsewhere in the Contract Documents, bolt holes in the connections of primary members are to be
standard size.
460-4.3.5.2 Holes, Tolerances and Quality: Make bolt (and anchor rod)
holes using any method suitable to the Fabricator and as specified below; except holes for high
strength fasteners in main or primary load-carrying members which are not to be punched full
size, but may be thermally cut in accordance with 460-4.3.5.4 and ground smooth with the
approval of the Engineer.
The misalignment of holes in a bolt group relative to the same
holes in the component or components it is joined to in a connection, shall not exceed 1/32 inch
for 85% of the bolt holes in that group. Bolt holes are to be normal to the work and have no tears,
Table 460-4
Edge Distances
Rolled Edges of Plates or Shapes
Fastener Size, Inch Sheared Edge, Inch
or Gas Cut Edges Inch
5/8 1 1/8 7/8
3/4 1 1/4 1
7/8 1 1/2 1 1/8
1 1 3/4 1 1/4
Table 460-6
Minimum Required Fastener Tension
Bolt Size, Tension ASTM A 325 bolts,
inch kips
5/8 19
3/4 28
7/8 39
1 51
1 1/8 56
1 1/4 71
1 3/8 85
1 1/2 103
Table 460-7
Nut Rotation from the Snug-Tight Condition
Both Faces Sloped Not
One Face Normal to Bolt
Bolt Length Measured from Both Faces More than 20:1 from
Axis and Other Face Sloped
Underside of Head to End of Normal to Normal to Bolt Axis.
Not More than 20:1.Bevel
Bolt Bolt Axis Bevel Washers not
Washer not Used.
Used.
Up to and Including Four (4)
1/3 turn 1/2 turn 2/3 turn
Diameters
Over Four (4) Diameters but
not Exceeding Eight (8) 1/2 turn 2/3 turn 5/6 turn
Diameters
Over Eight (8) Diameters but
Not Exceeding Twelve (12) 2/3 turn 5/6 turn 1 turn
Diameters
Notes:
1. Nut rotation is relative to the bolt, regardless of the element being turned.
2. Tolerance for bolts installed by 1/2 turn or less is ± 30 degrees. For bolts installed by 2/3 turn or more, the tolerance is ± 45
degrees.
3. Nut rotations given are only applicable to connections in which all material within the grip of the bolt is steel.
4. For bolt lengths exceeding 12 diameters, establish the required rotation by performing actual tests in a suitable tension device
simulating the actual conditions. Submit procedures to the Engineer for review.
Table 460-8
DTI Device Tightening Criteria
Number of Spaces in DTI 4 5 6 7 8 9
Minimum Spaces in which Gage is Refused 2 3 3 4 4 5
460-6 Welding.
460-6.1 General: Perform all shop and field welding in accordance with the applicable
AWS Welding Code. This requirement includes the use of qualified welders, qualified weld
procedures, and qualified inspection personnel.
460-6.2 Welding on Non-Dynamically Loaded Elements: Perform welding on
miscellaneous components and other statically (non-dynamically, non-cyclically, etc.) loaded
460-7 Erection.
460-7.1 Pre-erection Requirements:
460-7.1.1 Erection Plan: Develop an Erection QC Plan for review and approval
of the Engineer.
460-7.1.2 Submittals: Meet the requirements of Sections 5 and 103 for any
required submittals. Provide submittals to the Engineer for review by the Department in
accordance with Section 5 and the Contract Documents.
460-7.1.3 Erection Plan: Submit, for the Engineer’s review, an Erection Plan
locating all primary members, lifting equipment and temporary supports or braces, and bolting
pattern tightening procedures not considered routine. Ensure that the plan includes the Specialty
Engineer’s signature and stamp. Include supporting calculations indicating that the design unit
stresses indicated in the Contract Documents have not been exceeded. Provide this plan or plans
to the Engineer three weeks before erecting the piece or pieces.
Include the following information in the Erection Plan:
1. A plan of the work area showing all substructure units and
foundations; surface roads and railroads; all streams, creeks and rivers; all overhead utilities; and
Table 460-9
Weights of High-Strength Fastener Assemblies
Diameter of High-
Strength 3/4 inch 7/8 inch 1 inch 1 1/8 inch 1 1/4 inch
Fasteners, inch
Weight per 100,
52 100 135 182 238
pounds
461-1 Description.
Furnish and install multirotational bearings in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer and details shown in the Plans. Obtain all multirotational bearings on each
bridge from the same manufacturer. This Section covers the following types of multirotational
bearings:
1. pot bearings
2. disc bearings.
461-2 Materials.
Provide materials in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
and as follows.
461-2.1 Structural Steel:
Furnish structural steel conforming to ASTM A709 Grade 50W.
461-2.2 Stainless Steel:
Furnish stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240, Type 316, 16 gage minimum
thickness.
461-2.3 Metalizing Wire:
Furnish metalizing wire in accordance with ASTM B833, having an 85%
zinc/15% aluminum (Z30700) composition.
461-2.4 Anchor Rods, Nuts and Washers:
Furnish galvanized anchor rods, nuts and washers in accordance with
Section 962.
461-3 Design.
Design bearings in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
Design bearings to be replaceable without removing the masonry plate or sole plate.
Design guided bearings for the lateral load shown in the Plans or 10% of the vertical load
capacity of the bearing shown in the Plans, whichever is greater.
For disc bearings, provide steel limiting rings around the top and bottom of the polyether
urethane disc.
461-7 Installation.
Store multirotational bearings delivered to the bridge site under cover on a platform
above the ground surface. Protect bearings at all times from damage and ensure they are clean,
dry and free from dirt, oil, grease or other foreign substances before placement. Install the
bearings in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer, contract drawings, and as
may be directed by the Engineer. If there is any discrepancy between the recommendations of
the manufacturer, these Specifications, and Contract Drawings, the Engineer will be the sole
judge in reconciling any such discrepancy.
Obtain the services of a qualified technical representative, employed by the manufacturer
of the bearings, to supervise the first installation of each type of bearing (expansion pot, fixed
pot, expansion disc, fixed disc or other type as defined by the Engineer) but for only one size of
each type. Submit to the Engineer a certified statement from the manufacturer that its
representative has the necessary technical experience and knowledge to supervise bearing
installations and to train Contractor personnel about proper bearing installation procedures and
methods. Do not install the bearings before the Engineer receives the certification and the
representative is on the job site. Assume this responsibility at no further expense to the
Department.
Perform any required touchup repair and field metalizing as directed by the Engineer.
462-1 Description.
1. Furnish, transport, store, handle, and install all components of Post-Tensioning (PT)
systems, in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the component manufacturer’s
recommendations. Constituent components of PT systems include, but are not limited to,
anchorage assemblies, filler containment assemblies, filler material, and related steel
reinforcement. Use the most stringent requirements, as determined by the Engineer, of those
specified in this Section or the component manufacturer’s recommendations for protecting
components from damage due to environmental exposure, improper handling, or improper
installation.
2. With the exception of mild reinforcing and prestressing steel, furnish all PT system
components from a single supplier.
a. Use only approved PT systems meeting the requirements of Section 960 and
selected from the Structures Design Office (SDO) website for Approved Post-Tensioning
Systems.
b. Use only PT systems of appropriate type and size required to construct tendons
shown in the Contract Documents.
c. With the exception of local zone reinforcement, do not substitute, modify, or
delete any components of an approved PT system. Inclusion of all possible subcomponents is
required for PT system and component testing; however, subcomponents of approved systems
may be eliminated from final installations based on project-specific requirements, provided all
component-to-component interface hardware are included as necessary to maintain connections
and PT system integrity.
3. Install the PT tendon (e.g., strands, wires, or bars) in ducts. Stress the PT tendon to a
predetermined load and anchor ends directly against hardened concrete. After anchoring the PT
tendon, install permanent anchorage caps, inject ducts with filler to completely fill voids, and
install protection at anchorages.
4. Submit all required documents in accordance with this Section and Section 5 to the
Engineer for review and written approval.
5. Cable stays are not covered by this Specification.
6. Install duct filler in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Provide fully
filled duct and anchorage assemblies free from leaks, blockages, and voids. Provide sufficient
test data to the Engineer to verify that the work meets the requirements of this Section. Perform
filler injection operations in accordance with 462-4.
462-2 Materials.
462-2.1 General:
Approval of any material by the Engineer will not preclude subsequent rejection if
material is damaged or otherwise found to not meet the requirements of this Section or
Section 960.
462-2.2 Steel Reinforcing:
462-2.2.1 Mild:
1. Provide reinforcing steel per Section 931.
462-4 Qualifications.
Provide all project personnel and crew foreman in accordance with Section 105.
462-5 Submittals.
462-5.1 Shop and Working Drawings:
1. Submit to the Engineer all necessary information, Plans, shop and working
drawings, and manuals in accordance with this Section and Section 5. Submit to the Engineer
signed and sealed PT related shop drawings designed by the Contractor’s Engineer of Record.
2. Prepare shop drawings addressing all requirements stated in the Contract
Documents and requirements of this Section. Indicate pre-approved PT systems to be used as
shown on the SDO website for Approved Post-Tensioning Systems. Show details of tendon
geometry and locations complying with the Contract Documents and limitations of selected PT
system. Include all inlets, outlets, high point outlet inspection details, anchorage inspection
details, permanent anchorage caps, protection system materials, and application limits.
462-7 Construction.
462-7.1 General:
1. Furnish the Engineer with written certification from PT supplier (vendor) that
PT system chosen for the project meets requirement of this Section, Section 960, and is a
Department approved PT system prior to installing any PT hardware.
2. Provide a list of PT system components and reference drawings to the
Engineer.
3. Use methods to place and consolidate concrete that will not displace or damage
any PT ducts, anchorage assemblies, splices and connections, reinforcement, or other embedded
items.
4. Conduct all stressing and filler injection operations in the presence of the
Engineer.
462-7.2 System Installation:
Accurately and securely fasten all PT anchorages, ducts, inlet and outlet pipes,
miscellaneous hardware, reinforcing bars, and other embedded items at locations shown in the
E = PL/Adl
where,
P = force in tendon
L = distance between pulling wedges and dead end wedges
or exact length in the center 30 feet of tendon
A = cross sectional area of tendon
dl = tendon elongation within length, L, for load, P
470-1 Description.
Furnish and erect treated timber into various structures.
470-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Timber ................................................................ Section 952
Preservative ........................................................ Section 955
Use timber as specified in the Plans.
470-7 Floors.
Attach the planks to each joist or nailing strip with at least two 8 inch nails for 3 inch
planks, or two 10 inch nails for 4 inch planks. Use nails that are at least 1/4 inch in diameter. For
treated timber floors where a bituminous wearing surface is to be applied, lay the planks with the
best side up and with adjacent edges in contact. Grade the planks as to thickness before laying,
and lay the planks so that no two adjacent planks vary in thickness more than 1/8 inch. Cut the
floor to straight lines along the side of the roadway and walkway.
470-10 Stringers.
The Contractor may use butt joints for outside stringers, but shall frame interior stringers
to bear over the full width of floor beam or cap at each end. Separate the ends at least 1/2 inch to
allow circulation of air, and securely fasten the ends to the timber on which they rest.
470-11 Railings.
Construct railings of treated dressed lumber.
470-12 Hardware.
470-12.1 General: Use hardware, including bolts, drift pins, dowels, rods, nuts, washers,
spikes, nails and all similar incidental metal items, necessary to complete the work in accordance
with the details shown in the Plans. Use common wire nails as commercially manufactured. Use
ogee washers of cast or malleable iron. The Contractor may use other hardware of steel, iron, or
any similar material ordinarily used in the manufacture of such articles.
470-12.2 CCA, ACQ-D, and CA-C, Treated Timber Structures: Use the fasteners and
connectors as described in the following table:
470-13 Countersinking.
Perform countersinking wherever the heads of screws or bolts would otherwise interfere
with the assembly of the work. Fill recesses formed by countersinking with hot asphalt.
471-1 Description.
Construct fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) fender systems using components in
accordance with this Section and the Plans.
Develop and provide a design for the FRP fender system in accordance with 471-4.2.
471-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Fiber reinforced polymer composites (Piles, Wales, Spacer-blocks,
Decking & Splice Plates) .............................................. Section 973
Concrete used to fill hollow piles ................................. Section 347
Use only SAE Type 316 stainless steel metallic fastening and connection hardware.
SECTION 502
SHEAR CONNECTORS
502-1 Description.
Furnish and install welded shear connectors on steel beams and girders at locations
shown in the Contract Documents. Field weld shear connectors located on the top flange only
after the deck forms are in place. Installation of shear connectors in the fabrication plant is not
permitted.
502-3 Materials.
502-3.1 Metal: For shear connector studs, meet the requirements of ASTM A108, cold-
drawn bar, Grades 1015, 1017, or 1020, either semi-killed or fully-killed. If using flux-retaining
caps, use caps of a low-carbon grade steel suitable for welding and meeting the requirements of
ASTM A109.
502-3.2 Mechanical Properties: For tensile properties as determined by tests of bar
stock after drawing, or of finished studs, meet the following requirements:
C L* H T
4 +0.062 inches
3/4 - 1/64 inch 1 1/4 ± 1/64 inch 3/8 inch minimum
4 -0.125 inches
4 +0.062 inches
7/8 - 1/64 inch 1 3/8 ± 1/64 inch 3/8 inch minimum
4 -0.125 inches
*4 inches length is standard.
The Contractor may obtain other lengths by special order.
Where:
C = Shaft diameter
L = Total stud length measured from top of head to base of shaft
H = Diameter of head
T = Thickness of head
504-1 Description.
Furnish and erect open-type steel grid roadway and sidewalk floors, on the movable
spans of bridges and at other locations shown in the Plans. Where specified in the Plans,
completely fill the floor with concrete.
504-3 Painting.
Apply to all exposed areas of steel grid floors the same number, type, and thicknesses of
paint coatings as are specified for painting structural steel. Prepare the surface the same as
required for painting structural steel. Although not required, the Contractor may apply paint on
areas to be covered by concrete.
506-1 Description.
Construct drainage facilities and accessories to collect and dispose of water from drains
on the bridge structures, in accordance with the details shown in the Plans.
506-2 Materials.
Use materials as specified or required in the Plans. For aluminum materials, submit six
certified copies of the mill analysis, along with a certificate from the producer stating that the
materials used meet all requirements of these Specifications. Forward such reports to the
Engineer.
510-1 Description.
Furnish and install navigation lighting systems, including all wiring, conduit, wiring
devices, transformers, enclosures, grounding system, controls, protective devices, lights, etc., as
shown in the Plans and in compliance with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 33,
Part 118, which is further clarified in U.S. Coast Guard (USCG) Publication “A Guide to Bridge
Lighting”. Navigation lights must operate from sunset to sunrise and during periods of low
visibility.
510-7 Conduit.
510-7.1 General: Furnish and install conduit in the quantities and sizes required to
complete the work as shown in the Plans and as required by NEC. Use products listed and
classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown. Do not use non-metallic flexible
conduit, aluminum, or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
510-7.2 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Furnish and install, liquid-tight flexible
metal conduit of interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket, and fittings meeting the
requirements of ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
510-7.3 PVC Conduit: Furnish and install, schedule 80 PVC 3/4 inch minimum diameter
conduit meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785 and NEMA TC 2 and fittings and conduit
bodies meeting the requirements of ASTM D2467 and NEMA TC 3.
510-7.4 Fiberglass Reinforced Epoxy Conduit: Furnish and install rigid non-metallic
fiberglass reinforced epoxy conduit and fittings manufactured in accordance with the applicable
standards of ANSI and NEMA TC-14B.
Ensure the conduit has a bell and spigot type coupling and the coupling seal is
made rigid by using an adhesive that will provide a water and vapor tight joint with a tensile
strength equal to that listed for the conduit. An alternative type assembly may be used by
applying a triple seal ribbed gasket of water resistant rubber material. Ensure the gasket is held
firmly in place with a compatible adhesive.
Ensure that all fittings, adapters, and bends are manufactured from the same
materials as the conduit and conform to the dimensional requirements of NEMA TC-14.
Use only fiberglass reinforced epoxy conduit and fittings made by the same
manufacturer to insure proper fit and assembly, listed on the UL approved list and labeled for
Type I service sizes 2 to 6 inches.
Ensure that each piece of conduit and fitting is clearly marked with durable
contrasting ink, stenciled with the following:
1. Nominal size,
2. Bends to show the degree and radius of curvature,
3. Type: SW or HW,
4. Manufacturers’ name or trademark.
510-7.5 Installation: Install conduit in accordance with National Electrical Contractors
Association (NECA) “Standard of Installation” and manufacturer’s instructions.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. Support
conduit using straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Do not support
conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps, plastic straps, or plastic hangers. Ensure that all wire
used for temporary supports is removed upon completion of installation.
Install an expansion fitting for specified PVC conduit at all structure expansion
joints or where movement between adjacent sections of conduit is expected. Provide certification
to the Engineer from the manufacture that the expansion fitting meets the following minimum
510-8 Wiring.
510-8.1 General: Do not use aluminum conductors. Use only SE or RHW on incoming
service and use single conductor with XHHW insulation, unless otherwise noted in the Plans.
Do not use wire smaller than No. 12 AWG.
Furnish insulated conductors of seven or nineteen strand copper with a minimum
98% conductivity and connector accessories for copper in sufficient quantities for a complete
installation.
510-8.2 Installation: Use pull boxes wherever necessary to facilitate the installation of
the conductors. Do not use condulets for pulling more than ten conductors or for branching
conductors.
Splice only in accessible boxes. Make lug connections with high pressure indent
connector tools as recommended by the lug manufacturer. Make splices and taps to carry full
ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. Tighten all connections to
manufacturer's recommendations. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical
tape to 150% of the insulation value of conductor. Ensure all splices are waterproof.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for No. 8 AWG and
smaller wire splices and taps. Use split bolt connectors for No. 6 AWG and larger wire splices
and taps.
Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use soap base wire pulling
lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire.
510-8.3 Testing: Test each circuit for continuity and short-circuits for its complete length
before being connected to its load.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
514-1 Description.
Install a plastic filter fabric.
514-2 Material.
Meet the plastic filter fabric requirements as specified in Section 985.
520-1 Description.
Construct portland cement concrete curb. Curb will include concrete curb and gutter,
concrete traffic separator, valley gutter, special concrete gutter, curb for sidewalk curb ramps and
driveways, and any other types of concrete curb not specified in other Sections.
520-2 Materials.
520-2.1 Concrete: Use concrete meeting the requirements of Section 347.
520-2.2 Reinforcement: For all steel reinforcement required by the Plans, meet the
requirements of Section 415.
520-2.3 Joint Materials: Meet the requirements of Section 932.
520-3 Forms.
520-3.1 Form Materials: Construct forms for this work of either wood or metal. Provide
forms that are straight, free from warp or bends, and of sufficient strength, when staked, to resist
the pressure of the concrete without deviation from line and grade. For all items constructed on a
radius, use flexible forms.
520-3.2 Depth of Forms: Ensure that forms have a depth equal to the plan dimensions
for the depth of concrete being deposited against them.
520-3.3 Machine Placement: The Contractor may place these items by machine
methods with the approval of the Engineer provided that the Contractor consistently produces an
acceptable finished product, true to line, grade, and cross section.
520-4 Excavation.
Excavate to the required depth, and compact the foundation material upon which these
items are to be placed as specified in 120-9.
520-6 Joints.
520-6.1 Contraction Joints: Except for machine placed items, the Contractor may form
joints by using dummy joints (either formed or sawed) or by using sheet metal templates. If
using sheet metal templates, ensure that they are of the dimensions, and are set to the lines,
shown in the Plans. Hold templates firmly while placing the concrete. Leave templates in place
until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape, but remove them while the forms are still
in place.
Saw contraction joints, for machine placed items, unless the Engineer approves an
alternate method. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete has hardened to the degree that
excessive raveling will not occur and before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking begins.
520-7 Finishing.
520-7.1 Repair of Minor Defects: Remove the forms within 24 hours after placing the
concrete, and then fill minor defects with mortar composed of one part portland cement and two
parts fine aggregate. The Engineer will not allow plastering on the face of the curb. Remove and
replace any rejected curb, curb and gutter, or valley gutter without additional compensation.
520-7.2 Final Finish: Finish all exposed surfaces while the concrete is still green. In
general, the Engineer will only require a brush finish. For any surface areas, however, which are
too rough or where other surface defects make additional finishing necessary, the Engineer may
require the Contractor to rub the curb to a smooth surface with a soft brick or wood block, using
water liberally. Also, if necessary to provide a suitable surface, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to rub further, using thin grout or mortar.
520-7.3 Imprinted Concrete: Install imprinted concrete as shown in the Plans.
520-8 Curing.
520-8.1 General: Continuously cure the concrete for a period of at least 72 hours.
Commence curing after completely finishing and as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to permit application of the curing material without marring the surface. Immediately
replace any curing material removed or damaged during the 72 hour period.
After removing the forms, cure the surfaces exposed by placing a berm of moist
earth against them or by any of the methods described below, for the remainder of the 72 hour
curing period.
520-8.2 Wet Burlap Method: Place burlap, as specified in 925-1, over the entire
exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to ensure complete
coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the burlap securely in place such
that it will be in continuous contact with the concrete at all times, and do not allow any earth
between the burlap surfaces at laps or between the burlap and the concrete. Saturate the burlap
with water before placing it, and keep it thoroughly wet throughout the curing period.
520-8.3 Membrane Curing Compound Method: Apply clear membrane curing
compound or white pigmented curing compound, as specified in 925-2, by a hand sprayer
meeting the requirements of 350-3.10, in a single coat continuous film at a uniform coverage of
at least one gallon per 200 square feet. Immediately recoat any cracks, checks, or other defects
appearing in the coating. Thoroughly agitate the curing compound in the drum prior to
application, and during application as necessary to prevent settlement of the pigment.
520-8.4 Polyethylene Sheeting Method: Place polyethylene sheeting, as specified in
925-3, over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each
side to ensure complete coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the
sheeting securely in place and in continuous contact with the concrete at all times.
521-1 Description.
Construct precast or cast in place concrete barriers, traffic railing barriers and parapets,
herein referred to as barrier wall, in accordance with the Design Standards and details shown in
the Plans. Use stationary removable forms or sliding forms to construct the barrier wall. Do not
use permanent precast concrete barrier wall on bridge or box culvert structures.
Provide written certification from the manufacturer of the precast barrier wall that the
barrier wall meets the requirements of this Section. Barrier wall is produced using certification
acceptance; therefore, assume responsibility for performance of all quality control testing and
inspections required by Sections 346 and 400 for barrier wall construction. Perform all Quality
Control Testing and inspections using CTQP qualified testing personnel. Perform compressive
strength testing in a laboratory inspected by CCRL or CMEC.
Ensure that each shipment of products to the job site includes a list of products shipped
and the required written certification statement for each product. Provide this list and
certifications to the Engineer.
521-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement Concrete ..................................Section 346
Reinforcing Steel ................................................Section 415
Joint Materials ........................................................... 932-1.1
Joint Materials* ..................................... 932-1.2 and 932-1.3
Barrier Delineators *(1) ...................... Sections 705 and 993
*Use products listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
(1) Mount delineators on the barriers in accordance with the details shown in the
Plans and the Design Standards.
521-4 Construction.
521-4.1 General: The Contractor may use stationary removable forms or slip form
construction methods provided a completed barrier wall with acceptable alignment and finish is
obtained. Do not use forms which are damaged or are not in alignment. At no expense to the
Department, remove and replace sections of barrier wall having unconsolidated concrete, surface
blemishes, deviations in alignment or profile which exceed tolerances, or other defects which
cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
521-4.2 Stationary Form Construction: Provide precast or cast in place concrete barrier
wall constructed using stationary forms in accordance with Section 400 and provide a general
surface finish. Align and erect the stationary form so that all plane surfaces of the finished wall
will have no deviation greater than 3/8 inch measured as an ordinate between the concrete and a
10 foot straightedge. Correct all alignment deviations greater than 3/8 inch. Straightedge by half
lapping the straightedge for the full length of all plane surfaces.
521-5 Curing.
Meet the requirements of Section 400.
521-6 Joints.
521-6.1 General: Place expansion and contraction joints in concrete barrier wall either
mounted on or adjoining rigid structures in a manner similar to the type and method of jointing
used in the supporting or adjoining structure or as shown in the Contract Documents. Place
expansion and contraction joints in concrete barrier wall supported by soil or flexible foundation
materials in the manner detailed in the Plans.
521-6.2 Contraction Joints in Barrier Wall Supported by or Adjoining Rigid
Structures: The Contractor may form or saw contraction joints. When sawing contraction joints,
saw them as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without raveling
and before uncontrolled cracking occurs, but in no case later than 12 hours after casting. Match
contraction joints to adjacent contraction joints in the structure. Space contraction joints at 15 to
30 foot intervals. For barrier wall on bridge structures or approach slabs, space contraction joints
as shown in the Contract Documents.
521-6.3 Expansion Joints in Barrier Wall Supported by or Adjoining Rigid
Structures: Construct expansion joints at right angles to the face, and extend them through the
entire cross-section of the barrier wall. Construct barrier wall expansion joints at the same
location and width as the expansion joints in the structure on which the wall rests and at other
locations shown in the Contract Documents. When constructing reinforced barrier wall, form
expansion joints with an expansion filler material or removable forming materials and secure to
the forms as required to provide proper position. When using slip forming to construct non-
reinforced barrier wall, construct expansion joints as in reinforced barrier wall or saw the joint
522-1 Description.
Construct concrete sidewalks and driveways. Sidewalk will include sidewalk curb ramps.
522-2 Materials.
Meet the requirements specified in 520-2.
522-3 Forms.
Provide forms as specified in 520-3.
522-4 Foundation.
Compact fill areas, including cut areas under the sidewalk that have been excavated more
than 6 inches below the bottom of sidewalk, to a minimum of 95% of AASHTO T99 density.
The area to be compacted is defined as that area directly under the sidewalk and 1 foot beyond
each side of the sidewalk when right-of-way allows.
522-5 Joints.
522-5.1 Expansion Joints: Form 1/2 inch expansion joints between the sidewalk and the
curb or driveway or at fixed objects and sidewalk intersections with a preformed joint filler
meeting the requirements specified in 932-1.1.
522-5.2 Contraction Joints:
522-5.2.1 Types: The Contractor may use open type or sawed contraction joints.
522-5.2.2 Open-Type Joints: Form open type contraction joints by staking a
metal bulkhead in place and depositing the concrete on both sides. After the concrete has set
sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint, remove the bulkhead. After finishing the
sidewalk over the joint, edge the slot with a tool having a 1/2 inch radius.
522-5.2.3 Sawed Joints: If electing to saw the contraction joints, cut a slot
approximately 3/16 inch wide and not less than 1-1/2 inches deep with a concrete saw after the
concrete has set, and within the following periods of time:
Joints at not more than 30 feet intervals
............................... ...within 12 hours after finishing.
Remaining joints ...... within 96 hours after finishing.
522-7 Finishing.
522-7.1 Screeding: Strike-off the concrete by means of a wood or metal screed, used
perpendicular to the forms, to obtain the required grade and remove surplus water and laitance.
522-7.2 Surface Requirements: Imprint concrete as detailed in the Plans, otherwise
provide a broom finish. Ensure that the surface variations are not more than 1/4 inch under a
10 foot straightedge or more than 1/8 inch on a 5 foot transverse section. Finish the edge of the
sidewalk with an edging tool having a radius of 1/2 inch.
523-1 Description.
Install patterned pavement on asphalt or concrete pavement areas at locations and with
the color and pattern as specified in the Plans. Use products listed on the Approved Product List
(APL), as approved for use in areas subject to vehicular traffic or non-vehicular traffic,
respectively, as specified herein. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
For the purpose of this Specification, patterned pavements are defined as a post applied
surface marking overlay to either the pavement surface or to an imprinted pavement surface.
Vehicular traffic areas are defined as those subject to vehicles within the traveled way, shoulders
and auxiliary lanes. Non-vehicular travel areas include medians, islands, curb extensions,
sidewalks, borders, plazas and other areas typically subject to foot traffic only.
Install overlay products in areas subject to vehicular traffic to a thickness not exceeding
180 mils. Do not use products requiring removal of pavement or requiring blockouts or trenches
below the top of pavement.
Variations within a pattern shall comply with ADA requirements.
523-2 Materials.
523-2.1 General: Use only patterned pavement products approved for use in vehicular
and non-vehicular areas, as appropriate, and listed on the APL. Meet manufacturer’s
specifications for all patterns, textures, templates, sealers, coatings and coloring materials.
Material coatings used to achieve the pattern and color shall produce an adherent,
weather resistant, skid resistant, wear resistant surface under service conditions. Color shall be
integral and consistent throughout the installation. The composition of materials is intended to be
left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
Materials shall be characterized as non-hazardous as defined by Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), Subpart C, Table 1 of 40 CFR 261.24 “Toxicity
Characteristic”. Materials shall not exude fumes which are hazardous, toxic or detrimental to
persons or property.
523-2.2 Approved Product List (APL): Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their
product shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 along with the following
documentation:
1. Manufacturer’s recommendations for applicability of use on concrete or
asphalt surfaces.
2. Manufacturer’s recommendation for applicability of use in vehicular or
non-vehicular travel areas.
3. Manufacturer’s specifications and procedures for materials and
installation for each use above.
4. For products proposed for use in vehicular traffic areas, independent
test data verifying the material meets the requirements of this Section including verification that
the product, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and procedures, has
been tested in accordance with either:
523-3 Construction.
523-3.1 Product Submittals: Prior to installation, submit pattern and color samples to
the Engineer for confirmation that the product meets the pattern and color specified in the Plans.
Do not begin installation until acceptance by the Engineer.
523-3.2 Pavement Cuts: Complete all utility, traffic loop detector, and other items
requiring a cut and installation under the finished surface, prior to product installation.
523-3.2 Surface Protection: Protect treated surfaces from traffic and environmental
effects until the product is completely installed, including drying and curing according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
523-3.3 Installation Acceptance: For installation on new asphalt roadways, apply
patterned pavement a minimum of 14 days after placement of the adjacent pavement.
524-1 Description.
Construct concrete pavement in the flow channel of drainage ditches and on slopes in
accordance with the notes and details shown in the Plans.
524-2 Materials.
Concrete........................................................................ Section 347
Preformed Expansion Joint Material and Hot Poured Sealer
...................................................................................... Section 932
Filter Fabric .................................................................. Section 985
Reinforcing Steel .......................................................... Section 415
524-3 Forms.
Provide forms as specified in 520-3.
524-4 Foundation.
Shape and compact the foundation materials, upon which the pavement is to be
constructed, to a firm, even surface, true to grade and cross-section.
Dispose of surplus material.
524-8 Curing.
Cure the concrete as specified in 520-8.
525-1 Description.
Construct an asphalt concrete curb on a previously laid pavement at the locations shown
in the Plans.
525-2 Materials.
Use a Type SP-12.5 (Traffic Level A, B, or C) asphalt concrete mixture.
526-1 Description.
Furnish and install architectural pavers and bedding material manufactured to ASTM
standards. Other necessary elements and pay items of this type of paving, such as edge restraints,
base and subbase materials are not covered in this Section.
526-2 Materials.
526-2.1 General: Architectural pavers shall meet the following requirements:
Ensure that the pavers are consistent in color, size and appearance. Architectural
paver type, pattern, shape and/or color will be in accordance with Plan details, when specified.
526-2.2 Architectural Pavers - Roadway: For installations on roadways and
commercial driveways, provide architectural pavers having a minimum thickness of 3-1/8 inch.
526-2.3 Architectural Pavers - Sidewalk: For installations on sidewalks, medians and
residential driveways, provide architectural pavers having a minimum thickness of 2-3/8 inch.
526-2.4 Bedding and Joint Sands: Provide clean, non-plastic bedding and joint sand,
free from deleterious or foreign matter, natural or manufactured from crushed rock.
Ensure the bedding sand meets the grading requirements of ASTM C33 Standard
Specification for Concrete Aggregate.
Ensure the joint sand meets the grading requirements of ASTM C144 Standard
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
Bedding sand may be used for joint sand. Do not use joint sand for bedding sand.
526-2.5 Bedding and Joint Grouts: A suitable grout, in thickness specified by the
manufacturer and approved for use by the Architectural Paver manufacturer, may be substituted
for either bedding sand, joint sand or both when specified in the Plans and approved by the
Engineer.
527-1 Description.
Furnish and install detectable warnings on newly constructed and/or existing concrete or
asphalt walking surfaces (sidewalk curb ramps, sidewalks, shared use paths, etc.) constructed in
accordance with the Design Standards, Index No. 304.
527-2 Materials.
527-2.1 Detectable Warnings: Provide detectable warnings in accordance with the
Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Transportation Facilities, Section 705. Use
detectable warnings consisting of materials intended for exterior use subject to routine pedestrian
traffic and occasional vehicular traffic. Use detectable warnings with size and pattern shown in
the Plans comprised of truncated domes aligned in parallel rows in accordance with the Design
Standards, Index No. 304. Do not use detectable warnings with a diagonal pattern.
527-2.1.1 Preformed Materials: Use detectable warnings consisting of weather-
resistant tiles or pavers that are cast into concrete, or tiles or mats that are surface-applied to
concrete or asphalt surfaces with adhesives and mechanical fasteners or torch-applied preformed
thermoplastic.
527-2.1.2 Field-Formed Materials: Use detectable warnings applied as a
secondary application to the substrate.
527-2.2 Material Properties: Provide detectable warnings that meet the following
minimum material property requirements when tested in accordance with the following:
527-2.3 Color/Contrast: Use safety yellow, brick red or black colored detectable
warnings on concrete walking surfaces. Use safety yellow colored detectable warnings on
asphalt walking surfaces. Acceptable detectable warnings shall meet the following criteria for a
duration of three years.
527-2.4 Approved Product List: Methods or products used to form detectable warnings
in wet concrete will not be permitted. Use detectable warnings listed on the Department’s
Approved Product List (APL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of products for inclusion on the
APL shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and include certified test reports
from an independent lab showing the product meets the requirements of this Section and the
Design Standards, Index No. 304 Acceptance Criteria and manufacturer’s drawings,
specifications and procedures for materials and installation, including touch-up and repair.
530-1 Description.
530-1.1 Riprap: Construct riprap composed of sand-cement or rubble (consisting of
broken stone or broken concrete) as shown in the Design Standards and in the Plans.
530-1.2 Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment Systems: Furnish and install
an ACB revetment system in accordance with this Section and in conformance with the lines,
grades, design, and dimensions shown in the Plans. Submit vendor drawings for review and
approval by the Engineer. Provide signed and sealed calculations of the block and cable sizing
design for approval. Comply with the National Concrete Masonry Association’s Design Manual
for Articulating Concrete Block Revetment Systems, Second Edition, or the National Highway
Institute, Hydraulic Engineering Circular (HEC) No. 23, Publication No. FHWA NHI 09-110.
Use a minimum Factor of Safety of 1.5 and 0.5 inch for the block projection.
Blocks must be open cell and non-tapered unless otherwise stated in the Plans.
Revetment cabling must be bi-directional or, for mono-directional cabling, the block installation
must include a permanent mechanism within the block matrix to prevent lateral displacement of
the installed blocks. Cabling must be polyester and free to move within the block.
Use only ACB revetment systems currently listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product shall submit an
application in accordance with Section 6, and include certified test reports from an independent
test laboratory certifying the ACB revetment system meets the requirements of this Section.
If the ACB revetment system is intended for use as bridge abutment protection,
include the following drawings with the APL submittal:
1. At the corner transition between the front and side slopes.
2. For anchorages, geosynthetic materials, treatment of voids between
adjacent blocks, limits on void size between adjacent blocks and other special details required to
successfully install the ACB.
3. For areas adjacent to bridge abutments, detail mat placement around
curves, connections, protection of mat ends, and splicing of mat.
530-1.3 Gabions: Furnish and install gabions, including gabion, gabion basket, or gabion
mattress, filled with rock in accordance with this Section and in conformance with the lines,
grades, design, and dimensions shown in the Plans.
530-2 Materials.
530-2.1 Riprap:
530-2.1.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement..................................................Section 921
Fine Aggregate ....................................................Section 902
Grout ...................................................................Section 934
Type D-2 Geotextile Fabric* ..............................Section 514
*Use products listed on the Department’s APL.
530-2.1.2 Sacks: Provide sacks made of jute, cotton, or scrim reinforced paper
capable of holding the sand-cement mixture without leakage. Ensure that sack material is
permeable and absorptive enough to permit passage of water to provide for hydration of the
cement. Ensure that paper used in sacks is non-asphalt laminated with a polyester fiber scrim
530-2.1.3.2 Rubble (Ditch Lining): Use sound, hard, durable rubble, free
of open or incipient cracks, soft seams, or other structural defects, consisting of broken stone or
broken concrete with a bulk specific gravity of at least 1.90. Ensure that stones or broken
concrete are rough and angular.
Use broken stone or broken concrete meeting the following gradation and
thickness requirements:
Absorption
Maximum 5%
(FM 1-T85)
Los Angeles Abrasion
Maximum loss 45%*
(FM 1-T096)
Soundness (Sodium Sulphate)
Maximum loss 12%** (after five cycles)
(AASHTO T104)
530-2.1.3.4 Source Approval and Project Control: The Engineer will approve
mineral aggregate sources in accordance with 6-2.3 as amended by the following:
1. The Engineer may perform Independent Verification tests on all
materials placed on the project.
2. The Engineer will check the gradation of the riprap by visual inspection
at the project site. Resolve any difference of opinion with the Engineer in accordance with the
method provided in FM 5-538. Provide all equipment, labor, and the sorting site at no expense to
the Department.
3. The Engineer may test components in a blend of rubble processed from
different geologic formations, members, groups, units, layers or seams. The Engineer may select
components based on like color, surface texture, porosity, or hardness. The Engineer will reject
any blend if a component that makes up at least five percent by volume of the blend does not
meet these specifications.
530-2.1.4 Bedding Stone: Use Bedding Stone of either a durable quality
limestone or other quarry run stone, with a bulk specific gravity of not less than 1.90 and that is
reasonably free from thin, flat and elongated pieces. Ensure that the bedding stone is also
reasonably free from organic matter and soft, friable particles. Meet the following gradation
limits:
The Engineer will conduct source approval and project control of bedding stone
as specified in 530-2.2.4. In lieu of limestone or other quarry run stone, the Contractor may
530-3.4 Articulating Concrete Block (ACB) Revetment System: Install the ACB
revetment system in accordance with ASTM D6884 and the manufacturer’s recommendations,
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
Prior to installation, construct the area to be stabilized to an elevation such that,
upon completion of stabilizing operations, the completed stabilized subgrade will conform to the
lines, grades and cross sections shown in the Plans. Bring the subgrade surface to a plane
approximately parallel to the plane of the proposed finished surface, such that, upon placement
of the mat, no individual block within the ACB mat will protrude more than one-half inch from
any adjacent block. Uniformly compact each subgrade layer to achieve the density required in
the Plans. If the Plans do not provide for stabilizing, compact the subgrade in both cuts and fills,
to the density specified in ASTM D6884.
Embed anchors at least six feet into the subgrade at a 45 degree angle into the
bank with a minimum pullout resistance of 875 pounds. In the presence of the Engineer, perform
on-site anchor strength testing to verify the required pull out resistance is achieved. Anchor
strength testing must be performed on the first two and final two installed anchors, and randomly
534-1 Description.
534-1.1 Precast Concrete Noise Walls:
Furnish and install concrete noise walls with piles, posts and panels constructed in
accordance with Design Standards, Index No. 5200; unless the Plans indicate otherwise. Secure
joints and connections in a structurally sound manner without openings in the system that would
allow transmission of sound.
534-1.2 Perimeter Walls:
Furnish and install perimeter walls and foundations in accordance with Design
Standards, Index No. 5250 for either the precast concrete or the masonry option.
534-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement Concrete ..................................Section 346
Reinforcing Steel ................................................Section 415
Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) ................Section 415
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) ........................ ASTM C90
Mortar ............................................................... ASTM C270
Grout ................................................................. ASTM C476
Horizontal Joint Reinforcing..................................................
.............................................. ASTM A951* or ASTM A580
Control Joints .......................... ACI 530.1 Article 2.5 A or B
* Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153
534-3 Requirements.
Construct concrete components in accordance with Section 400.
534-3.1 Precast Concrete Requirements:
Obtain precast concrete components from a plant that is currently on the
Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list must meet the
requirements of Section 105.
Do not accept products that are not permanently and clearly stamped on the
tongue and groove portion of the panel and posted with the type, date cast, project number, and
the manufacturer’s name or symbol by the Producer.
534-3.2 Masonry Requirements:
Conform to the requirements of Specification for Masonry Structures (TMS
602/ACI 530.1/ASCE6), except as modified by the Plans or this Specification. Submit to the
Engineer a certification that materials provided meet the requirements of this Section.
534-5 Construction.
Keep to minimum the clearing and grubbing; trim trees and shrubs only to the extent
necessary to construct the walls, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Keep right-of-way fence
that is scheduled to be salvaged in place until completing the wall or as otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
Prior to beginning earthwork on the project, stake the wall location in the field and
establish the final ground line elevations at the base of the walls. Use these elevations to develop
the shop drawings. Protect the final ground elevations established in the field for the duration of
the project, and do not adjust without prior approval of the Engineer. When constructing earthern
berms to raise the base elevation of walls, construct the berms of fill material compacted to 95%
of the maximum density as determined by AASHTO T99. After erecting the wall, return the
disturbed area to preconstruction condition unless otherwise indicated in the Plans.
534-5.1 Precast Construction.
Shimming of wall panels between the pile collar and the bearing pads is
permitted, up to a maximum of 1-1/2 inches. Shims must be either stainless steel or engineered
copolymer plastic. Copolymer plastic shims must have a minimum compressive strength of
8,000 psi, without any fractures. Stacked shim plates must be bonded together with a compatible
epoxy adhesive. Stacking of shims is permitted as follows:
1. For heights of one inch or less, provide up to four 1/4 inch shims.
2. For heights greater than one inch, use a minimum of one 3/4 inch shim.
Erection Tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb: plus or minus 1/4 inch per 10 feet
2. Panel alignment: plus or minus 1/4 inch
3. Top of panel elevation: plus or minus 3/4 inch
4. Elevation difference of adjacent panels: plus or minus 1/2 inch
5. Joint taper over panel length: plus or minus 1/2 inch
6. Top of collar elevation: plus or minus 3/4 inch
7. Post placement:
a. variation from specified location plus or minus 1 inch
b. variation from specified elevation plus or minus 1/4 inch
8. Continuity of graphics, fracture fins, etc across joints: 1/4 inch
534-5.2 Concrete Masonry Construction.
Grout all cells that contain horizontal or vertical reinforcing bars.
536-1 Description.
Construct metal guardrail on posts of timber, steel, or as specified in accordance with the
Contract Documents and the Design Standards.
Also, remove existing guardrail, construct guardrail anchorages, and replace guardrail
posts, as specified in the Plans.
536-2 Materials.
536-2.1 General: Use steel products meeting the requirements of 967-1. Obtain steel
products from plants that are currently on the list of Producers with Accepted Quality Control
Programs.
Use timber meeting the requirements of Section 954 and treated in accordance with the
requirements for posts in Section 955. Obtain timber products from plants that are currently on
the list of Producers with Accepted Quality Control Programs.
Producers seeking inclusion on the list of Producers with Accepted Quality Control
Programs shall meet the requirements of Section 105.
536-2.2 Guardrail: Construct guardrail of the standard W-beam or thrie beam type.
536-2.3 Posts:
536-2.3.1 General: Unless the Contract Documents designate a particular type of
post, the Contractor may choose the type of post to use. Use posts of either timber or steel, and of
the sizes and dimensions shown in the Plans. Use the particular type selected throughout a run of
rail, except where special steel posts are required.
536-2.3.2 Timber Posts: Shape and drill the posts prior to treatment, and ensure
that they do not vary more than 1 inch from the specified length in the Design Standards. Dress
all timber posts on all four sides (S4S).
536-2.3.3 Steel Posts: Drill the steel posts prior to galvanizing.
The Contractor may use steel guardrail posts of either a rolled section or a
welded structural shape with nominal dimensions as shown in the Design Standards.
For welded structural shapes, meet the following requirements:
1. Ensure that the design properties of the shape meet or exceed the
design properties for a W 6 x 9 shape as contained in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
2. Weld in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A769.
3. After cutting steel posts to length, place a weld to seal the spaces
between the web plate and flange plates.
4. Galvanize as specified above after completing all drilling and
welding.
536-2.4 Anchor Blocks: Use anchor blocks of Class I concrete, and construct and place
them in accordance with the requirements shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
536-2.5 Offset Blocks: Use guardrail offset blocks of either timber, steel, or composite
material.
Provide timber offset blocks that are 6 inches wide, 8 inch offset and 14 inch
elevation for w-beam application. Provide timber offset blocks that are 6 inches wide, 8 inch
offset and 22 inch elevation for the thrie-beam applications. Dress all timber offset blocks on all
Provide composite blocks that are 7-3/8 inch to 8 inch in offset and 14 inch
elevation for w-beam application. Provide composite blocks that are 7-3/8 inch to 8 inch in offset
and 22 inch elevation for thrie-beam. Allow for dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 5/8 inch
in elevation.
536-2.6 Barrier Delineator: Mount barrier delineators onto the guardrail post in
accordance with the details shown in the Plans and the Design Standards. Provide delineators
that meet the requirements of Section 705 and listed on the APL. Manufacturers seeking
evaluation of their product shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and
Section 993.
536-2.7 Certification: Provide the Engineer a certification from the manufacturer
confirming that all materials (timber posts, anchor and offset blocks, barrier delineators, and all
other accessories) meet the requirements of this Section, Section 6 and the Design Standards.
Provide the Engineer a copy of the certification at least ten days prior to guardrail construction.
For steel rail and rail elements, provide the Engineer with a certified mill analysis
from the manufacturer meeting the requirements of Section 967.
For steel posts and steel offset blocks furnish the Engineer a certified mill analysis
from the manufacturer showing the physical and chemical properties of each heat meeting the
requirements of ASTM A36, the amount of spelter coating, and galvanization meeting the
requirements of ASTM A123.
Also furnish the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance certifying that the guardrail
system, materials and construction practices comply with applicable Design Standards and
Specifications.
Acceptance of furnished material will be based on the Certificate of Compliance,
material certification and visual inspection by the Engineer.
538-1 Description.
Remove and reset the existing guardrail and posts to locations as shown in the Plans.
Resetting guardrail consists of relocating existing posts and reattaching existing panels.
538-2 Materials.
Replace non-reusable hardware and posts with new materials necessary to complete the
reset installation, as determined by the Engineer. Do not reuse timber posts.
Provide new offset blocks for all installations.
Provide all new materials (i.e., panels, posts, offset blocks, hardware, etc.) for end
anchorage assembly installations.
Meet the requirements specified in 536-2.
544-1 Description.
Install redirective crash cushions as shown in the Plans. Redirective crash cushions are
safety devices with capabilities to redirect the impacting vehicle along the full length of the
device.
544-3 Construction.
Handle and install manufactured materials or articles in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and the Design Standards.
Delineate crash cushions with a Type 1 Object Markers in accordance with Section 705.
As an alternative, the Contractor may install Type III, Type IV or Type VII reflective sheeting on
the nose of the crash cushion in accordance with Section 994 and the APL drawings.
Perform repairs necessary due to defective material, work, or operations without
additional cost to the Department.
Restore crash cushions damaged by the traveling public after the installation is
completed, accepted and serving its intended purpose on an open section of bridge or roadway
within 24 hours.
544-4 Compensation.
Price and payment will be full compensation for the complete system or module in place
and accepted, including object marker or sheeting.
Relocation of an existing crash cushion to a permanent location called for in the Plans
will be paid for at the Contract unit price for relocating existing systems. Price and payment will
be full compensation for relocating and reinstalling the system in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and the Design Standards.
Payment will be made under:
Item No. 544- 74- Relocate Crash Cushion - each.
Item No. 544- 75- Crash Cushion - each.
546-1 Description.
Construct rumble strips in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and Design
Standards.
546-3 Application.
546-3.1 Raised Rumble Strips: Notify the Engineer before the placement of raised
rumble strips. Apply raised rumble strips having well defined edges. Remove and replace any
raised rumble strips not meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents at no additional
cost to the Department.
Before applying raised rumble strips, remove any material that would adversely
affect the bond of the raised rumble strips by a method approved by the Engineer.
Apply raised rumble strips only to dry surfaces, and only when the ambient air
and surface temperature is at least 55ºF and rising.
Before applying thermoplastic materials on portland cement concrete surfaces,
apply a primer sealer recommended by the manufacturer.
Prior to the application of any plant-mixed hot bituminous material, apply a tack
coat meeting the requirements of 300-2.3.
The mixture will be accepted on the basis of visual inspection by the
Engineer with no further testing required.
546-3.2 Ground-In Rumble Strips for Shoulders: Construct ground-in rumble strips on
asphalt pavement surfaces only. Before the construction of any ground-in rumble strips,
demonstrate to the Engineer that the equipment to be used can achieve a depression having well
defined edges and a smooth interior finish without snagging or tearing the finished pavement.
Before opening the adjacent lane to traffic, ensure that all debris generated by the
grinding process is removed and disposed of daily by vacuum or a method approved by the
Engineer. Do not dispose of the debris within the right of way. Do not use the debris generated
by the grinding process in recycled asphalt.
Restore any pavement to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to
the Department, when ground-in rumble strips do not meet the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
548-1 Description.
Construct permanent and temporary retaining wall systems in accordance with this
Section and in conformance with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown in the Contract
or established by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted in the Plans, provide a wall system listed
on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) based on the Department’s Wall Type shown
in the Plans. Sheet pile walls and cast-in-place walls are not included in this Section. All other
wall systems used to cut back existing slopes are paid for under the same pay item numbers
shown in 548-12. Construct all walls of a specific type (mechanically stabilized earth (MSE),
counterfort, etc.), using the same wall system and supplier. If different types of wall systems
must be used in such a manner that causes one wall to interact with or influence another wall,
coordinate the detailing of these areas of interaction/influence with the assistance of the
Contractor’s Engineer of Record.
Obtain each precast concrete retaining wall system from a plant that is currently on the
Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the
requirements of Section 105.
Ensure that each wall system component is permanently and legibly marked in
accordance with 548-5.
Ensure that each shipment of products to the job site includes a signed or stamped
delivery ticket in accordance with the Materials Manual, Section 8.2 Volume II, and the required
written certification statement for each product shipped. Provide these tickets and certifications
to the Engineer.
548-2 Materials.
Purchase the precast components, soil reinforcement, attachment devices, joint filler,
filter fabric, and all necessary incidentals from the wall supplier chosen.
548-2.1 Concrete: Ensure that concrete utilized for wall components is as specified in
the Contract and is consistent with the concrete class, environmental classification and admixture
requirements for durability as stated in the Contract. Produce and supply concrete for all wall
components meeting the requirements of Section 346.
Produce and supply concrete for the leveling pad meeting the requirements of
Section 347. Use Department approved mix designs.
548-2.2 Reinforcing Steel: Meet the requirements of Section 931 utilizing Grade 60
(Black) steel.
548-2.3 Backfill Reinforcement: For walls utilizing backfill reinforcement, use
reinforcement consisting of steel wire mesh, metal strips or structural geosynthetics as required
for the wall system chosen. Use backfill reinforcement of the same length from top to bottom of
wall at any section. For tiered walls, use backfill reinforcement of the same length within the
height of each tier at any section.
Use plain steel wire mesh and embedded loops shop fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire and weld into the finished mesh fabric meeting the requirements of ASTM A1064.
Use longitudinal and transverse wires of equal and constant diameter within a given piece of
mesh reinforcement. Use steel strips hot rolled from bars to the required shape and dimensions
with physical and mechanical properties meeting ASTM A572 Grade 65 or as shown in the
For constructing the retaining wall volume, do not use backfill material
containing more than 2.0% by weight of organic material, as determined by FM 1-T267 and by
averaging the test results for three randomly selected samples from each stratum or stockpile of a
particular material. If an individual test value of the three samples exceeds 3%, the stratum or
stockpile will not be suitable for constructing the retaining wall volume.
Ensure that the material is non-plastic as determined by AASHTO T90
and the liquid limit as determined by AASHTO T89 is less than 15.
For walls using soil reinforcement, use backfill that meets the following
gradation limits determined in accordance with AASHTO T27 and FM 1-T011:
548-2.6.3 Flowable Fill: Meet the requirements of Section 121 except as noted
within this Section and the Plans.
548-2.6.4 Coarse Aggregate Backfill: Provide coarse aggregate comprised of
natural stones meeting the requirements of Section 901 with a size distribution of any of the
listed aggregate gradations from Size No 57 through Size No 89, inclusive, except as noted on
the Plans. Have all coarse aggregate backfill materials tested for pH, resistivity, sulfate and
chloride content by a Department approved independent testing laboratory prior to placement.
Provide certification to the Engineer that the results of these tests meet the requirements of 548-
2.6.2 and are signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida.
Maximum Density One per soil type One per soil type
One per four LOTs for each type of QC
Density One per LOT
test
Gradation One per Maximum Density One per Maximum Density
LL&PI One per Maximum Density One per Maximum Density
Soil Classification One per Maximum Density One per Maximum Density
Organic Content One per soil type One per soil type
pH One per soil type One per soil type
Three per soil type when required
Direct Shear One per soil type
by 548-9.5
*Verification testing for pH will be performed on samples taken at the point of placement.
In addition, for permanent walls utilizing metallic soil reinforcement, test for
corrosiveness at a minimum frequency of one test per soil type at point of placement according
to the electro-chemical table in 548-2.6. The Engineer will collect enough material to split and
create two separate samples and retain one for resolution at point of placement until LOTs
represented by the samples are accepted. The Engineer will perform verification tests for
corrosiveness at a minimum frequency of one test per soil type.
550-1 Description.
Furnish, erect and reset metal fence of the type and at the locations shown in the Plans.
550-3 Materials.
550-3.1 Type A Fence (Farm Fence): Meet the requirements of Section 954 for timber
posts and braces. For metal posts and braces, and for recycled plastic fence posts, meet the
requirements of the Design Standards.
For the fabric and all other accessories, meet the requirements of the Design
Standards.
550-3.2 Type B Fence (Chain-Link): For the posts, braces, fabric and all accessories
other than the concrete for bases, meet the requirements of the Design Standards.
Use concrete as specified in Section 347, or a premix approved by the Engineer
for bases. The requirements contained in 347-2.2, and 347-3 will not apply.
550-3.3 Type R Fence (Chain-Link for Pedestrian Overpass): Use the fabric and
accessories specified in the Plans.
550-3.4 Resetting Fence: Use material from the existing fence. For any additional
materials required, provide the same type of material as in the existing fence and as specified
herein, including gates when applicable.
550-3.5 Optional Use of Materials: For Type A Fence, a combination of steel,
aluminum, timber, recycled plastic or concrete posts may be used. Unless otherwise called for in
the Plans, line posts of one material may be used with corner, pull and end post assemblies of a
different material. The Engineer will permit the use of line posts of only one optional material
and pull posts assemblies of only one optional material between corner and end post assemblies.
Within individual corner and end post assemblies, the Engineer will allow the use of only one
optional material.
For Type B Fence, a combination of zinc-coated steel fence members, aluminum
coated fence members and aluminum alloy fence members may be used. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Plans, the Engineer will allow the use of only one type of fabric material, one
type of line post material and one type of pull assembly material between corner and end post
assemblies.
550-3.6 Certification: Provide the Engineer with certified test reports from the
manufacturer confirming that all materials (posts, braces, fabric and all other accessories)
conform to the requirements of this Section, Section 6 and the Design Standards. Provide the
Engineer a copy of the certification at least ten days prior to fence construction.
Also furnish the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance certifying that the fencing
system, materials and construction practices comply with the applicable Design Standards and
Specifications.
555-1 Description.
555-1.1 Scope of Work: The work specified in this Section documents the approved
construction methods and procedures for directional boring, also commonly called horizontal
directional drilling (HDD).
555-1.2 General: HDD is a trenchless method for installing a product that serves as a
carrier pipe for transporting solids, liquids or gasses (under pressure or gravity flow), or serves as
a conduit, casing, or duct for a carrier pipe, cable, or wire line products. It is a multi-stage
process consisting of site preparation and restoration, equipment setup, and drilling a pilot bore
along a predetermined path and then pulling the product back through the drilled space. When
necessary, enlargement of the pilot bore hole may be necessary to accommodate a product larger
than the pilot bore hole size. This process is referred to as back reaming and is done at the same
time the product is being pulled back through the pilot bore hole.
Accomplish alignment of the bore by proper orientation of the drill bit head as it
is being pushed into the ground by a hydraulic jack and determine orientation and tracking of the
drill bit. In order to minimize friction and prevent collapse of the bore hole, introduce a soil
stabilizing agent (drilling fluid) into the annular bore space from the trailing end of the drill bit.
Select or design drilling fluids for the site specific soil and ground water
conditions. Confine free flowing (escaping) slurry or drilling fluids at the ground surface during
pull back or drilling. Remove all residual slurry from the surface and restore the site to
preconstruction conditions.
555-3.4 Drilling Fluids: Use a mixture of bentonite clay or other approved stabilizing
agent mixed with potable water with a minimum pH of 6.0 to create the drilling fluid for
lubrication and soil stabilization. Do not use any other chemicals or polymer surfactants in the
drilling fluid without written consent from the Engineer. Certify to the Engineer in writing that
any chemicals to be added are environmentally safe and not harmful or corrosive to the facility.
Identify the source of water for mixing the drilling fluid. Any water source used other than a
potable water source may require a pH test.
555-6 Compensation.
No direct payment will be made for directional bore. Include the cost to perform this
operation in the Contract price for the item being installed.
556-1 Description.
556-1.1 Scope of Work: The work specified in this Section documents the approved
construction methods, procedures and materials for Jack and Bore (J&B), also known as auger
boring. Micro tunneling (MT) is also included in the category of J&B for purposes of
specifications.
556-1.2 General: J&B is a method for installing a product (often called a casing) that
may serve as a direct conduit for liquids or gases, or as a duct for carrier (Pipe, cable, or wire line
products). It is a multi-stage process consisting of constructing a temporary horizontal jacking
platform and a starting alignment track in an entrance pit at a desired elevation. The product is
then jacked by manual control along the starting alignment track with simultaneous excavation
of the soil being accomplished by a rotating cutting head in the leading edge of the product’s
annular space. The ground up soil (spoil) is transported back to the entrance pit by helical wound
auger flights rotating inside the product. J&B typically provides limited tracking and steering as
well as limited support to the excavation face.
Micro tunneling is conducted similar to J&B with the exception that it is remotely
controlled, guided pipe jacking process that provides continuous support to the excavation face.
The guidance system usually consists of a laser mounted in the tunneling drive shaft which
communicates a reference line to a target mounted inside the MT machine’s articulated steering
head. The MT process provides the ability to control the excavation face stability by applying
mechanical or fluid pressure to counterbalance the earth and hydrostatic pressures.
Removal and disposition of excess material varies, is the responsibility of the
boring contractor and is not covered under this Specification. However, the cost of removal or
final disposition is included in the cost of the J&B operation.
No J&B conduit may be left open ended without approval of the Engineer to
prevent the conduit from acting as a drainage structure.
556-2 Materials.
Select materials approved for installation within the right-of-way based on their
suitability for the construction method as defined in Table 556-2.1. After determining product
suitability, individual material standards as contained in Table 556-2.2 apply.
Table 556-2.1
Product Suitability by Construction Method
Type Pipe/Casing Installation Mode Suitable Pipe/Casing
Jack and Bore Jacking Steel, Plastic
DI, FRPM, PC, PCCP,
Micro tunneling Jacking
RCCP, RCP, Steel
Table 556-2.2
Material Standards Acceptable for J&B and MT Installations
Material Type Non-Pressure Pressure
AWWA C150/C151
Ductile Iron (DI) AWWA C150/C151
ASTM A716
Unless otherwise tested and approved by the Department, only use encasement pipe or
uncased carrier pipe material that is new and has smooth interior and exterior walls.
When the Plans show that the casing is to be used as a drainage carrier pipe,
extend the casing the entire length from drainage structure to drainage structure. Maintain a
uniform diameter, wall thickness and material type for the entire length of the casing.
556-2.1 Steel Pipe Casing and Welds: In addition to meeting or exceeding the
conditions contained in Table 556-2.1 and Table 556-2.2, meet the following requirements:
1. The size of the steel casing must be at least 6 inches larger than the largest
outside diameter of the carrier. Casing size must accommodate pressure pipe or carrier pipe joint
restraints.
2. The casing pipe must be straight seam pipe, spiral seam pipe, or seamless pipe.
3. All steel pipe may be bare inside and out, with the manufacturer’s
recommended minimum nominal wall thicknesses to meet the greater of either installation,
loading or carrier requirements.
4. All steel casing pipe must be square cut and have dead-even lengths which are
compatible with the J&B equipment.
Use steel pipe casings and welds meeting or exceeding the thickness requirements
to achieve the service life requirements noted in the Department Drainage Manual Chapter 6. For
purposes of determining service life, ensure that casings installed under roadways meet or exceed
cross drain requirements and casings under driveways meet or exceed side drain pipe
requirements. For purposes of material classification, consider steel pipe casing structural plate
steel pipe. Ensure that steel pipe casing of insufficient length achieves the required length
through fully welded joints. Ensure that joints are air-tight and continuous over the entire
circumference of the pipe with a bead equal to or exceeding the minimum of either that required
556-7 Compensation.
No direct payment will be made under this Section. Include the cost to perform this
operation in the Contract unit price for the item being installed.
No compensation will be made for failed bore paths, injection of excavatable flowable
fill, products taken out of service or incomplete installations.
No compensation will be made for the pay item associated with the jack and bore until a
Bore Path Report has been delivered to the Engineer.
560-1 Description
Coat new structural steel in accordance with the requirements of this Section. Apply the
coating system designated in the Contract Documents.
560-2 Materials.
560-2.1 Coating System: Use only coating products and systems meeting the
requirements of Section 975 and listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Use Type M coal tar epoxy coatings meeting the requirements of Section 926 and
listed on the Department’s APL for coating of permanent bulkhead sheet piles and H piles.
560-2.2 Thinners, Solvents and Cleaners: Use thinners, solvents and cleaners listed on
the coating manufacturer’s product data sheet.
560-2.3 Caulking: Use caulks that are paintable, compatible with the coating system and
recommended by the coating manufacturer as part of the coating system.
560-2.4 Soluble Salts Test Kit: Use a soluble salts test kit in accordance with SSPC-
Guide 15 utilizing a Class A retrieval method. Ensure the test sleeve or cell creates a sealed,
encapsulated environment during ion extraction and is suitable for testing all structural steel
surfaces. As an alternative, electronic conductivity meters approved for use by the Engineer may
be used.
560-2.5 Abrasives: Use properly sized abrasives to achieve the required cleanliness and
anchor profile. Use abrasives meeting the requirements of SSPC-AB 1, Mineral and Slag
Abrasives, SSPC-AB 2, Cleanliness of Recycled Ferrous Metallic Abrasives, or SSPC-AB 3,
Newly Manufactured or Re-Manufactured Steel Abrasive and do not introduce any
contamination that interferes with the coating application and performance.
Provide certification to the Engineer that the abrasives used meet the requirements
of this Section and do not contain any chlorides and other salts.
For non- metallic abrasives, verify compliance with the conductivity and
cleanliness requirements of SSPC-AB1. For recycled abrasives, verify compliance with the
conductivity and cleanliness requirements of SSPC-AB 2 after each recycling or more frequently
if required by the Engineer. Select a sample from each recycling machine in use and conduct the
water-soluble contaminant and oil content tests outlined in SSPC-AB 2 at least one time each
week or more frequently if directed by the Engineer. Conduct the non-abrasive residue and lead
content tests as directed by the Engineer. If test results do not meet requirements, notify the
Engineer immediately, remove and replace the abrasive, clean the recycling equipment, and
conduct tests each day to confirm the equipment is functioning properly. Return to the weekly
testing interval as directed by the Engineer.
560-2.6 Rust Preventative Compound: Use a Class 3 rust preventative compound
meeting the requirements of Military Specification MIL-C-11796C, Corrosion Preventative
Compound, Petrolatum, Hot Applied.
560-2.7 Storage: Store materials in conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
560-6 Qualifications.
560-6.1 Shop: Provide documentation to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to beginning
work that the shop performing any work in accordance with this Section is certified by AISC
Sophisticated Paint Endorsement or by SSPC to the requirements of SSPC-QP3.
560-6.2 Field Contractor: Provide documentation to the Engineer at least 14 days prior
to beginning work that the field contractor performing any work in accordance with this Section
is certified by SSPC to the requirements of SSPC-QP1 and/or SSPC-QP2 as appropriate.
560-6.3 Quality Control (QC) Inspectors in the Shop and Field: All personnel
performing coating QC activities must be employed by the coating contractor. Provide
documentation to the Engineer that all personnel performing QC inspections are certified, at a
minimum, as a National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) Coating Inspector Level I
or a SSPC Level 1 Bridge Coating Inspector and that they report directly to a QC Supervisor
who is certified either as a NACE Coating Inspector Level 3 or a SSPC Level 2 Bridge Coating
Inspector.
560-9 Application.
560-9.1 General: Apply a complete coating system to all structural steel surfaces except
surfaces indicated in 560-8. Apply a complete coating system to all surfaces that will become
inaccessible after fabrication, erection, or installation.
Apply the prime coat in the shop. Apply the intermediate coat in the shop or field.
Only apply the finish coat after erection and after concrete work is complete.
Prior to the application of any coating, inspect the substrate for contamination and
defects, and prepare the surface in accordance with 560-7 before application of the next coat.
Apply each coat including a stripe coat in a color that contrasts with the substrate
or preceding coat. For exterior surfaces, apply a finish coat color meeting FED-STD-595,
Shade 36622, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
560-9.2 Weather and Temperature Limitations: Do not spray coating when the
measured wind speed in the immediate coating area is above 15 miles per hour. Do not apply
coatings when contamination from rainfall is imminent or when the ambient air temperature,
relative humidity, dew point temperature, or temperature of the steel is outside limits of the
coating manufacturer’s product data sheet.
560-9.3 Sealing Using Caulk: Apply caulk after the intermediate coat has cured to a
condition suitable for recoating in accordance with the manufacturer’s product data sheet, and
before application of the finish coat. Completely seal the perimeter of all cracks and crevices,
joints open less than 1/2 inch, and skip-welded joints using caulk. Apply the caulk to the joint
following the caulk manufacturer’s recommendations. Ensure the caulk bead has a smooth and
561-1 Description.
Coat existing structural steel in accordance with the requirements of this Section by
removing and replacing the existing coating or overcoating the existing coating as stated in the
Contract Documents.
561-2 Materials.
561-2.1 Coating Systems: For removal and replacement systems, use coating products
and systems meeting the requirements of Section 975 and are listed on the Department’s
Approved Product List (APL).
For overcoating systems, use products and systems as designated in the Contract
Documents. Submit product data sheets and product Material Safety Data Sheets (SDS), or in
lieu of SDS, submit test reports showing percent weight compositional analysis, Chemical
Abstract Number, American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) time
weighted average and ceiling exposure limits for all components, and lower and upper explosive
limits, flash point, boiling point, amount of volatile organic compounds by weight, and specific
gravity for each component of the coating system.
561-2.2 Thinners, Solvents and Cleaners: Meet the requirements of 560-2.2. In
addition, for overcoating systems, use thinners, solvents, and cleaners that do not damage the
existing coating system.
561-2.3 Caulking: Meet the requirements of 560-2.3.
561-2.4 Soluble Salts Test Kit: Meet the requirements of 560-2.4.
561-2.5 Abrasives: Meet the requirements of 560-2.5.
561-2.6 Rust Preventative Compound: Meet the requirements of 560-2.6.
561-2.7 Storage: Meet the requirements of 560-2.7.
561-3 Equipment.
561-3.1 Compressed Air: Meet the requirements of 560-3.1.
561-3.2 Abrasive Blasting System: Meet the requirements of 560-3.2.
561-3.3 Coating Application System: Meet the requirements of 560-3.3.
561-8 Application.
561-8.1 General: Apply a complete coating system to all structural steel surfaces except
surfaces indicated in 561-7.
Prior to the application of any coating, inspect the substrate for contamination and
defects, and prepare the surface in accordance with 561-6 before application of the next coat.
562-1 Description.
Apply a coating of galvanizing compound over welded areas of galvanized structural
members and over areas of previously galvanized members on which the galvanizing has
become damaged.
562-2 Materials.
562-2.1 Areas 100 Square Inches or Less: Use a cold galvanizing compound containing
at least 92% zinc dust in the dry film.
562-2.2 Areas Greater than 100 Square Inches: Use a galvanizing compound as
specified in 975-2.4.1 and listed on the Approved Product List (APL).
563-1 Description.
Apply an anti-graffiti coating in accordance with the requirements of this Section
to the areas shown in the Plans.
563-2 Materials.
Use anti-graffiti coating products meeting the requirements of Section 975 that
are recommended for the base substrate by the manufacturer and listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Do not use sacrificial coatings on steel
structures.
563-3 Application.
563-3.1General: Apply anti-graffiti coatings in accordance with the
manufacturer’s product data sheet.
563-3.2 Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: Consider wind direction, velocity and
geographic location as having a major impact on all cleaning and anti-graffiti coating
operations. Use all necessary precautions to prevent cleaning and anti-graffiti coating
materials from being dispersed outside the work site. If conditions are such that material
is dispersed to areas where vehicles or other property may be damaged, suspend
operations until conditions improve and work can continue without affecting adjacent
property.
Protect all surfaces not intended to be coated, which are adjacent to, or in
close proximity to the surfaces to be coated, during the application of anti-graffiti
coating. Clean surfaces that are to be coated, as per the manufacturer’s product data
sheet.
563-3.3 Surface Preparation: Remove all graffiti from the substrate. Prior to
applying any anti-graffiti coatings, prepare all surfaces to be coated in accordance with
ASTM D4261 or ASTM D4258 and the manufacturer’s product data sheet.
When the anti-graffiti coating or coating system is to be applied over an
existing coating, apply a test patch (minimum area of 4 square feet) in accordance with
this Section. Allow the test patch to cure a minimum of 7 days without any defects. No
time extension will be granted as a result of this test requirement.
563-3.4 Correction of Deficiencies: Remove all applied anti-graffiti coatings
identified by the Engineer as damaged, defective, or otherwise not meeting these
Specifications, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Prepare the surface and reapply the coating in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified herein.
Remove and correct all deficiencies at no additional cost to the
Department.
570-1 Description.
Establish a growing, healthy turf over all areas designated in the Plans. Use sod in areas
designated in the Plans to be sodded. Use seed, hydroseed, bonded fiber matrix, or sod in all
other areas. Maintain turf areas until final acceptance of all contract work in accordance with
Section 5-11.
570-2 Materials.
Meet the following requirements:
Turf Materials .................................................................Section 981
Fertilizer ..........................................................................Section 982
Water ...............................................................................Section 983
571-1 Description.
Furnish and install plastic erosion mat on areas as shown in the Plans. Conduct this work
in conjunction with the performance turf work as specified in Section 570.
571-2 Materials.
Use a plastic erosion mat consisting of continuous or fused synthetic polymer fibers,
which are entangled to form a three-dimensional matrix (netting or distorted netting may be
included as part of the matrix). Ensure that the mat is capable of maintaining its shape
throughout installation. Ensure that the mat is inert to chemicals encountered in a natural soil
environment, and meets the requirement of Section 985 according to its application.
SECTION 603
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS AND
DEVICES
603-1 Description.
The provisions contained in this Section include general requirements for all traffic
control signals and devices.
603-3 Definitions.
Traffic Control Signals and Devices: Any signal or device; manually, electrically or
mechanically operated, by which traffic is alternately directed to stop and permitted to proceed
or controlled in any manner. Traffic control signals and devices regulate, warn, or guide traffic
on, over or adjacent to a street, highway, pedestrian facility, or bikeway by authority of a public
agency having jurisdiction. Traffic control signals and devices include, but are not limited to,
controller assemblies (controller cabinets and their contents); signal heads including their
hanging or mounting devices; vehicle detection systems ; pedestrian detection systems; motorist
608-1 Description.
This Section sets forth manufacturers’ warranty requirements for traffic control signals
and devices furnished to the Department. Manufacturer and Contractor costs associated with
transferring, providing, and delivering equipment warranties, requirements, terms, and conditions
are part of the work and are included in the pay item for the equipment or construction feature
utilizing the equipment.
611-1 Description.
This Section sets forth Contract acceptance procedures for installations of traffic control
signals and devices and for equipment purchase contracts.
620-1 Description.
Furnish and install grounding and lightning protection to provide personnel and
equipment protection against faults, surge currents and lightning transients. Provide a grounding
and lightning protection system in accordance with the details shown in the Design Standards
unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
620-2 Materials.
620-2.1 Ground Rods: Use ground rods meeting the requirements of UL 467 that are
listed by an OSHA Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Ground rods must be
made of copper-clad steel with a nominal diameter of 5/8 inches. Ground rod sections must be a
minimum of eight feet in length and manufactured for the sole purpose of providing electrical
grounding.
620-2.2 Ground Rod Assembly: Provide a ground rod assembly consisting of one or
more ground rods coupled together, such that the total length of the assembly is a minimum of
20 feet, driven into the earth at a single point, without disrupting the electrical continuity of the
assembly.
620-2.3 Ground Rod Array: Provide ground rod arrays, as required, consisting of two
or more ground rod assemblies, bonded together and spaced a minimum of 40 feet apart.
620-2.4 Grounding Conductors: Use solid copper insulated (green) conductor for
electrical or lightning protection ground from the system ground bus or barrier plates to the
ground rod assembly. Size equipment grounding conductors according to NEC Section 250.122.
Size grounding electrode conductors according to NEC Section 250.66.
620-2.5 Exothermic Grounding Bond: Make all connections to the ground rod
assemblies using exothermic welds.
620-2.6 Air Terminals: Use air terminals that comply with UL 96A and NFPA 780
standards and are listed by a NRTL.
620-2.7 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs): Provide SPDs to protect electronics from
lightning, transient voltage surges, and induced current.
Install SPDs on all power, data, video and any other conductive circuit. SPD
requirements for lighting must meet the minimum requirements of Section 992 and the Design
Standards. SPDs for traffic control devices, including intelligent transportation system (ITS)
equipment, must be listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Provide primary and secondary surge protection on AC power at traffic control
device field sites.
620-2.7.1 SPD for 120 Volt or 120/240 Volt Power: Install a SPD at the utility
disconnect to the cabinet. Ensure that the SPD at the utility disconnect includes L-N, L-G, and
N-G protection and has a maximum surge current rating of 50 kA per phase or greater. The SPD
must meet the requirements of UL 1449, Third Edition and be listed by a NRTL.
Ensure an SPD is provided where the supply circuit enters the cabinet.
Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect and ahead of any and all electronic
devices and connected in parallel with the AC supply. Ensure that the SPD in the cabinet
includes L-N, L-G, and N-G protection and has a maximum surge current rating of 50 kA per
Table 1
SPD Minimum Requirements
Circuit Clamping
Data Rate Surge Capacity Maximum Let-Through Voltage
Description Voltage
5kA per mode
12 VDC 15-20 volts N/A <150 Vpk
(8x20 µs)
5kA per mode
24 VAC 30-55 volts N/A <175 Vpk
(8x20 µs)
5kA per mode
48 VDC 60-85 volts N/A <200 Vpk
(8x20 µs)
120 VAC at 150- 20kA per mode
N/A <550 Vpk
POU 200 volts (8x20 µs)
Coaxial
10kA per mode <65 Vpk
Composite 4-8 volts N/A
(8x20 µs) (8x20 µs/1.2x50µs; 6kV, 3kA)
Video
Up to 10kA per mode
RS422/RS485 8-15 volts <30 Vpk
10 Mbps (8x20 µs)
Up to 10kA per mode
T1 13-30 volts <30 Vpk
10 Mbps (8x20 µs)
1kA per mode
Ethernet Data 7-12 volts Up to 1 Gbps <30 Vpk
(10x1000 µs)
5kA per mode <200Vpk
POE 60-70 volts Up to 1 Gbps
(8x20 µs (100kHz 0.5µs; 6kV, 500A)
620-3 Installation.
620-3.1 General: Construct a single-point grounding system. Install the primary ground
rod assembly in an electrical pull box so that the top four inches are accessible for inspection,
resistance testing, and maintenance. The primary ground rod assembly and electrical pull box
shall be installed between 12 inches to 36 inches from the element being grounded. The top of all
other ground rod assemblies connected to the primary ground rod assembly in an array must be
buried a minimum of 18 inches below grade. Direct bury grounding conductors used to connect
ground rod assemblies a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade.
Bond all ground rod assemblies and ground rod arrays together with solid bare
tinned copper wire unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Install grounding conductors in a
straight path.
Make all bonds between ground wires and ground rod assemblies and ground rod
arrays with an exothermic bond with the following exception: do not exothermically bond
sections of ground rods to create the ground rod assembly and do not exothermically bond
connections within a cabinet. Apply an anti-oxidant compound to all mechanical connections.
Connect primary surge protection for power at the service entrance or main
disconnect. Connect secondary surge protection at point of use, unless otherwise shown on the
Plans.
Ensure that lightning protection systems conform to the requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of
630-1 Description.
Furnish and install conduit for traffic control signals and devices, highway lighting, and
other electrically powered or operated devices as shown in the Contract Documents.
630-2 Materials.
630-2.1 Conduit: Use materials that have been tested and listed by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory to the following industry standards:
Schedule 40 and 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)1 ................... UL 651
Fiberglass Reinforced Epoxy2............................................. UL 2420
Intermediate Metal3............................................................. UL 1242
Rigid Galvanized Metal3,4 ......................................................... UL 6
Rigid Aluminum4 ................................................................... UL 6A
PVC Coated Intermediate Metal4................... ASTM A135/A135M,
.................. ASTM A513, ASTM A568/A568M, NEMA RN1-2005
Liquid Tight Flexible Metal .................................................. UL 360
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Standard Dimension
Ratio (SDR) 9-115 ....................................................... ASTM F2160
HDPE SDR 13.55 ................................. ASTM F2160, NEMA TC-7
Schedule 40 and 80 HDPE ................................................. UL 651A
1. Use conduit with solvent weld slip-fit plastic couplings unless approved
by the Engineer.
2. Use conduit having a minimum stiffness value of 250. Ensure that each
section has a duct bell with an integral gasket on one end and a duct spigot on the other
end.
3. Use conduit that is hot-dipped galvanized with a minimum coating of
1.24 ounces per square foot on both the inside and outside of the conduit. The weight of
the zinc coating shall be determined using ASTM A90.
4. Use conduit with both ends reamed and threaded.
5. Can be used with preassembled cable and rope-in-conduit.
630-2.2 Locate Wire: Ensure that locate wire is a single copper conductor with a
minimum gauge of No. 12 AWG. Ensure locate wire is insulated using a 45 mil minimum
thickness polyethylene sheath that is orange in color and marked to identify the manufacturer and
the conductor size.
630-2.3 Locate Wire Grounding Unit: Ensure that locate wires are attached to a wire
grounding unit (WGU) dedicated to safely dissipate high transient voltages or other foreign
electrical surges induced into the designated system. Ensure the WGU conforms to the
following:
1. Allows signals generated by locate system transmitters to pass through the
protection system without going to ground.
2. The protection system automatically resets and passes locate system transmitter
signals after the unit has been grounded to dissipate over-voltages.
3. Is intended for below or above grade applications. Ground the WGU to a driven
rod within 10 feet of the system using a No. 6 AWG single conductor wire with green insulation.
630-2.4 Warning Tape: Ensure that the buried cable warning tape is flexible, elastic
material 3 inches wide, 6 mil thick, intended for burial and use as an underground utility warning
notice, and that the surface of the warning tape is coated and sealed to prevent deterioration
caused by harsh soil elements. Ensure that the warning tape color follows the American Public
Works Association color code for underground utilities and has the repeating message
“CAUTION: FDOT CABLE,” or other wording approved by the Engineer, permanently printed
on its surface. Ensure that the tape material and ink colors do not change when exposed to acids,
alkalis, and other destructive chemical variances commonly found in Florida soils.
630-2.5 Route Markers: Route markers may be either a standard route marker (SRM)
type or an electronic route marker (ERM) type. Ensure the SRM is a rigid, tubular, driven post
used for location and notification purposes only. Ensure the ERM is physically identical to the
SRM, but also includes a termination board to provide aboveground access to locate wire buried
alongside conduit and cable runs.
Ensure that each SRM is labeled and identified as an FDOT fiber optic cable
marker unless otherwise shown in the Plans. The labels must include the Department’s logo,
contact information for the local FDOT District, and a telephone number to call prior to any
excavation in the area. Ensure that the identification information is permanently imprinted on the
top fitting, and will not peel, fade, or deteriorate.
630-2.5.1 Standard Route Marker (SRM): Ensure that SRM posts are white
with an orange top fitting cover with black or white lettering and graphics. Ensure that the SRM
is a tubular configuration, and both the marker post and the top fitting are made from virgin
Type 111 HDPE. Ensure that any fasteners used with the SRM are constructed of stainless steel.
Ensure that all SRMs have a minimum outside diameter of 3.5 inches with
a minimum wall thickness of 0.125 inches. Ensure that the top fitting cover is a minimum of
1.5 feet long and has an outside diameter of 3.75 inches with a minimum wall thickness of
0.125 inches. Ensure that each SRM provides a tensile strength of 4,200 pounds per square inch
as required in ASTM D638. Ensure that each SRM is manufactured for use in temperatures range
of minus 30° to 165°F in accordance with NEMA TS 2.
Ensure the SRM can withstand an impact force of 70 pounds per foot at
32°F in accordance with ASTM D2444, before and after UV conditioning for 2,000 hours in
accordance with ASTM G154. Ensure that the control sample of any material tested maintains a
minimum of 70 percent of its original tensile strength.
630-3.9 Fiber Optic Cable Locate Wire: Install locate wire in the trench or bore with all
underground conduits to provide end-to-end electrical continuity for electronically locating the
underground conduit system. Bury locate wire along the centerline of the top outer surface of
installed conduit. Do not install locate wire in a conduit with fiber optic cable.
Do not run locate wires into field cabinets. Terminate locate wires at the first and
last pull boxes in the conduit run or as shown in the Plans. Ensure that wire termination occurs in
a pull box as shown in the Design Standards, Index No. 17700.
In a trenching operation, install the locate wire no more than 3 inches above the
conduit. Ensure that the locate wire enters all pull and splice boxes, and that a minimum of
10 feet of slack locate wire is coiled and neatly stored in each box.
In a boring operation, install the locate wire in an encasement, install the conduit
detection wire external to the conduit with no separation between conduit and wire, or use
conduit with integral locate wire. Locate wire may also be placed in the void between the inner
wall of conduit and innerducts contained within the conduit as long as no other cables are present
within the void.
Perform continuity tests and insulation resistance tests on all locate wires and
provide the Engineer with all test results. Replace, or repair defective locate wire at no additional
cost.
Make locate wire splices in a flush grade-level box. Ensure that locate wire
splices are waterproof and suitable for direct burial. Ensure that locate wire splices at the pull
box meet NEC requirements. Ensure that locate wire splices are constructed of and in the
following order: a mechanical crimp connection with a butt sleeve, an oxide-preventing aerosol
lacquer, mastic electrical splicing tape, and standard electrical tape. At the completion of the
installation, provide the Engineer with as-built drawings that document all splice locations.
Install WGUs in pull boxes and splice boxes as shown in the Plans or directed by
the Engineer. Mount the device in a location high enough from the bottom of the box to allow
access to terminal facilities without disturbing cables present within the box. Terminate the
locate wires and connect the WGU to ground in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Test the locate wire system after installation to ensure that it functions and can be
used to accurately locate the conduit system.
630-3.10 Route Markers: Install route markers for fiber optic cable installations and
ensure the following:
1. Markers are plumb and level and the notification information is clearly visible
when viewed from the side facing the roadway.
2. Markers are set within the right of way.
3. Markers are placed at a 1 foot offset from the conduit system.
4. The top of the marker post is a minimum of 5 feet and maximum of 6 feet
above the finish grade
5. Markers are spaced a maximum of 500 feet apart.
6. A clear line of sight is maintained from one marker to the next.
632-1 Description.
Furnish and install underground and aerial signal cable as shown in the Plans and in
accordance with Design Standards, Index No. 17727.
632-2 Materials.
Use only new materials meeting the requirements of this Section.
632-2.1 Signal Cable: Use either polyethylene insulated, polyvinyl chloride jacketed
signal cable conforming to the requirements of the International Municipal Signal Association,
Inc. (IMSA) Specification No. 19-1 or polyethylene insulated, polyethylene jacketed signal cable
conforming to the requirements of IMSA Specification No. 20-1. Use signal cable conductors of
stranded copper, No. 14 AWG or larger.
632-2.2 Cable Support Wire: Provide utilities grade zinc-coated support wire meeting
the requirements of ASTM A475, whether separate or integral to signal cable, having a minimum
nominal diameter of 1/4 inches.
632-2.3 Cable Attachment Hardware: Ensure that all bolts and nuts less tha5/8 inch in
diameter are passivated stainless steel, Type 316 or Type 304 and meet the requirements of
ASTM F593 and ASTM F594 for corrosion resistance. Ensure that all bolts and nuts 5/8 inch
and over in diameter are galvanized and meet the requirements of ASTM A307. Use attachment
hardware with sufficient tensile strength for the application. Use stainless steel lashing wire,
galvanized or stainless steel lashing rod, cable rings or self-locking cable ties of UV stabilized
black plastic having a minimum tensile strength of 100 pounds.
633-1 Description.
Furnish and install underground and aerial communication cable as shown in the Plans
and Design Standards.
633-2 Materials.
633-2.1 Fiber Optic Cable and Connections.
633-2.1.1 Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable: Provide all-dielectric, dry-filled,
loose-tube, dispersion-unshifted, single-mode fiber (SMF) with low water peak, gel free, and
suitable for underground (i.e., in conduit) and aerial outside plant installation. All fiber optic
cable shall be splice-compatible with the Department’s existing dispersion-unshifted SMF and
require no electronic equipment for dispersion compensation between new and existing fiber.
Ensure that all components that comprise a single length of cable are continuous and of the same
material. Furnish only commercial off-the-shelf materials, equipment, and components.
633-2.1.1.1 Optical Fiber: Ensure that the optical fibers used in the cable
meet or exceed the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA) TIA/EIA-492-CAAB specification, the U.S. Department of Agriculture Rural
Utilities Service (RUS) 7 CFR 1755.900, and International Telecommunication Union ITU-
T G.652.D requirements. Use only optical fibers meeting the additional requirements as follows:
Geometry
Cladding Diameter: 125µm, ±0.7 µm
Core-to-Cladding Concentricity: 0.5 µm
Cladding Noncircularity: 0.7%
Mode Field Diameter: 1,550 nm; 10.4 µm, 0.5 µm
Coating Diameter: 245 µm, 5 µm
Colored Fiber Nominal Diameter: 250 15 µm
Optical
Cabled Fiber Attenuation: 1,310 nm, 0.4 dB/km; 1,550 nm, 0.3 dB/km
Point Discontinuity: 1,310 nm, 0.05 dB/km; 1,550 nm, 0.05 dB/km
Cable Cutoff Wavelength ( ccf ): 1,260 nm.
Total Dispersion: 1,625 nm 23.0 ps/(nmkm)
Macrobend Attenuation: Turns – 100; Outer diameter (OD) of the mandrel – 60 mm, 2 mm;
0.05 dB at 1,550 nm
Cabled Polarization Mode Dispersion: <0.5 ps km
Ensure that all fiber in the buffer tube is usable fiber that complies
with attenuation requirements. Ensure that fibers do not adhere to each other. Ensure that the
fiber is free of surface imperfections and inclusions. Ensure that all fiber optic core glass is from
the same manufacturer.
Mechanical
Resist compression deformation to a maximum of 400 pounds.
Withstand an impact energy to a maximum of 40 foot-pounds at 0°F.
Axial Tension: 100 pounds for 30 minutes.
Cable Torsion: ten 90-degree rotations.
Cable Flexing: ten 90-degree bends.
Environmental
Hydrostatic Pressure Head: Up to 20 foot-pounds (-9 pounds per square inch).
Withstand 40 freeze/thaw temperature cycles.
Ultraviolet resistant during a maximum 30-day exposure in compliance with the requirements
detailed in the ASTM B117 standard.
Chemical
Withstand a 90-day exposure to solutions of 3% sulfuric acid, 0.2 normal of sodium hydroxide,
10% Igepal®, kerosene, and be fungus resistant as required in the ASTM G21 standard.
633-2.1.2.2 Splice Trays: Ensure that splice trays are securely attached
and accessible, and provide sufficient storage for the fiber cable. Ensure splice trays provide
access to individual fibers without disrupting other fibers in the tray. Ensure that splice trays hold
the buffer tubes rigidly in place and provide protection for fusion splices. Ensure that the
raceway accommodates the minimum bend radius of the fiber. Ensure that splice trays allow
visible inspection of the fiber. Ensure that splice trays include a cover with a locking mechanism
to hold it in place.
633-2.1.3 Cable Terminations: Use Type ST, SC, LC, or FC connectors only, as
specified in the Plans or by the Engineer. Ensure that all ST-type fiber optic connectors, whether
factory pre-terminated or field-installed, are 0.1 inch physical contact with preradiused tips.
Ensure that ST and FC connectors include a ceramic ferrule and a metallic body, and provide a
strain relief mechanism when installed on a single fiber cable that contains strength elements.
Ensure that the ST-type connector provides a minimum 50 pound pullout strength. Ensure that
the optical fiber within the body of all connectors is mechanically isolated from cable tension,
bending, and twisting.
Ensure that all connectors are compliant with the TIA/EIA-568-A and
TIA/EIA-604 standards, as applicable, and are tested according to the Telcordia/Bellcore GR-
326-CORE standard. When tested according to the TIA and EIA’s Fiber Optic Test Procedure
(FOTP)-171 (TIA/EIA-455-171), ensure that the connectors test to an average insertion loss of
less than or equal to 0.4 decibel and a maximum loss of less than or equal to 0.75 decibel. Test
the connectors as detailed in FOTP-107 (TIA/EIA-455-107) to reflectance values of less than or
equal to minus 50 decibels.
633-2.1.3.1 Pre-terminated Connector Assemblies (Pigtails): Ensure
that pre-terminated cable assemblies consist of fiber optic cables with factory-installed
633-4 Warranty.
Ensure that the fiber optic cable, the splice enclosures, and terminations have a
manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a minimum of two years from the date of final
acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and Section 608. Ensure the warranty includes providing
replacements, within 10 calendar days of notification, for defective parts and equipment during
the warranty period at no cost to the Department or the maintaining agency.
634-1 Description.
Install a span wire assembly for supporting traffic signals, signs, and other traffic control
devices. Provide fiberglass insulators when required.
634-2 Materials.
634-2.1 General Requirements: For a single point attachment, use only a catenary wire
to support the imposed dead and wind load from the attached signs and traffic signals. For a
single point attachment, the catenary wire also supports the signal conductor cables and
interconnect cables.
For a two point attachment, the catenary wire is used to support the imposed dead
load and a portion of the imposed wind load from the attached signs and traffic signals. The two
point attachment also includes a messenger wire to resist a significant portion of the imposed
wind load and to support the signal conductor cables and interconnection cables.
Use a tether wire for maintaining the alignment of signal heads when specified in
the Plans.
634-2.2 Wires: For span wire assemblies, only use wire cables of seven-wire strands
manufactured and provided with a Class A zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A475.
Provide Utility Grade catenary or messenger wires. The Contractor may use
Siemens-Martin Grade tether wires. Meet the following additional requirements for span wire
assembly strands:
Required Minimum
Span Wire Assembly Nominal Diameter
Breaking Strength
Strand Type Inch
Pounds
Catenary Wire or 3/8 11,500
Messenger Wire * 7/16 18,000
1/2 25,000
Tether Wire 3/16 1,900
*Supply catenary or messenger wire of the nominal diameter as specified in the Contract Documents.
634-2.3 Hardware and Fittings: For utility or Siemens-Martin grade wires, use the
connection hardware as specified herein. For installations that use other grades of wire, provide
the hardware and fittings indicated in the Plans. Provide only hardware and fittings made of
galvanized steel or non-corrosive metal unless the fiberglass insulators specified in 634-2.4 are
also required. Provide hardware and fittings of sufficient strength to resist the breaking strength
of the wire with which they are used.
Use an alloy steel eyebolt meeting the requirements of ASTM F541, Type 2 and a
matching heavy hex nut meeting the requirements of ASTM A563, Grade C or D, to connect the
automatic compression dead-end clamp of the catenary wire or messenger wire to the wood or
concrete strain poles. Eyebolts and hex nuts must be zinc coated in accordance with
ASTM A153, Class C. Sizes of eyebolts, supplied with nuts and washers, are as following: Use a
3/4 inch diameter bolt for maximum of one 7/16 inch diameter catenary or messenger wire, or
maximum of two 3/8 inch diameter catenary or messenger wires. Use a 1 inch diameter bolt for
The catenary wire shall be tensioned to provide a 5%, plus or minus 0.5% sag.
Install the span wire assemblies in accordance with the Design Standards,
Index No. 17727, and at a height on the support poles which will provide a clearance from the
roadway to the bottom of the signal head assemblies as shown in Index 17727.
Connect all span wires to the pole grounding system in accordance with
Section 620.
Obtain and meet all provisions of the National Electric Safety Code (ANSI-C2)
regarding clearance from electric lines, contacting of utility owners, and safety requirements
prior to span wire installation.
Prior to installation of the two point attachment span wire assembly, submit the
method of providing the required tension in the messenger wire to the Engineer for approval.
635-1 Description.
Furnish and install pull, splice, and junction boxes as shown in the Plans.
635-2 Materials.
635-2.1 General: Use pull and splice boxes listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL).
635-2.2 Pull and Splice Boxes:
635-2.2.1 General: Manufacturers of concrete pull and splice boxes and covers
seeking inclusion on the APL shall meet the requirements of 105-4 and this Section and be listed
on the Department’s list of Incidental Precast/Prestressed Concrete Producers with Accepted
Quality Control Programs.
Ensure box bodies and covers are free of flaws such as cracks, sharp,
broken, or uneven edges, and voids.
Ensure in-ground boxes have an open bottom design.
635-2.2.2 Marking: Ensure the following information is permanently cast into
the top surface of all pull and splice box covers:
1. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, mark application as
follows:
FDOT TRAFFIC SIGNAL for signalized intersections
FDOT FIBER OPTIC CABLE for fiber optic cable
FDOT LIGHTING for highway lighting
FDOT TRAFFIC MONITORING for traffic monitoring
FDOT ELECTRICAL for other electrical applications
2. Manufacturer’s name or logo
3. FDOT APL approval number
4. TIER rating
Ensure the date of manufacture (month/day/year, or date code) is
permanently located on the top or bottom of the cover. Ensure the interior of the box body has a
permanent marking that includes the manufacturer part/model number and date of manufacture
near the top of box in a location that is visible after installation when the cover is removed.
635-2.2.3 Dimensions: Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, provide pull and
splice boxes with the following dimensions.
For signalized intersection and lighting applications, provide pull boxes
with nominal cover dimensions of 13 inches wide by 24 inches long or larger and no less than
12 inches deep. Ensure the inside opening area is a minimum of 240 square inches and no inside
dimension is less than 12 inches.
For fiber optic cable applications, provide pull boxes with nominal cover
dimensions of 24 inches wide by 36 inches long or larger and no less than 24 inches deep.
Provide rectangular splice boxes with nominal cover dimensions of
30 inches wide by 60 inches long or larger and no less than 36 inches deep. Provide round splice
boxes with a nominal cover diameter of 36 inches or larger and no less than 36 inches deep.
635-2.2.4 Fabrication: Provide box covers constructed of concrete, polymer
concrete or other materials meeting the requirements of this Section.
635-3 Installation.
635-3.1 General: Do not install power and communication cables in the same box unless
otherwise shown in the Plans.
When signal or 120 volt (or greater) power is present, ground all metal covers in
accordance with Section 620.
635-3.2 Pull and Splice Boxes: Install pull and splice boxes in accordance with the
Design Standards, Index No. 17700. Ensure pull and splice boxes are sized for the amount of
cable to be placed inside. Ensure that the pull or splice box cover is flush with the concrete apron
or sidewalk. Do not install pull or splice boxes in roadways, driveways, parking areas, ditches or
public sidewalk curb ramps. Avoid placing pull and splice boxes in low-lying locations with
poor drainage. Ensure that pull and splice boxes house fiber optic cable without subjecting the
cable to a bend radius less than 14 times the diameter of the cable.
635-3.2.1 Placement and Spacing: Place pull and splice boxes as shown in the
Plans and at the following locations, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer:
1. At all major fiber optic cable and conduit junctions.
2. Approximately every 2,500 feet for fiber optic cable applications in
rural areas with any continuous section of straight conduit if no fiber optic cable splice is
required.
3. At a maximum of 1,760 feet for fiber optic cable applications in
metropolitan areas.
4. At each end of a tunnel, and on each side of a river or lake crossing.
5. On each side of an aboveground conduit installation, such as an
attachment to a bridge or wall.
6. At all turns in the conduit system.
7. Near the base of a service pole or communication cabinet to provide:
a. A transition point between the fiber optic conduits extending
from the fiber backbone and the conduit feeding the communication cabinet.
b. An assist point for the installation of fiber optic drop cable.
c. Storage of slack fiber optic drop cable.
635-5 Warranty.
Ensure all pull, splice, and junction boxes have a manufacturer’s warranty covering
defects for a minimum of one year from the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and
Section 608. Ensure the warranty includes providing replacements, within 30 calendar days of
notification, for defective parts and equipment during the warranty period at no cost to the
Department or the maintaining agency.
639-1 Description.
Install electrical power service assemblies for either overhead service or underground
service in accordance with the details shown in the Design Standards, Index No. 17736.
639-2 Definitions.
1. Overhead Service: A service assembly which is supplied electrical power from an
overhead power company source. Include with an overhead electrical power service assembly
the following components:
a. Weatherhead
b. Conduit
c. Electrical Service wire
d. Meter base (when required)
e. Service disconnect
f. Surge Protective Device
2. Underground Service: A service assembly which is supplied electrical power from an
underground power company source. Include with an underground electrical power service
assembly the following components:
a. Conduit
b. Electrical Service wire
c. Meter base (when required)
d. Service disconnect
e. Surge Protective Device
639-3 Materials.
639-3.1 Weatherhead: Use a weatherhead made of a copper free aluminum alloy with
three electrical service wire entrance holes, meeting National Electric Code (NEC) requirements.
639-3.2 Conduit: Use conduit meeting the requirements of Section 630. Meet the
requirements of Section 562 for coating all field cut and threaded galvanized pipe.
639-3.3 Electrical Service Wire: Use No. 6 AWG stranded copper wire with XHHW
(cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) high heat-resistant, water-resistant) insulation, rated at 600 V
in dry and wet condition for connections between service disconnect and traffic cabinet, unless
otherwise shown in the Plans.
639-3.4 Meter Base: Use meter bases approved by the local electric power company.
639-3.5 Service Disconnect:
639-3.5.1 Enclosure (Cabinet): Use an enclosure conforming to National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards for Type 3R, Type 3S or Type 4, made
of galvanized steel, aluminum, stainless steel or other materials approved by the Engineer.
Ensure that the enclosure has a hinged door which can be locked with a padlock. Provide
padlock and two keys. Do not use external handles or switches. Ensure that the inside
dimensions meet NEC requirements.
639-3.5.2 Circuit Breaker: Use a manually resettable circuit breaker which has a
current rating above the current rating of the circuit breaker to which electrical power is
provided. Do not use less than a 40A circuit breaker.
641-1 Description.
Furnish and install prestressed concrete poles as shown in the Plans.
Obtain precast, prestressed concrete poles from a manufacturing plant that is currently on
the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet
the requirements of Section 105.
Ensure that each pole is constructed and permanently and legibly marked in accordance
with Design Standards, Index No. 17725, including the date cast. Concrete closed circuit
television (CCTV) poles must be constructed and permanently and legibly marked in accordance
with Design Standards, Index No. 18113, unless shown otherwise in the Plans. The marking shall
be visible after installation.
Ensure that the shipment of the products to the job site meets the requirements of 450-
16.3 and Section 105.
641-2 Materials.
641-2.1 Poles: Meet the following requirements:
Portland Cement Concrete ......... Section 346 Class V Special
............................................................................ or Class VI
Reinforcing Steel ......................................................... 931-1
Prestressed Strands....................................................... 933-1
Spiral Reinforcing ..........................................ASTM A 1064
641-2.2 Camera Lowering Device: Use lowering devices that are listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Permanently mark the lowering device with
manufacturer name or trademark, model or part number, date of manufacture, and serial number.
The lowering device must provide the electrical connection between the control
cabinet and the equipment installed on the lowering device without reducing the function or
effectiveness of the equipment. The lowering device system support arm must be capable of
withstanding service tension and shear up to 1 kip minimum.
The lowering device must include a disconnect unit and power, data, and video
cables (as applicable) for connecting equipment, a divided support arm, pole attachment
provisions, a rotatable pole-top tenon, and a pole-top junction box, unless otherwise shown in the
Plans.
All external components are to be made of corrosion-resistant materials that are
powder-coated, galvanized, or otherwise protected from the environment. All finished castings
must have a smooth finish free from cracks, blow-holes, shrinks, and other flaws. All roller
fairlead frames must be corrosion resistant stainless steel or aluminum. All pulleys used in the
lowering device and portable lowering tool must have sealed, self-lubricated or oil-tight
bearings, or sintered bronze bushings.
Provide a minimum of 100 feet of composite power and signal cable prewired to
the lowering device at the factory unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Splices will not be
allowed.
Use only lowering devices designed to withstand the design wind speeds defined
in the Department’s Structures Manual, Volume 9.
646-1 Description.
Furnish and install aluminum poles, pedestals, and posts at the locations shown in the
Plans and in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and Design Standards. An aluminum
pedestal consists of a pole and a transformer base.
646-2 Materials.
646-2.1 Poles and Posts: Use nominal 4 inch diameter Schedule 40 aluminum poles and
posts meeting the requirements of The Aluminum Association Alloy 6061-T6 and ASTM B241.
Poles used with transformer bases must be threaded with No. 8 NPT threads. Sufficient threads
are required to fully seat the pole into the hub of the pedestal base.
646-2.2 Transformer Base: Use transformer bases listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL).
Manufacturers seeking APL approval of proprietary transformer bases must
submit an application in accordance with Section 6, independent laboratory test report, and
calculations and drawings showing details, notes, materials, dimensions, and sizes that the
transformer base meets the following requirements:
1. Materials: Meets the material requirements of Aluminum Association
Alloy 319 or 356-T6 and ASTM B26 or ASTM B108.
2. Height: Base is 12 to 18 inches in height with a threaded hub at the top
for mounting a nominal 4 inch Schedule 40 aluminum pole. The threaded hub must be tapped to
allow full pole engagement.
3. Fastening: Provides for fastening to a foundation with four 3/4 inch
anchor bolts located 90 degrees apart and a bolt circle diameter of 14 inches. The base design
must allow for bolts that are placed off-center.
4. Door: Provides a door opening of not less than 8 inches by 8 inches.
The door must be constructed of fiberglass or other non-combustible, non-aluminum material.
Attach the door to the base with cleats and one stainless steel socket button head screw or by
other means suitable for NEMA 3 electrical enclosures.
5. Moment Capacity: Supports an ultimate moment capacity of
10,000 foot-pounds. Provide certified test reports from the manufacturer verifying that each base
model meets the moment capacity without breaking, cracking or rupturing in any manner.
6. Breakaway: Meets the requirements in the latest revision of the
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and
Traffic Signals. Provide the FHWA certification letter for product approval.
7. Identification: Is legibly and visibly marked with the manufacturer’s
name or logo and the model number.
646-2.3 Anchor Bolts: Provide ASTM F1554 Grade 55 right angle bend anchor bolts,
3/4 inch diameter, 18 inches long, 3 inch leg and with a 5 inch UNC thread length. For each bolt,
provide two 3/4 inch ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex nuts and one 3/16 inch thick by 3 inch
round ASTM A36 plate washer or one ASTM F436 Type 1 washer. Anchor bolts, washers and
hex nuts must be galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.
646-2.4 End Caps: Provide end caps sized for nominal 4 inch diameter Schedule 40
aluminum poles. The cap must be a minimum of 1/4 inch thick and tapped for at least two set
screws. Set screws will be provided with the end cap.
646-3 Installation.
646-3.1 General: Verify the length of the column supports in the field prior to
fabrication to permit the appropriate sign or signal height.
646-3.2 Foundations: Construct foundations in accordance with the applicable Design
Standards.
The Contractor may use precast foundations in augered or excavated holes that
are a minimum of 12 inches larger than each axis dimension of the precast foundation. The holes
must be clean and without loose material. Obtain precast foundations from a manufacturing plant
that is currently listed on the Department’s list of Producers with Accepted Quality Control
Programs. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of 105-4.4. Fill the
voids around precast foundations with flowable fill meeting the requirements of Section 121 or
clean sand placed using hydraulic methods to a level of 6 inches below grade.
646-3.3 Setting Anchor Bolts: Set anchor bolts 90 degrees apart with a bolt circle
diameter of 14 inches. Adjust anchor bolts to a plumb line and hold rigidly in position to prevent
displacement while pouring concrete.
646-3.4 Installation: Do not erect poles until the concrete strength is at least 2500 psi.
Plumb the poles after erection using shims if necessary to obtain precise alignment.
646-3.5 Grounding: Meet the requirements of Section 620 and the applicable Design
Standards.
649-1 Description.
The work in this Section consists of furnishing and installing galvanized steel strain
poles, galvanized steel mast arms, galvanized steel monotube assemblies, and galvanized steel
CCTV poles in accordance with the details shown in the Contract Documents, subject to a five
year warranty period as defined herein. The warranty period will apply only when poles, mast
arms or steel monotube assemblies are painted as called for in the Contract Documents.
649-2 Materials.
649-2.1 Pole Assembly: Use pole assemblies as shown in the Design Standards when
standard mast arm assemblies, standard strain pole assemblies, or standard steel CCTV pole
assemblies are required by the Contract Documents.
Obtain poles, mast arm, and monotube assemblies from a fabrication facility that
is listed on the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking inclusion on the list
shall meet the requirements of Section 105.
Use coating products meeting the requirements of Section 975.
Use grouts meeting the requirements of Section 934 and listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Use water meeting the requirements of Section 923.
Use membrane curing compounds meeting the requirements of Section 925.
649-2.2 Camera Lowering Device: Meet the requirements of 641-2.2.
649-3 Fabrication.
Fabricate poles, mast arm, and monotube assemblies and miscellaneous hardware in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Cut all materials to the final dimensions and complete
all welding prior to galvanizing. Obtain all components for individual strain poles, mast arm and
monotube assemblies from the same fabricator. Obtain the luminaire and bracket from other
sources, when necessary.
Affix an aluminum identification tag which will be visible from the handhole or located
inside the terminal box containing the information described in the Design Standards.
Before shipping, assemble mast arm and monotube assemblies including luminaire and
bracket, to assure proper fit. The mast arm and monotube assemblies may be separated for
shipment.
Ensure all components are protected from damage during shipping and handling by
wrapping or other effective methods. Replace any component, which the Engineer determines is
damaged beyond repair, at no additional cost to the Department. If components are wrapped for
shipment, remove wrappings no later than five days after receipt of components or immediately
if the wrappings become saturated. Post these instructions in brightly colored wording on the
wrapper. Failure to comply with these instructions may lead to damage of the coating system and
will be cause for the rejection of the component.
649-5 Installation.
Install foundations in accordance with Section 455. Do not install poles, mast arm poles,
or monotubes until the foundation has achieved 70% of the specified 28-day concrete strength
and verifying test results have been provided to the Engineer. Determine concrete strength from
tests on a minimum of two test cylinders prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and
ASTM C39. Before erecting the pole, clean the top of the foundation of any laitance, oils, grease
or any other deleterious materials. Erect strain poles in an orientation which considering the rake
and the application, cable forces will produce a plumb pole. Erect monotubes plumb at the time
of installation. Plumb the pole supporting mast arms after the mast arms, traffic signals or sign
panels have been placed.
If the traffic signals and/or sign panels are not in place within two working days after the
mast arm is erected, furnish and install a 3 foot x 2 foot blank sign panel on the bottom of each
mast arm within 6 feet of the mast arm tip and plumb the pole. Re-plumb the pole supporting
mast arms after installation of traffic signals and sign panels.
Install ASTM A325 bolt, nut and washer assemblies in accordance with the following.
Use bolt, nut and washer assemblies that are free of rust and corrosion and are lubricated
properly as demonstrated by being able to easily hand turn the nut on the bolt thread for its entire
length. Tighten nuts to a snug tight condition to bring the faying surfaces of the assembly into
full contact which is referred to as snug-tight. Snug-tight is defined as the maximum nut rotation
resulting from the full effort of one person using a 12 inch long wrench or equivalent. After
bringing the faying surfaces to a snug-tight condition, tighten nuts in accordance with Table 460-
7, Nut Rotation from the Snug Tight Condition. Maintain uniform contact pressure on the faying
surfaces during snugging and turn-of-nut process, by using a bolt tightening pattern that balances
the clamping force of each bolt, as closely as possible, with the equal clamping force of a
companion bolt.
Base plate installation steps are as follows:
1. Verify that the nuts can be turned onto the bolts past the elevation
corresponding to the bottom of each in-place leveling nut and be backed off by the effort of one
person on a 12 inch long wrench, without employing a pipe extension on the wrench handle.
2. Clean and lubricate the exposed threads of all anchor bolts. Clean and lubricate
the threads and bearing surfaces of all leveling nuts. Re-lubricate the exposed threads of the
anchor bolts and the threads of the leveling nuts if more than 24 hours has elapsed since earlier
lubrication, or if the anchor bolts and leveling nuts have become wet since they were first
lubricated.
3. Turn the leveling nuts onto the anchor bolts and align the nuts to the same
elevation.
4. Place structural plate washers on top of the leveling nuts; one washer
corresponding to each anchor bolt.
Table A
Anchor Bolt Diameter (inches) Nut Rotation from Snug-Tight Condition
≤ 1-1/2 1/3 turn
> 1-1/2 1/6 turn
650-1 Description.
Furnish and install vehicular traffic signal assemblies as shown in the Plans and Design
Standards. For additional requirements related to mounting and attaching the assemblies, see
Section 659.
650-2 Materials.
650-2.1 General: Use vehicular signal assemblies listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL). Vehicular traffic signal assemblies must meet the requirements of
Section 603 and the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Standard for Vehicle Traffic
Control Signal Heads.
Provide vehicular traffic signal assemblies as a complete and functioning unit.
Components include, but are not limited to, signal housing, light emitting diode (LED) signal
module, visors, backplates, lenses, and assembly hardware.
All sections of multi-section assemblies must be from the same manufacturer.
Fastening hardware such as bolts, screws, nuts, washers, latches, and studs must
be must be SAE Type 316 or 304 stainless steel.
Horizontal signal assemblies must be constructed so the door hinges, when
installed, are located on the bottom of the signal assembly. Vertical mounted five-section cluster
assemblies must be constructed so that the door hinges, when installed, are located along the
outside edges of the complete assembly and each section opens away from the horizontally
adjacent section.
Vehicular traffic signal assemblies must be permanently marked with the
manufacturer’s name or trademark, part or model number and date of manufacture or serial
number.
650-2.2 Twelve Inch Signal Head Assemblies: Construct the assembly of materials and
alloys specified in the ITE Standard for Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads.
The top and bottom opening of each signal head section must include a circular
72-tooth serrated connection (2 inch nominal I.D.) capable of providing positive positioning and
alignment in 5 degree increments. When assembled and tightened, these connections must
prevent rotation or misalignment of the signal head as well as misalignment between sections.
The serrated area must start at the outside of the 2 inch hole and be at least 1/8 inch wide. The
teeth must have a minimum depth of 3/64 inch between peaks and valleys, be free from burrs or
other imperfections, and provide positive locking with the grooves of mating sections,
framework, and brackets. The serration on the top circular connection of a signal section must
have a valley at the 0 degree position and the serration on the bottom circular connection must
have a peak at the 0 degree position, both aligned perpendicular to the front of the section.
Connections must permit the assembly of a multi-section signal with the front of each section
aligned within 1 degree.
Provide at least two latching points with latch pads and manual Type 316 or 304
stainless steel latching devices that are tamper resistant.
Each signal section must have four backplate mounting attachment points on the
back of the signal, on or no more than three inches from each section corner. Attachment points
650-3 Installation.
650-3.1 Preassembly: Pre-assemble the signal heads when more than one signal section
is required prior to installation at the site. Furnish signal heads with LED modules, backplates,
and visors. Use tunnel visors unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. Install the
LED circular module in the door so that the UP arrow or the word UP or TOP is in the up
orientation of the signal housing. Install the LED arrow modules in the signal housing door in
the direction of the intended use.
650-3.2 Positioning of Signals: Consider the locations of the installed signals as shown
in the Plans as sufficiently flexible as to allow for unanticipated field conditions at the site. The
Engineer will direct any variations from the locations shown. Position adjacent signal faces no
closer than 8 feet apart measured horizontally at 90 degrees to the traffic flow between centers of
faces.
Regardless of the results of any scaled dimensions, consider the location shown in
the Plans to be approximate. Position a signal face mounted on a span wire or mast arm as near
as practical to the line of the driver’s normal view.
Ensure that all sections are of the same manufacturer and the section assemblies
are uniform in appearance and alignment.
650-3.3 Clearances: Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer for unusual
circumstances at the site, provide a vertical clearance of not less than 17 feet-6 inches and not
more than 19 feet for traffic signals placed over the roadway. Measure such clearance for each
span directly under the most critical signal assembly (in regards to clearance) for that span. Place
signal assemblies on each span as near as practical to the same elevation as the critical signal
assembly.
650-4 Warranty.
Ensure that the signal housings, modules, backplates, and any other signal assembly
components have a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a minimum of three years from
the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and Section 608. Ensure the warranty
includes providing replacements, within 30 calendar days of notification, for defective parts and
equipment during the warranty period at no cost to the Department or the maintaining agency.
653-1 Description.
Furnish and install pedestrian signal assemblies as shown in the Plans and Design
Standards, Index No. 17764. Meet the requirements of Section 603.
653-2 Materials.
653-2.1 General: Use pedestrian signals listed on the Department’s Approved Product
List (APL). Pedestrian signal assemblies must meet the requirements of the latest edition of the
Federal Highway Administration’s (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD) and the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) standard for Pedestrian Traffic
Control Signal Indications.
653-2.2 Housing and Visor: The housing must be weatherproof, sectional and may
consist of as many sections as optical units. The housing must prevent light from escaping from
one unit to another. The top and bottom opening of the housing must include a circular 72-tooth
serrated connection (2 inch nominal I.D.) capable of providing positive positioning and
alignment in 5 degree increments. When assembled and tightened, these connections must
prevent rotation or misalignment. The serrated area must start at the outside of the 2 inch hole
and be at least 1/8 inch wide. The teeth must have a minimum depth of 3/64 inch between peaks
and valleys, free from burrs or other imperfections, and provide positive locking with the
grooves of mating sections, framework, and brackets. The serration on the top circular
connection of a signal section must have a valley at the 0 degree position and the serration on the
bottom circular connection must have a peak at the 0 degree position, both aligned perpendicular
to the front of the section. Housings must include latch pads and manual stainless steel latching
devices that are captive, or non-removable. Housings must have at least two latching points.
Reinforce all mounting points and adjacent housing material. The door enclosing
the lens must be hinged and held securely to the housing. Provide a gasket meeting the
requirements of ASTM D1056, Grade 2B2 between the housing and door and between the lens
and door. If the fitting between the housing and door is weather-tight, the gasket may be omitted.
Provide a visor for each signal face. Light must not escape between the door and
visor. The visor must be three-sided and extend a minimum of 7 inches at the top from the face
of the lens. The visor must be constructed of noncorrosive sheet metal, not less than 0.05 inch
thick, (No. 18 gauge in thickness) or polycarbonate.
All metal housings and visors must be powder-coat painted black in accordance
with Military Standard MIL-PRF-24712A or AAMA-2603-02 with a reflectance value not
exceeding 25 percent as measured by ASTM E97. For polycarbonate heads, the black color must
be incorporated into the material before the molding process.
The housing must be constructed of a non-corrosive material. Cast metal parts
must have a minimum tensile strength of 1 ksi (117 MPa) and sheet metal parts a minimum
tensile strength of 27 ksi (186 MPa).
653-2.2.1 Die castings: Meet the requirements in ASTM B85 for the physical
characteristics and chemical content for alloys S12A, S12B, SC84A, SC84B, SG100A and
SG100B.
653-2.2.2 Sand Castings: Meet the requirements in ASTM B26 for the physical
characteristics and chemical content for alloys S5A and CS72A.
Table 1
Test Minimum Requirement Method
Specific Gravity 1.17 ASTM D 792
Vicat Softening Temp. 305-325°F (152 – 163°C) ASTM D 1525
Brittleness Temp. Below -200°F (-129°C) ASTM D 746
Flammability Self-extinguishing ASTM D 635
Tensile Strength Yield, 8500 psi (58 MPa) ASTM D 638
Elongation at yield 5.5 - 8.5% ASTM D 638
Shear Strength Yield, 5500 psi (38 MPa) ASTM D 732
Izod impact strength 15ft-lb/in (800 J/m) ASTM D 256
Fatigue strength 950 psi (6.5MPa) at 2.5 mm cycles ASTM D 671
653-2.3 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Pedestrian Signal Optical Unit (State
Standard): Provide a countdown pedestrian signal module meeting the requirements of the
latest ITE LED Pedestrian Signal Specifications.
653-2.4 Electrical: Wiring must be color-coded No. 18 AWG or larger, stranded wires
with an approved 600 V outdoor insulation rating or equivalent. Wires must be a minimum of
3 feet long with self-insulating slide-on terminals with no bare wiring exposed where wires are
secured.
The pedestrian signal must include a terminal block containing a minimum of five
circuits, each with two noncorrosive screw-type terminals. Each terminal must accommodate
three No. 18 AWG conductors and be labeled for ease of identification. The terminal block must
not be obstructed and be visible when the housing is open.
653-2.5 Hardware: All brackets used to mount pedestrian signals must be an aluminum
alloy cast fitting, pipe or equivalent material approved by the Department. Aluminum and
aluminum alloy bars, rods, wires, profiles, and tubes must meet ASTM B221. Aluminum-alloy
sand casting must meet ASTM B26. All mounting hardware must be painted black with a
reflectance value not exceeding 25 percent as measured by ASTM E97.
Ensure that all assembly hardware, including nuts, bolts, external screws and
locking washers less than 5/8 inch in diameter, are Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel.
Stainless Steel bolts, screws and studs must meet ASTM F593. Nuts must meet ASTM F594. All
assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter must be galvanized. Bolts, studs,
and threaded rod must meet ASTM A307. Structural bolts must meet ASTM A325.
653-3 Installation.
653-3.1 General: Use pedestrian signal assemblies capable of being maintained,
adjusted, and disassembled with ordinary hand tools. Pre-assemble the pedestrian signal, with
the exception of mounting hardware, prior to installation at the site. Construct the pedestrian
654-1 Description.
Furnish and install midblock crosswalk enhancement assemblies.
654-2 Materials.
Use midblock crosswalk enhancement assemblies listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL).
Midblock crosswalk enhancement assemblies are classified as the following types: In-
Roadway Light Assemblies, Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies (RRFB), and
Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon Assemblies.
654-2.1 In-Roadway Light Assemblies: In-roadway light assemblies must meet the
physical and operational requirements of the latest edition of the MUTCD, Chapter 4N.
In-Roadway light assemblies shall be normally dark, initiate operation only upon
pedestrian actuation via a pedestrian pushbutton, and cease operation at a predetermined time
after the pedestrian actuation or, with passive detection, after the pedestrian clears the crosswalk.
The duration of the predetermined period shall be programmable and capable of matching the
pedestrian clearance time for pedestrian signals as determined by MUTCD procedures. The timer
that controls flashing must automatically reset each time a pedestrian call is received.
654-2.2 Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon Assemblies (RRFB): RRFB assemblies
must include two rapidly and alternately flashed rectangular yellow indications having LED-
array based pulsing light sources. Each rectangular yellow indication must be a minimum of five
inches wide by two inches high.
654-2.2.1 RRFB Sign Assemblies: RRFB assemblies must be attached to a W11-
2 (Pedestrian) or S1-1 (School) crossing warning sign with a diagonal downward arrow (W16-
7p) plaque, a single column ground sign post, and attachment hardware in accordance with
Design Standards, Index No. 11860. The two RRFB indications shall be aligned horizontally,
with the longer dimension horizontal and with a minimum space between the two indications of
approximately 7 inches measured from inside edge of one indication to inside edge of the other
indication. The outside edges of the RRFB indications, including any housings, shall not project
beyond the outside edges of the W11-2 or S1-1 sign.
654-2.2.2 Beacon Flashing Requirements: The light intensity of the yellow
indications shall meet the minimum specifications of Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
standard J595 for Class 1 (Directional Flashing Optical Warning Devices for Authorized
Emergency, Maintenance, and Service Vehicles).
The flash rate of each individual yellow indication, as applied over the full
on-off sequence of a flashing period of the indication, shall not be between 5 and 30 flashes per
second. When activated, the two yellow indications in each RRFB shall flash in one of the
following patterns.
654-2.2.2.1 “2/5” Pattern: The flash rate shall be 70 to 80 periods of
flashing per minute. Each beacon shall have alternating flash rates, but approximately equal
periods of rapid pulsing light emissions and dark operation. During each of its 70 to 80 flashing
periods per minute, the yellow indications on the left side of the RRFB shall emit two slow
pulses of light after which the yellow indications on the right side of the RRFB shall emit four
rapid pulses of light followed by a long pulse.
654-4 Warranty.
Ensure the midblock crosswalk enhancement assembly has a manufacturer’s warranty
covering defects for two years from the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and
Section 608. Ensure the warranty includes providing replacements within 10 calendar days of
notification for defective parts and equipment during the warranty period at no cost to the
Department or the maintaining agency.
659-1 Description.
Furnish and install mounting assemblies for vehicular and pedestrian traffic signals,
signs, cameras, detectors, and other devices in accordance with the Contract Documents.
659-2 Materials.
659-2.1 General: Use mounting assemblies listed on the Department’s Approved
Product List (APL). Meet the requirements of Section 603.
Fastening hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers, set screws, studs, u-bolts, cable
and cable swags, must be provided by the mounting assembly manufacturer, must be SAE
Type 316 or 304 stainless steel. Hardware (studs, bolts and u-bolts) must be a minimum of
5/16 inch diameter unless otherwise specified in this Section. SAE Grade 8 bolts and nuts are
also acceptable. Metallic mounting assemblies must meet ASTM B117 for corrosion resistance.
Connections that provide an entrance to the interior of a traffic device must be
weather-resistant.
All assemblies must be constructed to support the weight of any combination of
signal indications with all accessories such as back plates and visors.
Connections between signal, disconnect and disconnect hanging hardware must
be of the tri-stud design unless otherwise specified. Tri-stud washers must be a minimum
0.090 inches thick unless otherwise specified in this Section.
Surfaces that mate to vehicular and pedestrian traffic signals must have a standard
circular 72 tooth serration connection (two inch I.D.) capable of providing positive positioning
and alignment of the signal in 5 degree increments. The serrated teeth must be clean and sharp
and at least 1/8 inch wide and 3/64 inch deep. The connection between the teeth of the signal and
the upper bracket must be weather resistant.
Design mounting assemblies capable of providing adjustment in multiple
directions for proper alignment of the attached traffic device and to prevent rotation around the
vertical axis or misalignment after installation.
Studs may be cast directly into the aluminum during the casting process or tapped
and locked with a locking material. In each case, a pull-out force must be provided. Messenger
wire clamps must be extruded aluminum six inches long or cast U-bolt type as shown in Design
Standards Index No. 17727.
Torque specifications must be included with all assembly installation instructions
if torque specifications are specified by the manufacturer.
659-2.2 Product Identification: Mounting assemblies must be permanently marked with
the name or trademark of the manufacturer, part number and date of manufacture. Identification
must be cast into, or metal-marked on, the assembly in a legible manner. When the assembly is
made up of multiple components, each component must be identified with the manufacturer’s
name or trademark.
659-2.3 Finish: Unless otherwise specified, mounting assemblies and components must
be supplied with a natural finish with mill scale removed in accordance with Military Standard
MIL-PRF-24712A or AAMA 2603-02 and must meet the requirements of ASTM 3359 and
ASTM D3363. Disconnect (interior and exterior) and disconnect hub must be powder-coat
painted dull black (Federal Standard 595A-37038) with a reflectance value not exceeding
659-3 Installation.
Install all mounting assemblies in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
659-4 Warranty.
Ensure mounting assemblies have a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a
minimum of three years from the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and
Section 608. The warranty must include providing replacements, within 10 calendar days of
660-1 Description
Furnish and install a vehicle detection system in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Use vehicle detection systems and loop sealant that meet the requirements of this
Specification and are listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
660-2 Materials
660-2.1 Classification of Types: Vehicle detection and data collection systems are
classified by the type of function they perform and the type of technology that they employ.
660-2.1.1 Functional Types: Provide the functional type detailed in the Plans.
660-2.1.1.1 Vehicle Presence Detection Systems: Vehicle presence
detection systems produce a corresponding output any time that a vehicle occupies the physical
or virtual area of the detector.
660-2.1.1.2 Traffic Data Detection Systems: Traffic data detection
systems provide presence, volume, occupancy, and speed data for the lanes they are configured
to monitor.
660-2.1.1.3 Probe Data Detection Systems: Probe data detection systems
provide speed data and travel times for a road segment. Probe data detectors use automatic
vehicle identification (AVI) technologies to establish a unique identifier for each vehicle they
detect. This identifier is then transmitted to a central site where it can be matched to past or
future detections of the same vehicle at different detector locations.
660-2.1.2 Technology Types: Provide the detection technology type detailed in
the Plans. Detection technology types include inductive loop, video, microwave, wireless
magnetometer, and AVI systems.
660-2.1.2.1 Inductive Loop: An inductive loop detection system uses a
minimum of one inductive loop and loop detector. The system operates by energizing and
monitoring wire embedded in the road surface to detect vehicle presence and provide an output
to traffic controllers or other devices that can generate volume, occupancy, and speed data
(detection output).
660-2.1.2.1.1 Inductive Loop Detector Units: Ensure rack mount
inductive loop detector units meet the requirements of NEMA TS-2-2003. Ensure shelf mount
detector units meet the requirements of NEMA TS-1-1989.
660-2.1.2.1.2 Loop Wire: Use No. 12 AWG stranded copper wire
with Type XHHW cross-linked polyethylene insulation, or No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire
with Type XHHW cross-linked polyethylene insulation and an additional outer sleeve composed
of polyvinylchloride or polyethylene insulation that meets the requirements of International
Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) 51-7.
660-2.1.2.1.3 Shielded Lead-in Cable: Use No. 14 AWG two
conductor, stranded copper wire with shield and polyethylene insulation, meeting the
requirements for IMSA 50-2.
660-2.1.2.1.4 Splicing Material: Butt-end connectors may be used
for splicing the loop wire to the lead-in cable. Butt-end connectors must be non-insulated. Use
resin-core solder for soldered splices. Splicing tape must be self-fusing silicone rubber. Ensure
Table 660-1
Data Collection Periods
Period Intended To Represent Duration Weight
Early morning (predawn) [EM] 12:30 a.m. – 6:30 a.m. 15 minutes 24
Dawn [DA] 6:30 a.m. – 7:00 a.m. 30 minutes 2
AM Peak [AMP] 7:00 a.m. – 8:00 a.m. 15 minutes 4
Late AM Off-Peak [LAOP] 8:00 a.m. – 12:00 p.m. 15 minutes 16
For instance, the sample gathered for the Late AM Off-Peak period is
intended to represent typical traffic conditions between 8:00 a.m. and 12:00 p.m. Since the
sample period’s duration is 15 minutes and the actual period of time represented is 4 hours, the
multiplication factor or weight assigned is 16, the number of 15-minute intervals in a 4 hour
period.
660-2.2.1.1 Calculation of Vehicle Presence Detection Accuracy:
Compute presence detection accuracy as described in this subsection.
Determine individual lane presence detection accuracy per period
by subtracting from 100 percent the absolute difference of the total time monitored and the
cumulative error time, divided by total time, expressed as a percentage.
In the equation in 660-2.2.1.1.1, “EM” represents the early
morning period. The variable “i” represents a detector or detection zone and could vary from
1,…, N, where “N” is the total number of detectors observed. Substitute other detector numbers
and periods as necessary to determine accuracy for all detectors during each period (i.e., dawn,
AM peak, late AM off peak, etc.).
Variables used in the following equations are identified as follows:
PA = Presence detection accuracy
TT = Total time
CET = Cumulative Error Time (duration of all false and missed calls)
N=Total number of detectors observed
660-2.2.1.1.1 Early Morning Vehicle Presence Detection
Accuracy for a Single Detector Expressed as a Percentage:
TTEM , det i CETEM , det i
PAEM , det i 100 x100
TTEM , det i
where:
PAEM ,deti = Presence detection accuracy of detector i during the early morning
period.
TTEM ,deti = Total time that detector i was monitored (for instance, the 15-minute
minimum duration specified in Table 660-1 for the early morning period).
CETEM ,deti = Cumulative time that detector i was in an error state (indicating a
detection with no vehicle present or not indicating a detection when vehicle present) during the
monitoring period using human observation or another method approved by the Engineer.
The period accuracy will be the arithmetic mean of all individual detector
accuracies.
Calculate the roadway segment accuracy over all periods using the equation in
660-2.2.1.1.3.
660-2.2.1.1.3 Total Vehicle Presence Detection Accuracy for All
Detectors Expressed as a Percentage:
PATotal
PAEM x24 PADAx2 PAAMPx4 PALAOPx16 PANO x4 PAAOP x16 PAPMPx4 PADU x2 PANI x24
96
Where:
PATotal =Accuracy for all detectors for all periods
PAEM = Accuracy of all detectors during early morning traffic conditions
PADA = Accuracy of all detectors during dawn traffic conditions
PAAMP = Accuracy of all detectors during AM peak traffic conditions
PALAOP = Accuracy of all detectors during late AM off-peak traffic conditions
PANO = Accuracy of all detectors during noon traffic conditions
PAAOP = Accuracy of all detectors during afternoon off-peak traffic conditions
PAPMP = Accuracy of all detectors during PM peak traffic conditions
PADU = Accuracy of all detectors during dusk traffic conditions
PANI = Accuracy of all detectors during night traffic conditions
660-2.2.1.2 Vehicle Presence Detection System Field Acceptance
Testing: Verify presence detection accuracy at installed field sites using a reduced method
similar to that described in 660-2.2.1.1. Compare sample data collected from the detection
system with ground truth data collected by human observation. For site acceptance tests, collect
samples and ground truth data for each site for a minimum of five minutes during a peak period
and five minutes during an off-peak period. For presence detection at intersections, ensure there
are a minimum of three detections for each signal phase. Perform site acceptance tests in the
presence of the Engineer.
660-2.3 Traffic Data Detection System Performance Requirements: Provide a vehicle
detection system capable of meeting the minimum total roadway segment accuracy levels of
95% for volume, 90% for occupancy, and 90% for speed for all lanes, up to the maximum
number of lanes that the device can monitor as specified by the manufacturer.
660-2.3.1 Data Accuracy: To verify conformance with the accuracy
requirements in this Section and as a precondition for listing on the APL, sample data collected
VATotal
VAEM x24 VADA x2 VAAMP x4 VALAOP x16 VANO x4 VAAOP x16 VAPMP x4 VADU x2 VANI x24
96
Where:
VATotal = Volume accuracy for all lanes for all periods
VAEM = Volume accuracy for early morning traffic conditions
VADA = Volume accuracy for dawn traffic conditions
VAAMP = Volume accuracy for AM peak traffic conditions
VALAOP = Volume accuracy for late AM off-peak traffic conditions
VANO = Volume accuracy for noon traffic conditions
VAAOP = Volume accuracy for afternoon off-peak traffic conditions
VAPMP = Volume accuracy for PM peak traffic conditions
VADU = Volume accuracy for dusk traffic conditions
VANI = Volume accuracy for night traffic conditions
660-2.3.1.2 Calculation of Speed and Occupancy Accuracy: Calculate
speed accuracy as discussed in this subarticle. Calculate occupancy accuracy using similar
methods.
For computing the accuracy of the detector speed measurement,
the average speed readings obtained from the detection system are compared to ground truth
values.
The equation in 660-2.3.1.2.1 represents the ground truth average
speed computation procedure for a particular lane during a specific time period. The equation in
660-2.3.1.2.2 represents the average speed computation procedure for a particular lane during a
specific time period using data gathered from the detection system.
In the equations in 660-2.3.1.2.1 and 660-2.3.1.2.2, the time period
described is the early morning period, represented by “EM”, and the subscript “k” represents a
vehicle traveling on the roadway and could vary from 1,…, K, where “K” is the total number of
vehicles in lane i during the time period under consideration. The subscript “i” represents a lane
in a roadway and could vary from 1,…, N, where “N” is the total number of lanes of detection on
the roadway segment. Substitute other lanes and periods as necessary and compute the accuracy
for each lane for all time periods.
Where:
SAAvg ,EM ,GT ,lni
represents the average ground truth vehicle speed for the i th lane
during the early morning period.
S EM ,GT ,lni ,vehk
represents the ground truth speed for the kth vehicle in the ith lane
during the early morning period using human observation or another method approved by the
Engineer.
660-2.3.1.2.2 Early Morning Average Vehicle Detector Speed:
1 K
S Avg , EM ,VD ,ln i
K
S
k 1
EM ,VD ,ln i ,vehk
Where:
S Avg ,EM ,VD ,lni
represents the average speed recorded by the vehicle detector for the
ith lane during the early morning period.
SEM ,VD,lni ,vehk
represents the speed for the k th vehicle in the i th lane during the early
morning period using the vehicle detector.
Determine lane speed accuracy per period by subtracting
from 100 percent the absolute difference of the average lane speed measured by the detector and
the average lane ground truth speed, divided by the average lane ground truth speed, expressed
as a percent.
In the equation in 660-2.3.1.2.3, “EM” represents the early
morning period. The subscript “i” represents a lane of detection on a roadway and could vary
from 1,…,N, where “N” is the total number of lanes of detection on the roadway segment.
Substitute other lanes as necessary to determine the accuracy for each period (i.e., dawn, AM
peak, late AM off-peak, etc.).
660-2.3.1.2.3 Early Morning Lane Speed Accuracy Expressed
as a Percentage:
S Avg , EM ,VD , ln i S Avg , EM ,GT , ln i
SAAvg , EM , ln i 100 100
S Avg , EM ,GT , ln i
Where:
SAAvg ,EM ,lni
represents the average speed accuracy during early morning traffic
conditions for all vehicles that traveled in lane i of the roadway segment.
Where:
SATotal = Speed accuracy for all lanes for all periods
SAEM = Speed accuracy for early morning traffic conditions
SADA = Speed accuracy for dawn traffic conditions
SAAMP = Speed accuracy for AM peak traffic conditions
SALAOP = Speed accuracy for late AM off-peak traffic conditions
SANO = Speed accuracy for noon traffic conditions
SAAOP = Speed accuracy for afternoon off-peak traffic conditions
SAPMP = Speed accuracy for PM peak traffic conditions
SADU = Speed accuracy for dusk traffic conditions
SANI = Speed accuracy for night traffic conditions
660-2.3.1.3 Traffic Data Detection System Field Acceptance Testing:
Verify detector data accuracy at installed field sites using a reduced method similar to those
described in 660-2.3.1. Compare sample data collected from the detection system with ground
truth data collected by human observation. For site acceptance tests, collect samples and ground
truth data for each site for a minimum of five minutes during a peak period and five minutes
during an off-peak period. Perform site acceptance tests in the presence of the Engineer.
660-2.4 Probe Data Detection System Performance Requirements: Ensure that probe
data detectors establish a unique and consistent identifier for each vehicle detected and the time
and location that the vehicle was detected. Ensure that probe detectors provide a minimum
penetration rate of 75%. Ensure probe data detection systems that match upstream and
660-4 Warranty.
Ensure that the detection system has a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a
minimum of 2 years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with 5-11
and Section 608.
Ensure the warranty includes providing replacements, within 10 calendar days of
notification, for defective parts and equipment during the warranty period at no cost to the
Department or the maintaining agency.
663-1 Description.
Furnish and install a signal priority and preemption system as shown in the Plans. The
signal preemption system must recognize and respond to the priority of each user. Meet the
requirements of Section 603.
663-2 Materials.
Use signal priority and preemption system equipment listed on the Department’s
Approved Product List (APL). Ensure that all materials furnished, assembled, fabricated or
installed are new products.
Signal priority and preemption system equipment may utilize optical, GPS, and radio
frequency based technologies.
663-2.1 Functional Requirements: Ensure that in-vehicle equipment operates without
requiring any action from the vehicle operator or occupants once power is applied.
663-2.1.1 Security: The system must include features that secure the system and
restrict its configuration and operation to authorized users and vehicles only.
663-2.1.2 Vehicle Identification: The system must be able to assign a unique
identifier for each authorized vehicle. The system must be able to associate the identifier with
vehicle information such as vehicle classification (e.g., fire, police, rescue, transit),
owner/operator, and priority level.
663-2.1.3 Configuration and Management: The system must allow authorized
local and remote users to set and read all user-programmable features and retrieve data collected
by the system. The manufacturer must provide computer software required to configure, operate,
and maintain the system at no additional cost to the Department.
663-2.1.4 Logging: The system installed in the field cabinet must store a record
of events, including time, vehicle ID, class, priority level, and approaching direction for all
vehicles detected. The log must operate on a first-in, first out (FIFO) principle with a minimum
capacity of 5,000 events.
663-2.1.5 Detection Range and Accuracy: The priority and preemption system
must be capable of detecting and identifying multiple authorized vehicles at various ranges up to
2,500 feet. The system must be able to determine the approaching direction of authorized
vehicles. The detection range and programming of emergency (high priority) and transit signal
(low priority) preemption shall be adjustable from within the traffic signal cabinet. High priority
calls must override low priority calls.
The system must service preemption calls having equal priority on a first-
come, first-served basis.
663-2.2 Preemption System Cabinet Electronics: The priority and preemption system
must be compatible with NEMA TS 1, NEMA TS 2, Type 170, and Type 2070 traffic signal
controllers and their respective cabinets.
The system must be able to provide calls to the controller via input file and
detector rack. The system must include two channel or four channel detector card units
compatible with NEMA TS 2-2003 v02.06. The system must include a shelf mount option.
The system must be able to provide emergency preemption (high priority) and
transit signal (low priority) preemption calls to the controller. Detectors must include
663-3 Installation.
Installation of materials must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Install the emergency preemption system including installation of detectors with all necessary
hardware and software, mounting hardware, cabling, and all other associated electronics in
cabinet necessary to create a fully functional emergency preemption system.
Ensure that status indicators remain unobstructed and visible.
663-3.1 Field Testing: Subject the system to field acceptance tests (FATs). Develop and
submit a test plan for FATs to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer reserves the right to
witness all FATs.
665-1 Description.
Install a pedestrian detection system. Use pedestrian detection systems and components
listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Pedestrian detection systems are
classified into two categories: Standard Pedestrian Pushbutton Detectors and Accessible
(Audible/Tactile) Pedestrian Pushbutton Detectors. The components of the pedestrian detection
system include pushbuttons, pedestrian actuation signs, electronics, wiring, and mounting
hardware.
665-2 Materials.
665-2.1 Standard Pedestrian Pushbutton Detector: Pushbuttons must be raised from
or flush with their housings and be a minimum of 2 inches in the smallest dimension. The
pushbutton must require no more than 5 pounds of force to activate. The detector must be
weather-tight and tamper resistant.
665-2.1.1 Housing: The housing must be a two piece unit consisting of a base
housing and a removable cover. The housing must be cast aluminum meeting the physical
characteristics and chemical content established in ASTM B26 for alloys S5A and CS72A.
The housing or adapter (saddle) must conform to the shape of a pole and
provide a flush, secure fit. Saddles must be of the same material and construction as the housing.
Pushbuttons for wood pole mounting must have threaded holes for 1/2 inch conduit provided in
the housing top or bottom. A 3/4 inch hole with an insulated bushing shall be provided through
the back of the housing. Unused openings shall be closed with a weatherproof closure and
painted to match the housing.
The housing must have a powder-coat finish and painted in accordance
with Military Standard MIL-PRF-24712A. The housing must be permanently marked with
manufacturer name or trademark, part number, date of manufacture, and serial number.
665-2.1.2 Pushbutton: The pushbutton must include a normally open,
mechanical phenolic enclosed, positive-acting, spring-loaded, snap-action switch with single
pole, single throw contacts or Piezo driven solid state switch rated for a minimum of 50 V. The
switch, when activated, must give an audible (i.e., click) or visual indication of actuation. Switch
connections inside the housing must allow wiring and installation without binding. The switch
must have a design life of one million operations (minimum) at rated load.
665-2.1.3 Electrical Requirements: The wiring must be No. 18 AWG stranded
(minimum) with 600 V outdoor insulation rating.
665-2.2 Accessible (Audible/Tactile) Pedestrian Pushbutton Detector: The accessible
pedestrian pushbutton detector must consist of all electronic control equipment, wiring,
mounting hardware, pushbuttons, and pedestrian actuation signs designed to provide both a
pushbutton with a raised, vibrating tactile arrow on the button as well as a variety of audible
indications for differing pedestrian signal functions.
665-2.2.1 Electronic Control Equipment: The accessible pedestrian pushbutton
detector must include electronic control equipment that is programmable and adjustable using a
laptop computer or vendor supplied programmer. Electronic control equipment must be able to
be installed within a traffic controller cabinet or within a pedestrian signal housing. Electronic
control equipment installed within a traffic controller cabinet must allow the use of up to
665-3 Warranty.
Ensure that pedestrian detection systems have a manufacturer’s warranty covering
defects for a minimum of 5 years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in
accordance with 5-11 and Section 608. Ensure the warranty includes providing replacements,
within 10 calendar days of notification, for defective parts and equipment during the warranty
period at no cost to the Department or the maintaining agency.
665-4 Installation.
Install pedestrian detectors at the locations and in a manner as shown in the Plans and
Design Standards, Index No. 17784. Ensure all detectors are the same manufacturer and model.
Pushbuttons mounted on wood poles must be serviced by a conduit riser. Pushbuttons
mounted on steel or aluminum (poles, pedestals, or posts) must be serviced by wiring inside the
pole. Pushbuttons mounted on existing concrete poles may be serviced by a conduit riser.
Pushbuttons mounted on new concrete poles or pedestals must be serviced by wiring on the
inside.
A pedestrian actuation sign must be included with each pushbutton assembly. Provide the
sign type, size and legend as specified on the plans or as directed. Tactile arrows of accessible
pedestrian pushbuttons must align parallel with the direction of the crossing.
The Engineer will direct any variation from the locations shown. When mounting, place
the detector housing or saddle in complete contact with the pole or controller cabinet. When a
post is required in the installation of the pedestrian detector, restore the area around the post to
its original condition or as required by the Plans.
670-1 Description.
Furnish and install a traffic controller assembly or flashing intersection control beacon
controller assembly as shown in the Plans. Meet the requirements of Section 603.
670-2 Materials.
Use a traffic controller assembly or intersection control beacon controller
assembly listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Traffic controller assemblies
and intersection control beacon controller assemblies must be permanently marked with
manufacturer name or trademark, part number and serial number. Markings must be visible after
installation.
Provide a traffic controller assembly consisting of a traffic controller, traffic controller
accessories (including monitors, load switches, flasher, flash transfer relay, power supplies), and
other equipment wired into a controller cabinet to make a complete and operational assembly.
All traffic controller assemblies must provide functionality that meets or exceeds operational
characteristics, including NTCIP support, as described in NEMA TS-2-2003.
670-2.1 Traffic Controller: Meet the requirements of Section 671.
670-2.2 Traffic Controller Accessories: Meet the requirements of Section 678.
670-2.3 Controller Cabinet: Meet the requirements of Section 676.
670-2.4 Flashing Intersection Control Beacon Controller Assembly: A flashing
intersection control beacon controller assembly must consist of a Type 3 flasher wired into a
Type 1 controller cabinet to make a complete and operational assembly.
671-1 Description.
Furnish and install a NEMA Model 170, Model 2070, or ATC controller unit as shown in
the Plans. Meet the requirements of Section 603.
671-2 Materials.
Use traffic controllers listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Ensure
equipment is permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark, part number, and
serial number.
Controllers must meet the following applicable industry standards:
NEMA TS1 Controller ........................... NEMA TS-1-1989
NEMA TS2 Controller ........................... NEMA TS-2-2003
Model 170 Controller .................. CALTRANS TEES, 2009
Model 2070 Controller ................ CALTRANS TEES, 2009
ATC Controller ................ AASHTO/ITE/NEMA ATC 5.2b
All controllers must provide functionality that meets or exceeds operational
characteristics, including NTCIP support, as described in NEMA TS-2-2003.
676-1 Description.
Furnish and install traffic cabinets as shown in the Plans. Meet the requirements of
Section 603.
676-2 Materials.
676-2.1 General: Use traffic cabinets and accessories that are listed on the Department’s
Approved Product List (APL). Cabinets must be permanently marked with a label including the
manufacturer's name or trademark, model/part number, and the year and month of manufacture.
Place the label on the inside of the main door using a water resistant method. The label must be
visible after installation.
676-2.2 NEMA Traffic Signal Controller Cabinets: Provide NEMA traffic signal
controller cabinets with all terminals and facilities necessary for traffic signal control meeting the
following requirements:
NEMA TS1 Controller Cabinet .............. NEMA TS-1-1989
NEMA TS2 Controller Cabinet ............... NEMA TS 2 2003
676-2.2.1 Documentation: Provide four copies of the cabinet wiring diagram
with each cabinet. The nomenclature of signal heads, vehicular movements and pedestrian
movements on the wiring diagram must be in accordance with the signal operating plan.
Documentation must include a list identifying the termination points of
cables used for vehicular and pedestrian signal heads, detector loop lead-ins, and pedestrian
pushbutton wires.
A heavy duty, resealable plastic opaque bag must be mounted on the
backside of main cabinet door for storing cabinet prints and other documentation.
676-2.2.2 Police Switches: Provide the following police switches with Type 3and
larger controller cabinets. The switches must be mounted on the police panel and identified as to
their function.
1. AUTO-FLASH: When this switch is in the FLASH position, all signal
indications must immediately transfer to the flashing mode. AC power shall be removed from the
load switches and stop timing applied to the controller unit. When this switch is placed in the
AUTO position the controller unit must operate in accordance with the appropriate specification.
2. MANUAL ON-OFF: When this switch is in the on position, a logic
ground must be applied to the manual control enable input of the controller unit.
3. MANUAL JACK: Install a manual jack on the police panel. The jack
must mate with a three circuit, 1/4 inch diameter phone plug. Connect the tip and ring (middle)
circuits of the jack to the logic ground and the interval advance inputs of controller unit. When
the manual hand cord is plugged into the jack and the pushbutton is pressed, logic ground must
be connected to the interval advance input of the controller unit.
Provide a manual pushbutton with Type 3 and larger cabinets. The pushbutton
cord must have a minimum length of six feet with a 1/4 inch diameter three circuit plug
connected to one end and a hand held manual pushbutton at the other end. With the exception of
the vehicular yellow and all red clearance intervals, a complete cycle (push-release) of the
manual pushbutton shall terminate the controller unit interval that is active. Cycling the push-
676-2.3.2 Police Switches: Police switch panels must include a manual jack. The
jack must mate with a three circuit, 1/4 inch diameter phone plug. Connect the tip and ring
(middle) circuits of the jack to the logic ground and the interval advance inputs of controller unit.
When the manual hand cord is plugged into the jack and the pushbutton is pressed, logic ground
must be connected to the interval advance input of the controller unit.
The pushbutton cord must have a minimum length of 6 feet with a 1/4 inch
diameter three circuit plug connected to one end and a hand held manual pushbutton at the other
end. With the exception of the vehicular yellow and all red clearance intervals, a complete cycle
(push-release) of the manual pushbutton shall terminate the controller unit interval that is active.
Cycling the push-button during the vehicular yellow or all red clearance intervals must not
terminate the timing of those intervals.
676-2.3.3 Output File: Fabricate the output file using a "hard wired" harness.
Printed board circuit boards are not acceptable.
676-2.3.4 Shelf: Provide an aluminum shelf with storage compartment in the rack
below the controller (for remote secondary monitor/lap top computer use). The storage
compartment must have telescoping drawer guides for full extension. The compartment top must
have a non-slip plastic laminate attached. Provide an RS-232 connector for communications to
the C2S port.
676-2.3.5 Loads: Provide dummy loads consisting of 4.7k resistors rated at
five watts minimum for Greens, Peds, and Yellows. The dummy loads must be mounted on a
terminal block in the rear of the output file or other approved location. Wire one side of each
dummy load to AC return in a manner that allows a technician to easily attach the load to outputs
from selected load switches.
676-2.3.6 Cabinet Light: Provide a light fixture capable of producing a minimum
of 950 lumens. The fixture must include a clear shatterproof shield and be mounted on the inside,
front top of the cabinet. The light must automatically turn on when the cabinet door is opened
and off when the doors are closed.
676-2.3.7 Surge Protection: Provide each cabinet with devices to protect
equipment from surges. Surge protection must be provided for the full capacity of the cabinet
Input File and shall be in accordance with the assignment of the slots of a standard 336S cabinet
assembly. Surge protector termination panels must be attached to the cabinet rack assembly and
allow sufficient space for connections, access, and surge protector replacement. AC isolation
terminals must be on the same side of the cabinet as the AC service inputs. DC terminals and
loop detector terminals must be installed on the opposite side of the cabinet from the AC power
lines.
Surge protection for 332A cabinets must be mounted on the lower input
termination panel.
Surge protection for 336S cabinets must be mounted on a custom fold
down termination panel at the input file.
Table 1
Minimum Cabinet Dimensions in Inches
Cabinet Type Height Width Depth
336 36” - 39” 24” - 26” 20’ - 22”
336S 46” - 48” 24” - 26” 22” - 24”
334 66” - 68” 24” - 26” 30” - 32”
The cabinet must be weather resistant and constructed with a crowned top to
prevent standing water. All exterior cabinet welds must be gas tungsten arc (TIG) welds and all
interior cabinet welds must be gas metal arc (MIG) or TIG welds. All exterior cabinet and door
seams must be continuously welded and smooth and all inside and outside edges of the cabinet
must be free of burrs, rounded and smoothed for safety. All welds must be neatly formed and
free of cracks, blow holes and other irregularities. Use ER5356 aluminum alloy bare welding
electrodes conforming to AWS A5.10 requirements for welding on aluminum. Procedures,
welders and welding operators must conform to AWS requirements as contained in AWS B3.0
and C5.6 for aluminum.
The cabinet must have a lifting eye plate on either side of the top for lifting the
cabinet and positioning it. Each lifting eye opening must be a minimum diameter of 0.75 inches
and capable of supporting a weight load of 1,000 pounds. All external bolt heads must be
tamperproof.
Ground-mount cabinets must include a removable base plate and two aluminum
plates, welded inside, for anchoring the cabinet to a concrete or composite type base as shown in
the Plans. Fabricate the plates from aluminum alloy 5052-H32 a minimum of 4 inches wide by
0.125 inches thick. Provide the cabinet with four 1 inch diameter holes for anchoring.
676-2.5.1 Doors: Provide cabinets with front and rear doors, each equipped with
a lock and handle. Doors must be full size, matching the height and width dimensions of the
cabinet enclosure, with no fewer than three stainless steel hinges or; alternately, one full-length
“piano” hinge. Hinges must be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel with stainless steel hinge
676-4 Warranty.
Ensure traffic cabinets have a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a minimum
of two years from the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and Section 608. The
warranty must include providing replacements, within 10 calendar days of notification, for
defective parts and equipment during the warranty period at no cost to the Department or
maintaining agency.
677-1 Description.
Furnish and install an equipment shelter as shown in the Plans. Ensure that all materials
furnished, assembled, fabricated, or installed are new products.
677-2 Materials.
677-2.1 General: Ensure that the shelter includes a secure door; power distribution
panels; a heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system; lightning protection,
grounding, and any other components necessary for a completely integrated communication
building. Ensure that the shelter is constructed and installed according to local building codes.
Provide a shelter designed to withstand loads as follows: wind: 150 MPH; floor:
200 lbs. per square foot; slab: 200 lbs. per square foot; roof: 100 lbs. per square foot. Provide
design drawings that meet all minimum design standards and are signed and sealed by a
registered Professional Engineer in the State of Florida.
The shelter’s exterior shall have an exposed concrete aggregate finish. The shelter
must have a bullet-resistant exterior surface in accordance with UL 752. The shelter’s exterior
color is to be earth tone. Alternative exterior finishes or colors may be approved by the Engineer.
Ensure that the equipment shelter’s heat transfer coefficient does not exceed
0.07 British Thermal Units (BTUs) per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit (F) for the
roof and 0.28 BTUs per hour per square foot per degree F for the exterior wall.
677-2.2 Shelter Floor and Foundation: The floor is to be constructed of concrete or
concrete composite material.
The foundation is a monolithic slab with appropriate footings and the final top of
slab elevation is set a minimum of 2 feet above final grade, or as shown in the Plans. Concrete is
to be Class I for extremely aggressive environments and in accordance with Section 346.
Perform concrete structures work in accordance with Section 400.
The equipment shelter must not bend or break during moving, towing, or hoisting.
The equipment room’s interior floor covering is to be industrial-grade vinyl
flooring fastened to the shelter floor with waterproof adhesive. Provide an air gap between the
equipment shelter floor and the foundation slab, or alternatively, construct the foundation slab
with a vapor barrier to prevent moisture penetration. Insulate the floor to provide a minimum
insulating factor of R-11.
677-2.3 Door: The exterior door is to be 36 inches wide by 78 inches tall, insulated,
bullet-resistant, corrosion-resistant steel door with a door check and doorstop secured with a
mortised deadbolt security lock keyed as directed. The door is to have a lever type handle on
both the inside and outside. Provide the Department with four keys to each door lock.
677-2.4 Walls: Vapor shield the walls to prevent moisture penetration and insulate the
walls for a minimum insulating factor of R-14. Interior surfaces are to have a white textured
finish wall covering with molding on all corners. All floor/wall intersections are to have 4 inch
vinyl baseboards installed using waterproof adhesive.
677-2.5 Ceiling and Roof: The interior room height is to be no less than 8 feet above the
floor and capable of supporting the proposed electrical fixtures and cable trays. The roof section
shall have a 1/8 inch per foot minimum pitch for drainage. Fill all voids between the ceiling and
roof with a vapor shield and minimum Type R-21 insulation.
678-1 Description.
Furnish and install traffic controller accessories as shown in the Plans. Meet the
requirements of Section 603.
678-2 Materials.
Use traffic controller accessories listed on the Department’s Approved Product List
(APL). Ensure that all traffic controller accessories are permanently marked with the
manufacturer’s name or trademark, model or part number, and serial number.
Traffic controllers must meet the following applicable industry standards:
NEMA TS1 Conflict Voltage Monitor ..................................
............................................... NEMA TS-1-1989, Section 6
NEMA TS2 Malfunction Management Unit .........................
............................................... NEMA TS-2-2003, Section 4
Load Switch ......................... NEMA TS 2 2003, Section 6.2
Flasher ................................. NEMA TS 2 2003, Section 6.3
Flash Transfer Relay ............ NEMA TS 2 2003, Section 6.4
210 Conflict Monitor (Model 210) ........................................
..................................................... CALTRANS TEES, 2009
Power Supply Module (Model 206) ......................................
..................................................... CALTRANS TEES, 2009
Power Distribution Assembly ................................................
............................................ CALTRANS TEES, 2009 6.4.3
Flash Transfer Relay (Model 430) .........................................
...................................... CALTRANS TEES, 2009 6.4.5.1.5
Input File............................. CALTRANS TEES, 2009 6.4.4
Current Monitor (Model 208) ................................................
............................................ CALTRANS TEES, 2009 3.7.2
Ensure all traffic controllers perform all specified functions during and after being
subjected to the environmental testing procedures described in NEMA TS-2, Sections 2.2.7,
2.2.8, and 2.2.9.
678-2.1 Time Switch: Ensure the time switch is a 24-hour timer which controls the daily
switching operation of circuit contacts at preselected times.
Type 1 time switches must contain a single circuit contact and a solid state
timer with at least 48 programmable on and off times.
Type 2 time switches must contain two circuit contacts and a solid state
timer with at least three independently programmable on and off times per circuit.
Type 3 time switches must contain three circuit contacts and a solid state
timer with at least three independently programmable on and off times per circuit.
678-2.1.1 Timing: Solid state timing must be accomplished by digital circuits
utilizing the power line 60 Hz frequency as the normal timing reference. Time-of-day must be
settable and displayed in maximum increments of one minute.
678-3 Installation.
678.3.1 General: Install all system control equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Terminate wires on the appropriate terminal strips in the
controller cabinet with insulated terminal lugs. Neatly bundle, secure, and identify all wiring and
cables.
678-3.2 Time Switch: Mount time switches on the inside wall of the controller cabinet in
such a manner as to allow easy access for programming the switch. Ensure that the load current
on the output circuits of the time switch does not exceed 3 A at 115 VAC. Whenever time
switches are used for transferring a controller assembly to and from flashing operation, wire the
controller cabinet for uniform code flashing as specified in Section 676.
680-1 Description.
Furnish and install system control equipment as shown in the Plans. Meet the
requirements of Section 603.
680-2 Materials.
680-2.1 General: Use system control equipment and components that meet the
requirements of these Specifications and are listed on the Department’s Approved Product List
(APL).
680-2.2 Adaptive Signal Control System: Adaptive signal control systems external to
the traffic controller place detector calls to the traffic signal controller to adjust signalization
timing based on measured traffic conditions independently of the traffic signal controller’s
preconfigured timings.
The system must interface with the traffic controller using either the Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) Port 1 interface and protocol or 24 VDC inputs/outputs available in
the traffic controller cabinet. Dynamically modifying controller configuration settings through
serial communications is not allowed.
The system must include a user interface that allows the configuration of
subcomponents, such as detectors and cameras, and includes remote monitoring and reporting.
The system must include the option of incorporating existing vehicle detection in
addition to the primary detection used by the adaptive signal control system.
The system must not affect the normal operation of the traffic signal controller
upon any failure of communication, detection, or system component.
Ensure adaptive signal control system hardware is permanently marked with
manufacturer name or trademark as well as part number and serial number. Ensure that the
markings are visible after installation.
680-2.3Environmental Requirements: Ensure system control equipment performs all
required functions during and after being subjected to the transients, temperature, voltage,
humidity, vibration, and shock tests described in NEMA TS2, 2.2.7, 2.2.8, and 2.2.9.
680-3 Installation.
Install all system control equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Terminate wires on the appropriate terminal strips in the controller cabinet
with insulated terminal lugs. Neatly bundle, secure, and identify all wiring and cables.
680-4 Warranty.
Ensure system control equipment has a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a
minimum of three years. The warranty must include provisions for providing replacements
within 10 calendar days of notification for defective parts and equipment during the warranty
period at no cost to the Department or the maintaining agency.
Rear Projection
Flat Panel Display Video Display
Type Direct View LCD DLP or LCD
Size (dependent on TMC design, as shown in Plans)
Aspect Ratio (dependent on TMC design, as shown in Plans)
1600 x 1200 / 1280 x 768 pixels; 16.7 1024 x 768
Resolution
million colors pixels
682-2.4 Installation Requirements: Do not proceed with any part of the procurement,
construction, or installation of the video display equipment until the Construction Plans and
materials are approved by the Engineer. Provide the Engineer with submittal documentation,
including the manufacturers’ product specification sheets and a detailed description of each
item’s function as well as a compliance matrix that confirms all equipment meets or exceeds the
requirements of these specifications.
Configure each video display unit to provide individual, independent control from
each operator workstation.
Create the video wall display by arranging individual video display units in a
framework or apparatus that creates the video wall configuration as shown in the Plans. Ensure
that the finished video wall provides a single, apparently seamless display area. Ensure that
adjacent individual display units are aligned physically and electronically so that image content
stretched across multiple monitors align within plus or minus 2 lines of horizontal and vertical
resolution.
Ensure that all rear projection video unit controls are accessible at all times when
the devices are permanently installed. Ensure that installation and positioning does not conceal or
limit access to any display unit controls at any time during active use.
Follow proper ventilation and cooling procedures for the equipment installed, as
determined by the equipment manufacturers. Provide electrical requirements and power
distribution units and power supplies for the video display components on an as-needed basis.
682-2.5 Testing:
682-2.5.1 General: Submit a detailed system acceptance test plan to the Engineer
for review and approval. Prepare a test plan that covers all areas of system function described in
this section, and that is developed according to the various equipment manufacturers’
recommendations.
Check and test the satisfactory operation of all video display components
upon completion of the equipment’s installation. At minimum, include in the video display
system test the testing of each color video monitor type, each secondary display output at
workstations, each rear projection video display unit, and the video wall display’s image
alignment and control functions.
682-2.5.2 Observation Period: Subject the video wall display to a 90 day
operational observation period, during which time the Contractor shall perform any and all
maintenance, recalibration, system checking, and display modifications required by the Engineer.
The Engineer has the option to require a restart of the observation period if a major system flaw
or failure occurs.
684-5 Warranty.
684-5.1 General: Ensure that the manufacturer will furnish replacements for any part or
equipment found to be defective during the warranty period at no cost to the Department or the
maintaining agency within 10 calendar days of notification.
684-5.2 MFES: Ensure that the MFES has a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects
for five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with 5-11 and
Section 608.
684-5.3 Device Server: Ensure that the device server has a manufacturer’s warranty
covering defects for five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance
with 5-11 and Section 608.
684-5.4 Digital Video Encoder and Decoder: Ensure that the DVE or DVD has a
manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for two years from the date of final acceptance by the
Engineer in accordance with 5-11 and Section 608.
684-5.5 Media Converter: Ensure that the media converter has a manufacturer’s
warranty covering defects for five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in
accordance with 5-11 and Section 608.
685-1 Description.
Furnish and install traffic control system auxiliaries as shown in the Plans.
685-2 Materials.
685-2.1: General: Use traffic control system auxiliaries listed on the Department’s
Approved Product List (APL). Equipment must be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s
name or trademark, model/part number and serial number or date of manufacture.
685-2.2 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): Use a line interactive or online/double-
conversion UPS as shown in the Plans. UPS assemblies must be designed for installation in a
roadside NEMA 3R enclosure to provide battery backup functionality for traffic control systems,
including traffic signal and intelligent transportation system (ITS) devices. UPS assemblies must
include batteries provided by the UPS manufacturer or in accordance with manufacturer’s
requirements.
Loss of utility power, transfer from utility power to battery power, and transfer
back to utility power must not interfere with normal operation of connected equipment. In the
event of UPS failure or battery depletion, connected equipment must be energized automatically
upon restoration of utility power.
The UPS must operate in hot standby mode with power transfer being
accomplished in 40 milliseconds or less.
Removal and replacement of the UPS must not disrupt the operation of the
equipment being protected.
All harnesses necessary to connect and operate the system must be included. All
connectors must be keyed to prevent improper connection.
685-2.2.1 Configuration and Management: Provide a UPS that supports local
and remote configuration and management, including access to all user-programmable features
as well as alarm monitoring, event logging, and diagnostic utilities.
Configuration and management functions must be password protected.
Alarm function monitoring must include the following: loss of utility
power, inverter failure, low battery, battery temperature, and inverter active/utility fail. The UPS
must include an event log that indicates the date and time of the following events: AC high, AC
low, AC frequency high, AC frequency low, AC fail/blackout, overload, over temperature,
battery voltage high, battery voltage low, battery disconnected, battery temperature high,
temperature probe disconnected, and short circuit. The UPS event log must be able to store a
minimum of 200 events.
The UPS must include a front panel display and controls that allows
programming of configurable parameters, features, and functions without the need for another
input device. The UPS must have visual indications for Power-On, Mode of Operation (utility
power or inverter), Battery Status, Alarm Status, Load Levels, and AC Output Voltage.
685-2.2.2 Communication Interfaces: Provide a serial data connection port and
an Ethernet port (RJ45) for local control using a laptop PC and remote control via a network
connection.
685-4 Testing.
Provide a field acceptance test plan to the Engineer for approval at least 14 days prior to
commencement of testing. After approval of the acceptance test plan, perform testing of the
installed UPS equipment. Furnish all equipment, software, and supplies necessary for conducting
the test.
685-5 Warranty.
Ensure the UPS includes a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a minimum of
three years (5 years for the external batteries in accordance with 685-2.2.3) from the date of final
acceptance in accordance with 5-11 and Section 608. The warranty must include provisions for
providing a replacement UPS within 10 calendar days of notification for any UPS found to be
defective during the warranty period at no cost to the FDOT or the maintaining agency.
687-1 Description.
Furnish and install a highway advisory radio (HAR) system in accordance with the
details specified in the Contract Documents. HAR systems incorporate Travelers’ information
stations that must be authorized and operated in accordance with FCC rules. Use only equipment
and components that meet the requirements of these minimum specifications and are listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
687-2 Materials.
687-2.1 General: Provide a HAR system that includes static signage with flashing
beacons to notify motorists of active HAR broadcasts. Ensure that the HAR system includes all
equipment necessary to record verbal messages from onsite or remote locations, and to
continually broadcast live, prerecorded, and synthesized messages. Ensure that all HAR
transmitter components are modular and fit in a rack-mounted chassis.
Ensure that the HAR system includes software, hardware and any other
component required to fully configure, operate and monitor the HAR field equipment locally and
remotely.
Ensure that all materials furnished, assembled, fabricated, or installed are new
products and approved by the Engineer.
687-2.2 Transmitter: Ensure that the transmitter complies with the requirements of the
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47, Section 90.242, “Travelers’ information stations”,
and 47 CFR Section 2.901 et seq. (Part 2, Subpart J), of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations.
Use a transmitter with a power efficiency of 80% or greater. Ensure that the
transmitter is adjustable from 0 to 10 watts. Ensure that the transmitter frequency is set at the
factory. Ensure that the transmitter parameters can be monitored locally and remotely.
Ensure that the radio frequency (RF) output impedance is 50 ohms and
unbalanced.
Ensure that the audio input impedance is 600 ohms and balanced. Ensure that the
transmitter module has audio distortion of less than 1.5% for an audio frequency response of
200 Hz to 3.5 kHz.
Provide a transmitter module with indicators or displays for power status, RF
power output, and audio modulation level.
687-2.3 Digital Recorder and Playback Unit: Ensure that the digital recorder and
playback unit can locally and remotely record, store, transmit, and receive digital messages or
audio files. Ensure that the digital recorder and playback unit allows operator control by dual
tone multi-frequency (DTMF) tones over standard public switched telephone networks (PSTNs)
and digital cellular telephone, and digital commands via serial modem. Ensure that the digital
recorder and playback unit is FCC certified under Part 68 for dial-up operations.
Ensure that the digital recorder and playback unit can schedule broadcasts, which
shall be programmable by the day of the week, month, date, and time. Use a digital recorder and
playback unit with the ability to record and store a minimum of 250 distinct, variable-length
messages, and provide a minimum of 14 minutes of recorded message time.
687-4 Testing.
Subject the equipment covered by these specifications to field acceptance tests (FATs).
Develop and submit a test plan for FATs to the Engineer for consideration and approval.
The Engineer reserves the right to witness all FATs. Complete the tests within
five calendar days.
687-5 Warranty.
Ensure that the manufacturer will furnish replacements for any part or equipment found
to be defective during the warranty period at no cost to the Department or the maintaining
agency within 10 calendar days of notification.
Ensure that the HAR has a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects for a minimum of
five years from the date of final acceptance by the Engineer in accordance with 5-11 and
Section 608.
695-1 Description.
Furnish or furnish and install a complete, operable traffic monitoring site (TMS) as
shown in the Plans and Design Standards. The Department uses TMS to monitor the volume,
speed, number of axles, weight of wheels, axles or vehicles, or vehicular axle classification
types.
695-2 General.
695-2.1 Traffic Monitoring Site Component Approval: Use only components that
meet the requirements of this Section and are listed on the Department’s Approved Products List
(APL).
Any electronics unit or software submitted for approval must be compatible with
or convert the data into a format compatible with the Department’s polling and processing
software. Any substitute software modules submitted must be tested and approved.
695-2.2 Marking of Approved Equipment:
695-2.2.1 Manufacturer’s Identification: All TMS equipment must be
permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark, part or model number and date
of manufacture or serial number.
695-2.2.2 Submittal Data Requirements: Submit forms in accordance with 603-
5.
695-2.3 Notification: Notify the Engineer 10 days prior to beginning work in the area of
the TMS to coordinate the removal of existing TMS equipment.
A TMS Inspector must be onsite during TMS installation. Notify the Engineer
10 days prior to installation of the TMS to coordinate the scheduling of a TMS Inspector.
695-2.4 Poles for Cabinets, Non-Intrusive Sensors and Solar Panels:
695-2.4.1 Requirements: Meet the requirements of Section 646 for aluminum
poles.
695-2.4.2 Installation: Install cabinets in accordance with Section 676. Install the
weather head and ground the pole in accordance with Section 620 and Design Standards, Index
No. 17900.
695-2.5 Manufacturer’s Warranty Provisions:
695-2.5.1 General: Secure all warranties provided by the equipment
manufacturer for the specific equipment included in the Contract. Ensure that all warranties are
fully transferable from the Contractor to the Department. Transfer warranties upon final
acceptance in accordance with 5-11. Document all warranties and warranty transfers and provide
a copy to the Engineer. The Engineer will submit warranty forms received from the Contractor to
the Transportation Statistics Office (TranStat) TMS Manager.
695-2.5.2 Terms and Conditions: Ensure that the terms and conditions of
warranties are documented by the manufacturer when submitting a request to the Department for
certification and for equipment submittal for construction projects. Include terms for a specified
service performance with provisions for repair parts and labor, or for replacement.
Ensure the terms and conditions define the equipment installation date as
the date for such warranty to be in effect. The installation date for construction projects is the day
Table 695-1
At 14.6 psi Barometric Pressure
Dry Bulb ºF Relative Humidity (%) Wet Bulb ºF
40 75 37
50 80 46
60 83 57
70 86 66
80 87 77
90 89 88
100 89 97
109 90 108
120 70 109
130 50 109
140 38 109
150 28 109
160 21 109
165 18 109
695-4.2.7 Cables and Connectors: Furnish all cables and connectors for a
complete and functional installation of each electronics unit in accordance with the Design
Standards, Index No. 17900.
Ensure that the cables are properly terminated for the prescribed use
without further modification by the Department.
Furnish one serial port cable for interconnecting each electronics unit with
a PC.
695-4.3 Installation Requirements: Install the electronics unit and equipment cables in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedure, the Design Standards,
Index No. 17900, and Contract Documents.
695-4.4 Method of Measurement: The Contract unit price per assembly for electronics
unit includes the electronics unit and equipment cable, all equipment, materials and labor
necessary for a complete and accepted installation.
695-4.5 Basis of Payment: Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work
specified in this Section.
Payment will be made under:
Item No. 695- 3- TMS Vehicle Speed/Classification Unit - per assembly.
Table 700-2
Operational Support Supplies
1 each Sign controller and I/O board(s)
10 each LED display modules
1 each Display power supply
1 each Uninterruptible power supply
1 each Cable for connecting interface circuits to daughter boards
1 each Display module cables
2 each Surge suppression sets
1 each Fan assembly
1 each Time relay for fan control
10 each Each type of small fuse (≤ 10 amp)
1 each Sign controller and I/O board(s)
10 each LED display modules
Table 700-3
Communication Interface Requirements
Data Bits 7 or 8 bits
Parity Even, Odd, or None
Number Stop Bits 1 or 2 bit
Ensure the sign controller has a 10/100 Base TX 8P8C port or a 100 Base
FX port Ethernet interface.
For dial-up operations, acquire and bear the charges of installing and
connecting the dial-up telephone line. Provide modems to be retained by the Department at each
location. Provide a user-selectable data transmission rate of up to 19.2 kbps for dial-up
operations. Ensure that switching between dial-up, Ethernet, and multidrop operation does not
require sign controller software or hardware modifications.
Ensure that the TMC or a laptop computer can be used to remotely reset
the sign controller.
700-4.9 Message and Status Monitoring: Ensure the DMS provides two modes of
operation: (1) remote operation, where the TMC commands and controls the sign and determines
the appropriate message or test pattern; and (2) local operation, where the sign controller or a
laptop computer commands and controls the sign and determines the appropriate message or test
pattern.
Ensure that the sign can perform the following functions:
1. Control Selection – Ensure that local or remote sign control can be
selected. Ensure that there is a visual indicator on the controller that identifies whether the sign
is under local or remote control.
701-1 Description.
Profiled thermoplastic pavement markings consist of thermoplastic material with raised
thermoplastic bumps creating a raised profile marking. Apply profiled thermoplastic pavement
markings to concrete pavement only, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
701-2 Materials.
Use only materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) as an
approved system and meeting the following requirements:
Profiled Thermoplastic............................................ 971-1 and 971-9
Retroreflective Elements* ..................................................... 971-1.7
Glass Spheres* ........................................................ 971-1 and 971-2
*Use retroreflective elements or glass spheres recommended by the manufacturer.
The Engineer will take random samples of the materials in accordance with the
Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.
701-3 Equipment.
Use equipment capable of providing continuous, uniform heating of the pavement
marking material to temperatures exceeding 390ºF, mixing and agitating the material in the
reservoir to provide a homogenous mixture without segregation. Use equipment that will
maintain the pavement marking material in a plastic state, in all mixing and conveying parts,
including the line dispensing device until applied. Use equipment which is capable of producing
a consistent pattern of bumps with a longitudinal distance between bumps of approximately
30 inches center-to-center intervals. Use equipment which meets the following requirements:
1. Capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and
downhill, to produce a uniform application of pavement marking material and capable of
following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc.
2. Capable of applying retroreflective elements or glass spheres to the surface of
the completed pavement marking by automatic dispensers attached to the pavement marking
machine such that the retroreflective elements or glass spheres are dispensed closely behind the
installed line. Use retroreflective element or glass sphere dispensers equipped with an automatic
cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the thermoplastic material and applies the
retroreflective elements or glass spheres uniformly on the entire pavement marking surface with
50 to 60% embedment.
3. Equipped with a special kettle for uniformly heating and melting the pavement
marking material. The kettle must be equipped with an automatic temperature control device and
material thermometer for positive temperature control and to prevent overheating or scorching of
the thermoplastic material.
4. Meets the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
State and Local authorities.
701-4 Application.
701-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings such that scars or traces of
removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings by a method approved by the
701-9 Submittals.
701-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the
Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of
quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed
items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.
701-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a
certification of quantities no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off
date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the
certification of quantities consists of the following:
1. Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and
the period that the certification represents.
2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments
previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a
detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.
705-1 Description.
Furnish and install object markers to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway
of the types and at the locations called for in the Design Standards or on the Plans.
Furnish and install delineators along the side of the roadway to indicate the alignment of
the roadway as indicated in the Design Standards or in the Plans.
705-2 Materials.
705-2.1 General: Meet the following requirements:
Object Markers and Delineators .......................... Section 993
Retroreflective and Nonreflective
Sign Sheeting ....................................................... Section 994
705-2.2 Product Acceptance on the Project: Ensure that delineators and delineator
posts are listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
706-1 Description.
Place raised retroreflective pavement markers (RPMs) and adhesive, which upon
installation produces a positive guidance system to supplement other reflective pavement
markings.
706-2 Materials.
Use only Class B markers unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
Meet the requirements of Section 970.
706-2.1 Product Acceptance on the Project. Use only reflective pavement markers and
bituminous adhesive that are listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Provide to the Engineer a manufacturer’s certification conforming to the
requirements of Section 6, which confirms that each product meets the requirements of this
Section.
706-3 Equipment.
Use equipment having either thermostatically controlled double boiler type units utilizing
heat transfer oil or thermostatically controlled electric heating pots to install hot applied
bituminous adhesive. Do not use direct flame melting units with flexible adhesives; however,
this type of unit may be used with standard adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Use a melter/applicator unit suited for both melting and pumping the adhesive
through heated applicator hoses.
Heat the adhesive to between 375°F and 425ºF and apply directly to the bonding surface
from the melter/applicator by either pumping or pouring. Maintain the application temperature
between 375°F and 425ºF. The adhesive may be reheated. However, do not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommendations for pot life at application temperatures.
706-4 Application.
Apply RPMs to the bonding surface using bituminous adhesives only. The Engineer will
conduct field testing in accordance with FM 5-566. Correct RPMs not applied in accordance
with these requirements at no cost to the Department.
Prior to application of adhesive, clean the portion of the bonding surface of any material
which would adversely affect the adhesive.
Apply the adhesive to the bonding surface (not the marker) so that 100% of the bonding
area of the marker will be covered, in accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s
recommendations. Apply sufficient adhesive to ensure, that when the marker is pressed
downward into the adhesive, adhesive will be forced out around the entire perimeter of the
marker.
Immediately remove excess adhesive from the bonding surface and exposed surfaces of
the RPMs. Soft rags moistened with mineral spirits meeting Federal Specifications TT-T-291 or
kerosene may be used to remove adhesive from exposed faces of the RPMs. Do not use any other
solvent. If any adhesive, pavement marking materials or other foreign matter adheres to the
reflective face of the marker, replace the marker at no cost to the Department.
709-1 Description.
Apply two reactive components pavement markings in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
709-2 Materials.
Use only materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) as an
approved system and meeting the following requirements:
Two Reactive Components ......................... 971-1 and 971-8
Retroreflective Elements* ......................................... 971-1.7
Glass Spheres* ............................................ 971-1 and 971-2
*Use only retroreflective elements or glass spheres recommended by the
manufacturer.
The Engineer will take random samples of the materials in accordance with the
Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.
709-3 Equipment.
Use equipment that will produce continuous uniform dimensions of pavement markings
of varying widths and meets the following requirements:
1. Capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and
downhill, to produce a uniform application of the two reactive components material and capable
of following straight lines and making normal curves in true arcs.
2. Capable of applying retroreflective elements or glass spheres to the surface of
the completed line by an automatic retroreflective element dispenser attached to the pavement
marking machine such that the retroreflective elements or glass spheres are dispensed closely
behind the installed line. Use a retroreflective element or glass sphere dispenser equipped with
an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the material and applies the
retroreflective elements or glass spheres in a manner such that the retroreflective elements or
glass spheres appear uniform on the entire pavement markings surface.
3. Capable of providing the manufacturer’s recommended mixing ratio between
the components in a thorough and consistent manner.
709-4 Application.
709-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings, such that scars or traces of
removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings by a method approved by the
Engineer.
Before applying pavement markings, remove any material by a method approved
by the Engineer that would adversely affect the bond of the pavement markings.
Offset longitudinal lines at least 2 inches from construction joints of portland
cement concrete pavement.
Apply pavement markings to dry surfaces only, and when the ambient air and
surface temperature is at least 40ºF and rising.
Do not apply two reactive components pavement markings when winds are
sufficient to cause spray dust.
709-9 Submittals.
709-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the
Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of
quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed
items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.
709-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a
certification of quantities no later than Twelve O clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off
date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the
certification of quantities consists of the following:
1. Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and
the period that the certification represents.
2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments
previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a
detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.
710-1 Description.
Apply painted pavement markings, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
710-2 Materials.
Use only materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) meeting the
following requirements:
Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers and Bituminous
Adhesive .............................................................Section 970
Standard Paint ............................................. 971-1 and 971-3
Durable Paint .............................................. 971-1 and 971-4
Glass Spheres .............................................. 971-1 and 971-2
The Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the
Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.
710-3 Equipment.
Use equipment that will produce continuous uniform dimensions of pavement markings
of varying widths and meet the following requirements:
1. Capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and
downhill, in order to produce a uniform application of paint and capable of following straight
lines and making normal curves in a true arc.
2. Capable of applying glass spheres to the surface of the completed line by an
automatic sphere dispenser attached to the pavement marking machine such that the glass
spheres are dispensed closely behind the installed line. Use a glass spheres dispenser equipped
with an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the paint and applies the
glass spheres in a manner such that the spheres appear uniform on the entire pavement markings
surface.
3. Capable of spraying the paint to the required thickness and width without
thinning of the paint. Equip the paint tank with nozzles equipped with cut-off valves, which will
apply broken or skip lines automatically.
710-4 Application.
710-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings, such that scars or traces of
removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings, by a method approved by the
Engineer.
Before applying pavement markings, remove any material that would adversely
affect the bond of the pavement markings by a method approved by the Engineer.
Apply standard paint to dry surfaces only, and when the ambient air and surface
temperature is at least 40ºF and rising.
Apply durable paint to dry surfaces only. Do not apply durable paint when the
ambient air and surface temperature is below 50°F, relative humidity is above 80% or when the
dew point is within 5°F of the ambient air temperature.
Do not apply painted pavement markings when winds are sufficient to cause spray
dust.
710-9 Submittals.
710-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the
Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of
quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed
items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.
710-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a
certification of quantities no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off
date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the
certification of quantities consists of the following:
1. Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and
the period that the certification represents.
2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments
previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a
detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.
711-1 Description.
Apply new thermoplastic pavement markings, or refurbish existing thermoplastic
pavement markings, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
711-2 Materials.
Use only materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) meeting the
following requirements.
Standard and Refurbishment Thermoplastic ..........................
..................................................................... 971-1 and 971-5
Preformed Thermoplastic............................ 971-1 and 971-6
Glass Spheres .............................................. 971-1 and 971-2
Use sand materials meeting the requirements of 971-5.4.
The Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the
Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.
711-3 Equipment.
Use equipment capable of providing continuous, uniform heating of the pavement
marking material to temperatures exceeding 390ºF, mixing and agitation of the material in the
reservoir to provide a homogeneous mixture without segregation. Use equipment that will
maintain the pavement marking material in a plastic state, in all mixing and conveying parts,
including the line dispensing device until applied. Use equipment which can produce varying
width lines and which meets the following requirements:
1. Capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and
downhill, to produce a uniform application of pavement marking material and capable of
following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc.
2. Capable of applying glass spheres to the surface of the completed pavement
marking by a double drop application for standard thermoplastic pavement markings and a single
drop application for recapping and refurbishment thermoplastic pavement markings. The bead
dispenser for the first bead drop shall be attached to the pavement marking machine in such a
manner that the beads are dispensed closely behind the installed line. The second bead dispenser
bead shall be attached to the pavement marking machine in such a manner that the beads are
dispensed immediately after the first bead drop application. Use glass spheres dispensers
equipped with an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the
thermoplastic material and applies the glass spheres uniformly on the entire pavement markings
surface with 50 to 60% embedment.
3. Equipped with a special kettle for uniformly heating and melting the pavement
marking material. The kettle must be equipped with an automatic temperature control device and
material thermometer for positive temperature control and to prevent overheating or scorching of
the thermoplastic material.
4. Meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, state, and
local authorities.
711-9 Submittals.
711-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the
Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of
quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed
items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.
711-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a
certification of quantities no later than Twelve O clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off
date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the
certification of quantities consists of the following:
1. Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and
the period that the certification represents.
2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments
previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a
detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.
713-1 Description.
Apply permanent tape pavement markings, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
713-2 Materials.
Use only materials listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL) meeting the
following requirements:
Permanent Tape .......................................... 971-1 and 971-7
The Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the
Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.
713-3 Equipment.
Use equipment that is mobile and maneuverable to the extent that straight lines can be
followed and normal curves can be made in a true arc.
Ensure the mechanical applicator is equipped with film cut-off device and a measuring
device that automatically and accumulatively measures the length of each line placed with an
accuracy tolerance of plus or minus 2 percent. Tape may be placed by hand on short sections,
500 feet or less if the tolerances in dimensions and in alignment specified in 710-5 are met.
713-4 Application.
713-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings, such that scars or traces of
removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings by a method approved by the
Engineer.
Before applying permanent tape, remove any material by a method approved by
the Engineer that would adversely affect the bond of the tape.
Apply a primer, sealer or surface preparation adhesive of the type recommended
by the manufacturer. Ensure the permanent tape adheres to the pavement surface.
Offset longitudinal lines at least 2 inches from construction joints on portland
cement concrete pavement.
Apply permanent tape to dry surfaces only, and when the ambient air and surface
temperature is at least 55ºF and rising.
Apply permanent tape to the same tolerances in dimensions and in alignment
specified in 710-5.
Apply permanent tape to the pavement by means approved by the Engineer.
Conduct field testing in accordance with FM 5-541.Take test readings
representative of the pavement marking performance. Remove and replace permanent tape not
meeting the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Department.
Apply all pavement markings prior to opening the road to traffic.
713-4.2 Thickness: Apply permanent tape pavement markings that have a thickness as
designated on the APL for the particular product used.
Measure, record and certify on a Department approved form and submit to the
Engineer, the thickness of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM 5-541.
713-4.3 Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow pavement markings that will attain an
initial retroreflectivity of not less than 450 mcd/lx·m2 for white markings and not less than
713-9 Submittals.
713-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the
Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of
quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed
items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.
713-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a
certification of quantities no later than Twelve O clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off
date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the
certification of quantities consists of the following:
1. Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and
the period that the certification represents.
2. The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments
previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a
detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.
715-1 Description.
Install a highway lighting system in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. Use
pole assemblies as shown in the Design Standards when standard aluminum pole assemblies or
standard high mast light assemblies are required by the Contract Documents. Include in the
system the light poles, bases, luminaires, ballasts, cable, conduit, protective devices, and control
devices; all as specified or required for the complete facility.
Obtain conventional light pole and high mast light pole assemblies from a fabrication
facility that is listed on the Department’s Production Facility Listing. Producers seeking
inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of Section 105.
Provide metal lighting poles, excluding high mast lighting, with internal vibration
damping devices in accordance with Design Standard 17515 in all installations on bridges, walls
and concrete median barriers.
715-8 Splicing.
Make all conductor splices in the bases of the light poles, or in pull boxes designed for
the purpose. Do not make underground splices unless specifically authorized by the Engineer,
and then only as directed by him.
Unless otherwise shown in the Design Standards or authorized by the Engineer, splices
shall be made with split bolt connectors. The connector shall be sealed in silicone gel that easily
peels away leaving a clean connection. The gel will be contained in a closure that when snapped
around the split bolt will provide a waterproof connection without the use of tools or taping. This
closure will be UV resistant, impact resistant and abrasion resistant.
715-9 Conduit.
Install conduit at the locations shown in the Plans and in accordance with Section 630.
715-11 Grounding.
Ground in accordance with the NEC, and local codes which exceed these Specifications.
Ground each metal light pole, not on a bridge structure, with an approved rod, 20 feet in
length and at least 5/8 inch in diameter.
For poles on bridge structures, bring the grounding conductors out to a pull box at each
end of the structure and connect them to driven ground rods, 20 feet in length and at least
5/8 inch in diameter.
The 20 feet length of rod may be either two rods 10 feet in length connected by a
threaded coupling and driven as a single rod or two rods 10 feet in length separated by at least
6 feet.
Make all bonds between ground wires and grounding electrode assemblies or arrays with
an exothermic bond with the following exception: do not exothermically bond grounding
electrode to grounding electrode connections.
The work specified in this Section will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as
incidental work.
Ground all high mast poles in accordance with the details for grounding in the Design
Standards, Index No. 17502.
715-12 Labeling.
Stencil labels on the cases of transformer and panel board with white oil paint, as
designated by the Engineer. Also, mark the correct circuit designations in accordance with the
wiring diagram on the terminal marking strips of each terminal block and on the card holder in
the panel board.
SECTION 901
COARSE AGGREGATE
901-1 General.
901-1.1 Composition: Coarse aggregate shall consist of naturally occurring materials
such as gravel, or resulting from the crushing of parent rock, to include natural rock, slags,
expanded clays and shales (lightweight aggregates) and other approved inert materials with
similar characteristics, having hard, strong, durable particles, conforming to the specific
requirements of this Section.
Coarse aggregate for use in pipe backfill under wet conditions, underdrain
aggregate, or concrete meeting the requirements of Section 347 may consist of reclaimed
portland cement concrete meeting the requirements of 901-5. Coarse aggregate for use in
bituminous mixtures may consist of reclaimed portland cement concrete meeting the
requirements of 901-5, except that the reclaimed concrete shall be from a concrete mix which
was produced and placed in accordance with applicable Department Specifications.
Materials substantially retained on the No. 4 sieve, shall be classified as coarse
aggregate.
Approval of mineral aggregate sources shall be in accordance with 6-2.3.
901-1.2 Deleterious Substances: All coarse aggregates shall be reasonably free of clay
lumps, soft and friable particles, salt, alkali, organic matter, adherent coatings, and other
substances not defined which may possess undesirable characteristics. The weight of deleterious
substances shall not exceed the following percentages:
Coal and lignite (AASHTO T 113).................................1.00
Soft and friable particles (AASHTO T 112)* .................2.00
Clay lumps (AASHTO T 112)* ......................................2.00
Plant root matter (visual inspection in
AASHTO T 27)****.....................................................0.005
Wood and wood matter (visual inspection in
AASHTO T 27)****.....................................................0.005
Cinders and clinkers........................................................0.50
Free shell** .....................................................................1.00
Total Material passing the No. 200 sieve (FM 1-T 011)
At Source with Los Angeles Abrasion less than or equal
to 30 ................................................................................2.50
At Source with Los Angeles Abrasion greater than
30.....................................................................................1.75
At Point of Use................................................................3.75
Fine-Grained Organic Matter (AASHTO 194) ...............0.03
Chert (less than 2.40 specific gravity SSD)
(AASHTO T-113)*** .....................................................3.00
TABLE 1
Standard Sizes of Coarse Aggregate
Amounts Finer than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Openings), weight percent
Size Nominal Size 3 1/2 2 1/2 1 1/2
4 inches 3 inches 2 inches 1 inch
No. Square Openings inches inches inches
TABLE 1 (Continued)
Standard Sizes of Coarse Aggregate
Amounts Finer than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Openings), weight percent
Nominal Size
Size
Square 3/4 inch 1/2 inch 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50
No.
Openings
3 1/2 inches to 1
1 0 to 5
1/2 inches
2 1/2 inches to 1
2 0 to 5
1/2 inches
The gradations in Table 1 represent the extreme limits for the various sizes
indicated which will be used in determining the suitability for use of coarse aggregate from all
sources of supply. For any grade from any one source, the gradation shall be held reasonably
uniform and not subject to the extreme percentages of gradation specified above.
902-1 General.
902-1.1 Composition: Fine aggregate shall consist of natural silica sand, screenings,
local materials, or subject to approval, other inert materials with similar characteristics, or
combination thereof, having hard, strong, durable particles, conforming to the specific
requirements of this Section.
Approval of construction aggregate sources shall be in accordance with 6-3.
902-1.2 Deleterious Substances: All fine aggregate shall be reasonably free of lumps of
clay, soft or flaky particles, salt, alkali, organic matter, loam or other extraneous substances. The
weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following percentages:
Shale..................................................................................1.0
Coal and lignite .................................................................1.0
Cinders and clinkers..........................................................0.5
Clay Lumps .......................................................................1.0
Silica sand from any one source, having a variation in Fineness Modulus greater
than 0.20 either way from the Fineness Modulus of target gradations established by the producer,
may be rejected.
902-2.2 Organic Impurities: Silica sand shall be subject to the colorimetric test for
organic impurities. If the color produced is darker than the standard solution, the aggregate shall
be rejected unless it can be shown by appropriate tests that the impurities causing the color are
not of a type that would be detrimental to portland cement concrete. Such tests shall be in
accordance with AASHTO T21 and AASHTO T71. When tested for the effect of organic
impurities on strength of mortar, the strength ratio at seven and 28 days, calculated in accordance
with Section 11 of AASHTO T71, shall not be less than 95%.
902-5 Screenings.
902-5.1 Composition: Screenings shall be composed of hard, durable particles, either
naturally occurring, such as gravel screenings, or resulting from the crushing or processing of the
parent rock, to include natural rock, slags, expanded clays or shales (lightweight aggregates), or
other approved inert materials with similar characteristics.
Aggregates classified as screening shall conform to the following gradation
requirements:
In addition to meeting the requirements of 902-1.2, the material shall not contain
excessive quantities of other deleterious substances, such as roots, cans, debris, etc. If clay size
material is present, it shall not exceed 7%, as determined by AASHTO T88, and it shall be of a
type which will not produce clay balls when used. The aggregate must be suitable for designated
use, as determined by laboratory tests. If the deposit consists of stratified layers of varying
characteristics and gradation, the producer shall employ such means as necessary to secure a
uniform material.
SECTION 911
BASE AND STABILIZED BASE MATERIALS
911-1 Description.
This Section governs materials to be used in the construction of base and subgrade
stabilization including limerock, shell, shell-rock, cemented coquina shell, and recycled concrete
aggregate (RCA).
911-2 Materials.
911-2.1 General:
911-2.1.1 Approval of Material: Approval of mineral aggregate sources shall be
in accordance with 6-2.3.
911-2.1.2 Deleterious Substances: Materials shall not contain deleterious
substances that would result in: prevention of the bituminous prime coat from adhering to the
base course; a detriment to the finishing, strength, or performance of the base; or a surface which
is susceptible to distortion under construction traffic. Such substances include, but are not
limited to: cherty or other extremely hard pieces, lumps, balls or pockets of sand or clay size
material, organic matter, loose sand, loose, free shells, corals or skeletal remain of other marine
invertebrates retained on the No. 4 sieve, or water sensitive clay minerals.
911-2.3 Limerock Composition: Limerock material shall consist of unconsolidated or
partly consolidated limestone of marine origin.
911-2.4 Shell Material: Composition: Shell materials shall consist of naturally
occurring deposits formed essentially of broken mollusk shell, corals and the skeletal remains of
other marine invertebrates. Live or steamed shell, or man-made deposits as a by-product of the
shellfish industry will not be permitted.
911-2.4.1 Bank Run Shell: Shell materials meeting the requirements of this
Section which are presently found as “dry land” deposits.
911-2.4.2 Dredged Shell: Shell materials meeting the requirements of this
Section which are dredged from ocean, bay or lake deposits.
911-2.5 Shell-Rock Material Composition: Shell-rock materials shall consist of
naturally occurring heterogeneous deposits of limestone with interbedded layers or lenses of
loose and cemented shell, to include cemented sands (calcitic sandstone). This material shall be
mined and processed in a manner that will result in a reasonably homogenous finished product.
911-2.6 Cemented Coquina Shell Material Composition: Cemented coquina shell
materials to be used as cemented coquina base or stabilized base, shall be defined as naturally
occurring deposits formed essentially of broken mollusk shell, corals and the skeletal remains of
other marine invertebrates, which are presently found as “dry land” deposits and which have
been cemented together by carbonates or other natural cementing agents.
911-2.7 Recycled Concrete Aggregate (RCA) Composition: RCA shall consist of
concrete material derived from the crushing of hard portland cement concrete. In addition to the
deleterious materials noted in 911-2.2, RCA shall be asbestos free. The following limits shall not
be exceeded:
Table 911-1
Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR)
Material Requirement
Limerock
Shell Average Results per LOT - 100, minimum
Shell-Rock Individual Results - 90, minimum
Cemented Coquina Shell
RCA Average Results per LOT - 150, minimum
911-3.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity: Materials shall meet the requirements in
Table 911-2 in accordance with AASHTO T89 and AASHTO T90:
Table 911-2
Liquid Limit and Plastic Properties
Material Liquid Limit Plastic Properties
Base Non-Plastic (NP)
Limerock Not to exceed 35
Stabilized Base Plasticity not to exceed 10
Shell
- NP
Shell-Rock
Cemented Coquina Shell - NP
RCA - NP
911-3.3 Carbonates: Materials shall meet the carbonate requirements in Table 911-3 in
accordance with FM 5-514:
Table 911-3
Percentage of Carbonates (Calcium and Magnesium)
Material Requirement
Limerock minimum - 70%
Shell minimum - 50%
Shell-Rock minimum - 50%
Cemented Coquina Shell minimum - 50%
RCA Not Applicable
Table 911-4(1)
Gradation Requirements
Material Requirement
Base At least 97% shall pass a 3-1/2 inch sieve(2)
Limerock
Stabilized Base At least 97% shall pass a 1-1/2 inch sieve(2)
Passing 3-1/2 inch sieve - 97%
Dredged shell Passing No. 4 sieve - 50%, maximum
Passing No. 200 sieve - maximum 7.5% (washed)
Shell
Passing 3-1/2 inch sieve - 97%
Bank-run shell Passing No. 4 sieve - 80%, maximum
Passing No. 200 sieve - 20%, maximum (washed)
Shell-Rock Passing 3-1/2 inch sieve - 97%, minimum
Passing No. 4 sieve - 70%, maximum
Cemented Coquina Shell Passing No. 200 sieve - 20%, maximum (washed)
Sieve Size Percent by Weight Passing
2 inch 100
3/4 inch 65 to 95
3/8 inch 40 to 85
RCA
No. 4 25 to 65
No. 10 20 to 50
No. 50 5 to 30
No. 200 0 to 10
(1) The maximum dimension shall not exceed six inches.
(2) The material shall be well graded down to dust. The fine material shall consist entirely of dust of fracture.
914-1 General.
This Section governs materials to be used in subgrade stabilization. Meet the following
requirements:
FFCPs may be used provided they meet the requirements of 403.7047, F.S., are
not used outside the paved area and are not less than 3 feet above the design high groundwater
table. All materials for stabilizing must meet all applicable air or water quality standards or
criteria in Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) rules.
916-1 General.
All products supplied under this Specification shall be one of the products included on
the Approved Product List (APL). Producers seeking evaluation of a product for inclusion on the
APL shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6.
For liquid anti-strip agents, in addition to the above, producers shall include a report of
test results from an independent laboratory confirming the material meets the requirements of
this section. In lieu of submitting test results from an independent laboratory, the Department
will evaluate the material. For each liquid anti-strip agent, the producer will submit one pint of a
representative sample of liquid anti-strip agent to the State Materials Office when submitting the
APL application to the Department’s Product Evaluation Section.
Any marked variation from the original test values for a material below the established
limits or evidence of inadequate quality control or field performance of a material will be
considered sufficient evidence that the properties of the material have changed, and the material
will be removed from the APL.
917-1 Composition.
Mineral filler shall consist, in general, of limerock dust, portland cement, slag dust,
hydrated lime, or any other inert mineral matter from sources approved by, the Engineer. The
mineral filler shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps consisting of aggregations of fine
particles. Ground phosphate will not be allowed as a mineral filler.
Stone or slag screenings may also be used as filler material for asphalt concrete mixtures,
under the provisions specified in 917-3, below.
917-2 Gradation.
The mineral filler shall meet the following gradation requirements:
Total passing No. 30 sieve ........................................... 100%
Total passing No. 80 sieve .......................... 95% (minimum)
Total passing No. 200 sieve ........................ 65% (minimum)
919-1 Description.
This Section governs ground tire rubber for use in asphalt rubber binders for use in a
variety of paving applications.
SECTION 921
PORTLAND CEMENT AND BLENDED CEMENT
921-1 General.
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M85 or AASHTO M240, as
applicable, except as defined below or as specifically restricted in Section 346.
921-1.1 Type of Cement: Cement may be Types I, II, II (MH), III, IV, V
(AASHTO M85), or IP, IP (MS), IS (AASHTO M240). Different brands of cement, cement of
the same brand from different facilities, or different types of cement shall be stored separately
and shall not be mixed.
921-1.2 Alkali Content: Portland cement containing a maximum of 0.60% alkali,
or less, calculated as Na2O (% Na2O plus 0.658% K2O), may be used with no further testing.
High Alkali Cement containing a maximum of 1.00% alkali, or less, calculated as Na2O (%
Na2O plus 0.658% K2O), may be used with the following. When high alkali cement is used in
concrete, the test results shall verify improved or comparable strength, sulfate resistance,
corrosion protective properties and other durability requirements of concrete, as compared to
AASHTO M85 low alkali cement. The strength and durability tests of concrete shall be
performed in accordance with ASTM C39, ASTM C157, FM 3-C1012, FM 5-516 and FM 5-
578.
921-1.3 Heat of Hydration: The cement heat of hydration for Type II (MH) shall
be 88 cal/g or less at 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C186. For Type II (MH)
used in mass concrete, the cement heat of hydration shall be 80 cal/g or less at 7 days when
tested in accordance with ASTM C186.
921-2 Terminology.
The following definitions are applicable to the production and quality control of cement:
Approved Laboratory - indicates a laboratory acceptable to the State Materials
Office that is currently inspected by the Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL), is
actively participating in their proficiency program and which has all deficiencies noted at the
time of inspection corrected. The laboratory must also authorize CCRL to send copies of final
inspection reports to the State Materials Office.
Approved Source - indicates a cement supplier, including but not limited to a
plant, a terminal, or a transfer facility, that has been qualified by the State Materials Office. A
list of Approved Cement Sources will be maintained by the State Materials Office.
Mill Test Report - indicates a certification from the cement supplier identifying
that the cement meets Section 921, the Type, the production period the sample represents and the
chemical and physical analyses of the cement, and the silo numbers where the cement is stored.
The mill test report must identify that there is limestone in the cement, if limestone is included.
An acceptable mill test report is found in the appendix of AASHTO M85.
Purchaser - The term “purchaser” in the AASHTO Specifications shall be taken
as the Department.
921-4 Rejection.
The entire contents of the sack or bulk container which contains cement that does not
meet the requirements of this Specification or has been damaged, is partially set, lumpy or caked
shall be rejected.
Bagged cement which varies more than 5% from the designated weight, or if the average
weight of 50 sacks, taken at random, is less than the designated weight, the cement shall be
rejected.
Table 1
Chemical Test Test Method Maximum (%)
923-3.3 Open Bodies of Water and Well Water: Open bodies of water and well water
shall be tested before use and shall not exceed the limits of Table 2:
Table 2
Chemical Test Test Method Maximum (%)
Acidity or Alkalinity Calculated in terms of Calcium AASHTO T 26
Carbonate 0.05
Total Organic Solids AASHTO T 26 0.05
Total Inorganic Solids AASHTO T 26 0.08
Total Chlorides as Cl- ASTM D 512 0.05
Total Sulfates as SO42- ASTM D 516 0.30
924-1 General.
This Section covers materials for use as admixtures for concrete. The use of admixtures is
restricted to those admixtures as may be allowed or required elsewhere in the specifications for
specific concrete applications. Admixtures shall comply with applicable AASHTO and ASTM
specifications as modified in 924-2.3 through 924-2.7. Admixtures that have been previously
qualified for Department use are listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
924-4 Retesting.
The approved admixtures are required to be tested for their uniformity and equivalence
whenever there is an indication of erratic results. The tests shall be performed in accordance with
the following procedure. The admixture shall be checked for comparison between infrared
spectrophotometry, pH value, specific gravity, and solids content. Any marked variation from
the original curve, pH value, specific gravity, or solids content will be considered sufficient
evidence that the chemistry of the original material has been changed and, therefore, the use of
this material will be rejected and the material will be removed from the APL.
925-1 Burlap.
Burlap for curing concrete shall consist either of two layers, each weighing 10 to
18 ounces/10 square feet, or of four layers, each weighing 6 to 7 ounces/10 square feet. Burlap
which has been used as a container for sugar shall not be used. Burlap that is being used for the
first time shall be thoroughly washed in order to remove starches used in sizing the material.
Burlap shall be furnished in strips of at least 3 feet wide and shall be at least 3 feet longer than
the width of surface to be covered.
925-4 Certification.
For burlap or white burlap-polyethylene, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a
certification conforming to the requirements of Section 6 from the manufacturer confirming that
the requirements of this Section are met. Each certification shall cover only one type of burlap or
white burlap-polyethylene sheeting.
Type Description
A* An epoxy resin, for bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.
B* An epoxy resin adhesive, for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete and
constructing doweled splices in precast prestressed concrete piles.
E* A fluid epoxy for crack injection in the repair of old structures.
F An epoxy for repairing spalled areas on concrete bridge structures with these subtypes:
F-1* A non sagging gel type for vertical surfaces.
F-2** A pourable type for repairs where forms are to be used.
H** An epoxy for structural bonding where asphalt overlays are to be in contact with the
hardened compound.
K* An epoxy for underwater sealing of the bottom of the jacket of an integral pile jacket
system.
M*** A coal tar epoxy coating for steel sheet piles and H piles (water immersion) and hot
applied coal tar epoxy tape.
Q* An epoxy for use in post tensioning anchorage protection systems.
*Accepted by APL
**Accepted by certified test report
***Accepted by certification
Viscosity five minutes after mixing 300 to 600 cps at 77F by ASTM D 2393
Wet bond strength to concrete, minimum 250 psi at seven days by FM 5-518
Type F-2 products will be accepted on the job. Furnish to the Engineer testing
from the manufacturer of the product for each LOT of material to be incorporated in the project.
The test results will indicate that the material is in conformance with the Specifications, and will
include actual values from the required tests. Obtain approval from the Engineer before
incorporating material into the project.
The epoxy shall be capable of flowing through water in the void area of the jacket and
hardening under water so as to provide a water tight seal of the depth indicated in the Plans or
approved shop drawings and to maintain this seal during subsequent construction steps.
926-11 Storage.
Epoxy materials, which have been in storage for more than twelve months, will not be
accepted for use.
926-12 Fillers.
Fillers for mixing mortars and grouts may be as recommended by the manufacturer of the
particular epoxy compound and may be supplied as packages accompanying the epoxy or
premixed in accordance with approved properties.
If a manufacturer recommends only the gradation of filler, it must be a silica sand
commercially available in Florida and shall be a gradation listed in Table I or a specified blend
of these gradations.
The silica sands specified in Table I shall be clean, kiln dried, packaged in strong
moisture proof bags, contain no more than 0.2% organic trash, and be chloride free.
Fillers shall not be used with these compounds: Types E and M.
When the fillers specified in Table I are used, the maximum amount shall be
2.25 volumes to one volume of mixed compound.
929-4 Metakaolin.
929-4.1General: Metakaolin shall meet the requirements of ASTM C618 Class N with
the following modifications:
1. The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 shall be at least 85%.
2. The loss on ignition shall be less than 3.0%.
3. The available alkali’s, as equivalent Na2O, shall not exceed 1.0%.
4. The amount of material retained on a No. 325 mesh sieve shall not exceed
1.0%.
5. The strength activity Index, at 7 days, shall be at least 85%.
6. When metakaolin is used in concrete, the test results shall verify improved or
comparable strength, sulfate resistance, corrosion protective properties and other durability
performance properties of concrete, as compared to the performance of silica fume concrete. The
comparison strength and durability tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C39,
ASTM C157, FM C1012, FM 5-516 and FM 5-578, by an independently approved testing
laboratory. Sampling and testing of metakaolin shall follow the requirements of ASTM C311.
929-4.2 Acceptance Testing of Metakaolin: Acceptance of metakaolin from sources
operating under an approved QC Plan shall be based on the monthly certified test report meeting
the chemical and physical requirements of ASTM C618 Class N, as modified herein. An
approved laboratory shall perform the monthly QC tests and a copy of their certified test reports
929-5 Slag.
929-5.1 General: Slag shall meet the requirements of ASTM C989. Sampling and testing
procedures shall follow the requirements of ASTM C989.
929-5.2 Special Requirements: Only ground granulated blast-furnace slag Grade 100
and 120 will be permitted.
929-5.3 Exceptions: Slag shall not be used in conjunction with Type IP or Type IS
cements.
929-5.4 Acceptance Testing: Acceptance of slag from sources operating under an
approved QC Plan shall be based on the monthly certified QC tests meeting the chemical and
physical requirements of ASTM C989. An approved laboratory shall perform the monthly QC
tests and a copy of their mill certificates shall be sent to the State Materials Office when the
material is in use on Department projects. Reference cement used for determination of slag
activity shall meet the requirements of ASTM C989. The certification shall indicate that the slag
meets the requirements of this Specification. Also, the corresponding samples along with mill
certificates shall be submitted to the Department, upon request.
930-1 Description.
This Section covers cementitious materials used to repair concrete including defects or
purposely placed openings in concrete elements. Materials containing organic compounds, such
as bitumens and epoxy resin as the principal binder are not included. The requirements for epoxy
resin materials are covered in Section 926. Any depth larger than the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the specific material shall be repaired with portland cement concrete
meeting the requirements of Section 346.
Minimum Flexural Strength (at 7 days), psi ASTM C580 700 700
Minimum Tensile Strength (at 7 days), psi ASTM C307 200 200
930-7.4 Constructability: Furnish to the Engineer for approval shop drawing as may be
required to complete repairs in compliance with the design shown in the Plans and the
manufacturer’s recommended repair system.
SECTION 931
METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
PAVEMENT AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Parameter Limits
At least 20°F lower than the safe heating temperature as stated
Pour Point
by the manufacturer.
Cone-Penetration, Non-
Less than or equal to 90 mm
immersed at 77°F, 150 g, 5 s
Parameters Limits
At least 20° lower than the safe heating temperature as stated by the
Pour Point
manufacturer.
Cone-Penetration, Non-
Less than or equal to 90 mm
immersed at 77°F, 150 g, 5 s
Flow at 140°F, 5 h Less than or equal to 3.0 mm
No cracking, separation, or opening that at any point is over
Bond, Non-immersed, -20°F
1/4 inch deep, in the sealant or between the sealant and the
for 3 cycles, 50% extension*
substrate.
Resilience at 77°F Recovery greater than or equal to 60%
No failure in adhesion, formation of an oily exudates at the
Asphaltic Concrete interface between the sealant and the asphaltic concrete, or
Compatibility at 140°F softening or other deleterious effects on the asphaltic concrete or
sealant.
*The depth of a crack, separation or opening shall be measured perpendicular to the side of the sealant showing the defect. At
least two test samples in a group of three representing a given sample of sealant shall meet this requirement.
932-1.2.3 Approved Product List (APL): The joint sealant materials used shall
be one of the products listed on the Department’s APL. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of
their products shall submit product datasheets, performance test reports from an independent
laboratory showing the product meets the requirements of this section, and a APL application in
accordance with Section 6. Information on the APL application must identify the sealant type.
932-1.2.4 Shipment: The material shall be delivered in containers plainly marked
with the manufacturer’s name or trademark product name, LOT number and date of expiration.
932-1.2.5 Bond Breaker Rod: The bond breaker rod shall be a closed cell,
expanded polyethylene foam rod of the size and dimensions shown in the Plans. It shall be
compatible with the joint sealant and no bond or reaction shall occur between the rod and the
sealant.
All bond breaker rods installed shall be covered by a sealant at the end of
each work day.
Bond breaker tape approved by the sealant manufacturer may be used in
lieu of bond breaker rod when sealing random cracks.
932-1.3 Low Modulus Silicone Sealant Materials:
932-1.3.1 Low Modulus Silicone Sealants: Silicone sealant shall be furnished in
a one part or pre-measured two part formulation meeting the requirements specified herein.
Silicone
Sealant Test Method Type A Type B Type C Type D
Type
Flow ASTM D5893 No Flow
Slump
ASTM D2202 0.3 inches
(maximum)
Extrusion
ASTM C1183,
rate 20 ml/min 20 ml/min 20 ml/min 20 ml/min
Procedure A
(minimum)
Tack-free
time at 77 ±
3ºF and 45 90 minutes 180 minutes, 180 minutes, 20 – 60
ASTM C679
to 55% maximum maximum maximum minutes
Relative
Humidity
Specific ASTM D792,
1.1 to 1.515 1.10 to 1.40 1.1 to 1.5 1.26 to 1.34
gravity Method A
Durometer
hardness, ASTM D2240 10-25
Shore A
932-1.4.3 Approved Product List: The pre-cured silicone sealant used shall be
one of the products listed on the APL. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product shall
submit an application in accordance with Section 6. Applications must include test results, an
infrared identification curve (2.5 to 15 µm), and a product data sheet with the recommended
adhesive and installation requirements.
932-1.5 Compression Seals and Adhesive Lubricant
932-1.5.1 Preformed Elastomeric Compression Seals: Preformed Elastomeric
Compression Seals shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2628 except that immersion oil
IRM 903 may be substituted for Oil No. 3 in the Oil Swell test procedure.
932-1.5.2 Compression Seal Adhesive Lubricant: Compression seal adhesive
lubricant shall meet the requirements of ASTM D4070. The material shall be fluid from 5°F to
120°F (-15°C to 49°C).
932-1.5.3 Certification: The manufacturer shall provide a certified test report for
each lot of material furnished to each project along with a statement certifying that the material
conforms to this specification and identifying the project number and manufacturer’s lot number.
932-1.5.4 Verification Samples: Provide verification samples in accordance with
Section 6.
934-1 Scope.
This Section covers only prepackaged non-shrink cementitious grout for structural
use.
934-4 Requirements.
When tested as provided in 934-3, the grout shall meet the following
requirements:
934-6 Rejection.
Materials shall be rejected at the point of use if the materials are caked, lumpy, or
show any signs of deterioration. Materials shall be rejected if the grout does not achieve
the design fluidity or consistency when mixed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All broken or open packages shall be rejected.
934-7 Packaging.
Cementitious materials for grouts must be packaged in suitable moisture resistant
containers and clearly labeled. Where applicable, manufacturers recommendations,
limitations and cautions shall be clearly visible on each label.
937-1 General.
Post-installed anchor systems intended for structural applications in concrete elements
consist of adhesive-bonded anchor systems.
937-3 Certification.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certification from the manufacturer of the
anchor system, confirming that the requirements of this Section are met. The certification shall
conform to the requirements of Section 6. Each certification shall cover only one LOT of
anchoring materials.
938-1 Description.
This Section covers filler materials used to fill voided areas within ducts to protect post-
tensioning steel. Grout applications are differentiated into three applications: horizontal, vertical
and repair.
938-4 Grout.
938-4.1 Mixing: The material shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
938-4.2 Grout Physical Properties:
938-4.2.1 Gas Generation: The grout shall not contain aluminum or other
components which produce hydrogen, carbon dioxide or oxygen gas.
938-4.2.2 Laboratory Testing: The grout shall meet or exceed the specified
physical properties stated herein as determined by the following standard and modified ASTM
and FM test methods conducted at normal laboratory temperature (65°F-90°F) and conditions.
Use the midrange of the water content indicated in the manufacturer’s technical data sheet to
produce the time of efflux shown in Table 938-1.
Table 938-1
938-4.3 Accelerated Corrosion Test Method (ACTM): Perform the ACTM as outlined
in Appendix B of the Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioning Structures published by the
Post-Tensioning Institute. Report the time to corrosion for both the grout being tested and the
control sample using a 0.45 water-cement ratio neat grout.
A grout that shows a longer average time to corrosion in the ACTM than the
control sample and the time to corrosion exceed 1,000 hours is considered satisfactory.
938-4.4 Variation in Testing for Specific Applications.
Table 938-2
Property Test Value Test Method
Salt Fog – 168 hours@35°C No corrosion ASTM B117*
Corrosive Constituent Concentration
ASTM D512 &
Chlorides, Sulfides, and Nitrates ≤ 50 ppm (total) ASTM D3867**
**Prepare sample in accordance with NF M07-023, sections 6a through 6c or equivalent. Other analytical methods are acceptable
as long as equivalency to the above methods has been established by the Department.
SECTION 942
PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE GASKETS
942-2 Cold Adhesive Preformed Plastic Gaskets (For Sealing Elliptical Concrete Pipe
Joints).
942-2.1 General: Cold adhesive preformed plastic gaskets shall be of a material, shape
and size so as to effect a permanent water tight seal in joints of elliptical concrete pipe. A
minimum of two pieces of gasket material shall be used in each joint.
The gasket material shall be protected by a 2-piece removable wrapper. To
facilitate application, the 2-piece wrapper shall be so designed that one-half may be removed
longitudinally without disturbing the other half.
The size of the gasket shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the particular joint in which it is to be used. However, the minimum size for
each of the gaskets used in a joint shall be in accordance with the following:
The above minimum size requirements are based on a joint designed with a
maximum taper of 10 degrees and an in-place annular space of approximately 1/4 inch.
942-2.2 Composition: The gasket sealing the joints shall be produced from blends of
refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler. The
material shall contain no solvents and shall not produce irritating fumes or obnoxious odors. The
gasket shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporation or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive
strength.
The chemical composition of the gasket material shall meet the following
requirements:
Minimum Maximum
Bitumen (petroleum plastic content) (% by weight) 50 70
Ash-Inert Mineral Matter (% by weight) 30 50
The gasket joint sealing compound when immersed for 30 days at ambient room
temperature separately in 5% solution of caustic potash, a mixture of 5% hydrochloric acid, a 5%
solution of sulfuric acid, and a saturated hydrogen sulfide solution shall show no visible
deterioration.
The physical properties of the gasket joint sealing compound as shipped shall
meet the following requirements:
Minimum Maximum
Specific Gravity @ 77ºF 1.2 1.35
Ductility @ 77ºF 50 mm
Softening Point @ 77ºF 320ºF
Penetration (0.1 mm) 77ºF @ (150 gms)
50 120
five seconds
942-2.3 Certification: The manufacturer of the gasket material shall furnish the Engineer
certified test results covering each shipment of material to each project.
TABLE I
THICKNESS OF METAL FOR SIDEDRAIN PIPE
Nominal Diameter Metal Sheet Mean Thickness Metal
(Inches) Gauge No. (Inches)
6 18 0.0516
8 16 0.0635
10 16 0.0635
12 16 0.0635
15 16 0.0635
18 16 0.0635
21 16 0.0635
24 16 0.0635
30 14 0.0785
36 14 0.0785
42 12 0.1084
48 12 0.1084
TABLE II
PERMISSIBLE VARIATION IN THICKNESS
OF METAL FOR PIPE AND CONNECTING BANDS
Mean Thickness of Metal
Metal Sheet Gauge No Permissible Variation (Inches)
(Inches)
18 0.0516 0.007
16 0.0635 0.007
14 0.0785 0.008
12 0.1084 0.009
10 0.1382 0.009
8 0.1681 0.009
944-1 Description.
This Section covers the materials for corrugated galvanized steel structural plate pipe and
pipe arch, including the necessary bolts and nuts for connecting plates and for assembling the
pipe or pipe arch at the point of destination when so specified. The sizes of the pipe or pipe arch
shall be as shown in the Plans.
944-2 Materials.
Structural plate pipe and pipe arch shall be of galvanized steel, complying with the
requirements of AASHTO M167, with the additional requirement that the minimum thickness of
the plates shall be as shown in the Plans.
944-7 Fabrication.
The fabrication of the pipe and pipe arch shall comply with the applicable requirements
of Section 23, of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications. Unless otherwise
specified, the pipe and pipe arch shall be of full section for the entire length.
944-8 Assembly.
When purchase contracts stipulate that the pipe be assembled, the dealer shall furnish the
pipe and pipe arch completely assembled at the point of destination, or at the site, as specified,
and in lengths as specified.
NON SI UNITS
TABLE I THICKNESS OF METAL FOR SIDEDRAIN PIPE
Nominal Diameter or Mean Thickness of Metal
Sheet Gauge No.
Equivalent (inches) (inches)
6 18 0.048
8 16 0.060
10 16 0.060
12 16 0.060
15 16 0.060
18 16 0.060
21 16 0.060
24 16 0.060
30 14 0.075
36 14 0.075
42 12 0.105
48 12 0.105
54 12 0.105
Where bituminous coated aluminum pipe is specified the bituminous coating shall meet
the requirements as specified for corrugated steel pipe in 943-5. Bituminous coated and paved
aluminum pipe shall meet the additional requirements specified in 943-6 and 943-7, as
applicable.
Class IV pipe shall not be used.
945-2 Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch and Arches.
945-2.1 General Requirements: Aluminum alloy structural plate pipe, pipe arch, and
arches shall conform to AASHTO M219, with the exceptions and additions specified herein. The
nominal thickness of the plate shall be as shown in the Plans.
945-2.2 Bolts and Nuts: In lieu of shaped bolts and nuts, standard type bolts and nuts,
with special shaped washers, may be used. For aluminum bolts and nuts the material shall
conform to the chemical requirements shown in Table I of ASTM B211, for Alloy 6061. Nuts
shall be lubricated at the factory, with a suitable wax compound. The bolts may be sampled and
tested before erection or may be accepted on the basis of the manufacturer’s certification.
For steel bolts and nuts, the material shall meet the requirements of either
ASTM A307 or ASTM A325, as appropriate, and shall be hot double-dipped galvanized.
Aluminized steel bolts, or other equally suitable devices for connecting the plates, may be used if
approved by the Engineer.
945-2.3 Certification of Tests: Submit to the Engineer, prior to installation, a certified
mill analysis and certification verifying that the aluminum parts and components are of the alloys
specified and comply with the requirements of this Section.
945-2.4 Direct Purchases by the Department: The provisions of 944-9 shall also apply
to Departmental purchases of aluminum alloy structural plate pipe, pipe arches and arches.
945-2.5 Pipe Markings: In lieu of the coined markings required by AASHTO M196,
Section 14, information may be ink stamped on the pipe at the time of manufacture. A QC label
with the pipe fabricator’s identity, the date of corrugating or forming into pipe, and the date of
final QC inspection shall be applied to the inside walls of pipe using indelible ink. The pipe
markings must be clearly legible upon arrival at the jobsite and at the time of installation. Pipe
with illegible or incomplete markings may be rejected.
Table 948-1
Stress Crack Resistance of Pipes
Pipe Location Test Method Test Conditions Requirement
Average failure time of the
10% Igepal solution at 122°F
FM 5-572, pipe liner shall be
Pipe Liner and 600 psi applied stress,
Procedure A ≥18.0 hours, no single value
5 replicates
shall be less than 13.0 hours.
Average failure time shall
Pipe 10% Igepal solution at 122°F
be ≥24.0 hours, no single
Corrugation(1), ASTM F2136 and 600 psi applied stress,
value shall be less than
(molded plaque) 5 replicates
17.0 hours.
Table 948-2
Stress Crack Resistance
Pipe Location Test Method Test Conditions Requirement
Average failure time of the
10% Igepal solution at 50°C
FM 5-572, pipe liner shall be
Pipe Liner and 600 psi applied stress,
Procedure A ≥100 hours, no single value
5 replicates
shall be less than 71 hours.(1)
Oxidation Resistance
Pipe Location Test Method Test Conditions Requirement
2 replicates (to determine
Pipe Liner OIT Test initial OIT value) on the as
25.0 minutes, minimum
and/or Crown(2) (ASTM D3895) manufactured (not incubated)
pipe.
Incubation test Three samples for incubation Average of 3.0 minutes(4)
Pipe Liner
FM 5-574 and OIT of 264 days at 85°C(3). One (no values shall be less than
and/or Crown(2)
test (ASTM D3895) OIT test per each sample 2.0 minutes)
The knitted fabric sock shall be applied to the tubing in the shop so as to maintain a
uniform applied weight. The tubing with knitted fabric sock shall be delivered to the job site in
such manner as to facilitate handling and incorporation into the work without damage. The
knitted fabric sock shall be stored in UV resistant bags until just prior to installation. Torn or
punctured knitted fabric sock shall not be used.
949-6 Acceptance.
Provide the Engineer a certification from the manufacturer stating that the bricks,
concrete masonry units, precast grade adjustment rings or composite rubber adjustments rings
meet the requirements of this Section. Acceptance of materials will be in accordance with
Section 6.
SECTION 951
INSPECTION OF TIMBER PRODUCTS
951-3 Certification.
Each order/shipment to the job site must be accompanied with a notarized certification
indicating compliance to the appropriate specifications. The certification shall include: the
project/order number, charge numbers, and assay retention results. The producer/treater shall
maintain all pertinent documents for a period of three years. Each timber product must also have
a preapproved producer/treater identification mark on every item delivered to the job site.
952-2.2 Permissible Knot Sizes for Fender Wales: For timber used as fender wales, the
maximum permissible size of knot (at any point on any face) shall be as follows:
For nominal width of face of 10 - 3-3/4 inches.
For nominal width of face of 12 - 4-1/2 inches.
953-1 General.
Piles shall be of timber which will stand the driving for which they are intended. They
shall be sound and solid. Piling cut from southern pine shall contain at least 30% of summer
wood.
Cypress piles used for purposes other than as foundation piling shall have, at the butt, a
diameter of red or black heart of at least 12 inches.
Douglas fir used for timber piling shall be Pacific Coast Douglas Fir.
Piles shall be cut above the ground swell, shall have a form taper, and shall not vary more
than plus or minus 6 inches from the specified length.
Specific requirements for timber sheet piles are contained in 953-6.
954-4 Peeling.
All posts shall be peeled for their full length, and all inner and outer bark removed,
except that isolated strips of inner bark which do not exceed 1/2 inch in width or 3 inches in
length will be permitted.
954-5 Straightness.
The straightness of the post shall be such that for any 8 foot post (or for any 8 feet of
length, for longer posts) a straight line from the center of the tip to the center of the butt (or from
center of the cross sections at the extremes of the 8 foot lengths) shall not fall outside the center
of the mid-section of the 8 foot length by more than 2 inches.
954-6 Dimensions.
954-6.1 Minimum Lengths Allowable:
Line posts - 8 feet.
Corner and pull posts - 8 feet, 6 inches.
Braces - As required by the Plans.
(A tolerance of minus 1 inch to plus 2 inches will be allowed in the lengths shown
for the posts.)
954-6.2 Minimum Allowable Cross Section:
955-1 General.
The work specified in this Section is the treating of structural timber, timber piling and
timber posts. The method of treatment for all such timber materials shall be in accordance with
AASHTO M 133, or American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) Use Category Standard
(USC) - U1, with the exceptions and additions as specified herein.
955-2 Preservative.
955-2.1 Salt or Brackish Water Use: The treating of Southern Yellow Pine (SYP)
lumber or timber for use in salt or brackish water environments shall be done with Chromated
Copper Arsenate (CCA).
955-2.2 Above Ground or Ground Contact and Fresh Water Immersion Use: The
treating of SYP lumber and timber for above ground or ground contact and fresh water
immersion applications, shall be done with, Copper Azole-Type C (CA-C), Alkaline Copper
Quat-Type D (ACQ-D), or CCA, with the following exceptions:
Treatment of the wood products of the pedestrian bridges, wood rails at buildings
or rest areas, and fence posts shall be done either with, Copper Azole-Type C (CA-C), or
Alkaline Copper Quat-Type D (ACQ-D).
955-3 Process.
All timber and lumber items shall be treated in accordance with Standard T1 of the
AWPA manual.
SECTION 960
POST-TENSIONING COMPONENTS
960-1 Description.
This Section covers all post-tensioning (PT) components remaining in a completed
structure, including temporary erection PT left in-place and permanent PT for design capacity.
Manufacturers seeking approval of PT systems for inclusion on the Structures Design
Office (SDO) list of Approved Post-Tensioning Systems must use materials and components
meeting requirements of this Section and Section 462. Submit a complete PT System Application
Package including component drawings, system drawings, and test reports from a certified
laboratory (or laboratories), as defined in 960-3.1, to the SDO for review, acceptance and
inclusion on the list of Approved Post-Tensioning Systems.
Any marked variations from original test values or any evidence of inadequate field
performance of a PT system, will result in the PT System being removed from the list of
Approved Post-Tensioning Systems.
960-1.1 Material References:
Meet the requirements of this Section and the following:
Epoxy Compounds* ............................................Section 926
Bar (post-tensioning) ..........................................Section 933
Duct Filler for Post Tensioned Structures*.........Section 938
Reinforcing Steel (mild) .....................................Section 415
Parallel Wire (post-tensioning) ...........................Section 933
Strand (post-tensioning) ......................................Section 933
*Use products listed on the Department’s Approved Product List (APL).
Table 2.2.1.7-2
“O”-Rings and Compression Seal Material Properties
(cross section diameter or thickness > 0.25 in)
Mechanical Properties
Shore hardness, ASTM D2240 30-60
Tensile strength, ASTM D412 600 psi min.
Compression Set Method B 22 hours @ 257° F, ASTM D395 60%
962-1.2 Testing: For structural steel subjected to tensile stress used for main load-
carrying members or components (as defined in Section 460), meet the ASTM A709 impact test
requirements for non-fracture and fracture critical tension components as specified in the
Contract Documents. Meet the requirements for Zone 1 (Minimum Service Temperature 0ºF).
If not specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, provide structural steel in
accordance with ASTM A709 requirements for non-fracture and fracture critical tension
components as directed by the Engineer.
SECTION 970
MATERIALS FOR RAISED RETROREFLECTIVE PAVEMENT
MARKERS AND BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE
RPM Class
Class Description Expected Normal Service ASTM Surface Designation
A Temporary marker Up to six months none
B Permanent marker Long life H, hard abrasion resistant lens
Temporary, flexible - Monodirectional yellow marker
D One month
retroreflective tabs Bi-directional yellow marker
The nighttime chromaticity for yellow materials shall fall within the box created
by the following coordinates:
971-3.3.1 Set To Bear Traffic Time: The paint shall set to bear traffic in not
more than two minutes.
971-3.3.2 Abrasion Resistance: Test four samples using a Taber Abrader. The
paint shall be applied to specimen plates using a drawdown blade having a clearance of 20 mils.
Clean with a soft brush and weigh each sample. Abrade samples for 1,000 cycles with a
combined load of 500 g (arm plus auxiliary weight) on each arm and CS-10 wheels. Clean the
971-4.3.1 Set To Bear Traffic Time: The paint shall set to bear traffic in not
more than ten minutes.
971-4.3.2 Abrasion Resistance: Test four samples using a Taber Abrader. The
paint shall be applied to specimen plates using a drawdown blade having a clearance of 20 mils.
Air dry each sample until fully cured based on the manufacturers product recommendation.
Clean with a soft brush and weigh each sample. Abrade samples for 1,000 cycles with a
combined load of 500 g (arm plus auxiliary weight) on each arm and CS-10 wheels. Clean the
samples with a soft brush and weigh again. The average weight loss for the four plates shall not
exceed 75 mg per plate.
971-4.3.3 Retroreflectivity: The white and yellow pavement markings shall
attain an initial retroreflectance of not less than 450 mcd/lx·m2 and 300 mcd/lx·m2, respectively.
The retroreflectance of the white and yellow pavement markings at the end of the 18 month
period shall not be less than 150 mcd/lx·m2.
971-4.4 Application Properties: Application properties shall meet the requirements of
Section 710.
971-4.5 Packaging and Labeling: The paint shall be placed in 55 gallon open-end steel
drums with a re-usable multi-seal sponge gasket or 275 gallon Intermediate Bulk Container
(IBC). No more than 50 gallons of paint shall be placed in any drum or 250 gallons in any IBC to
allow for expansion during transport and storage. Clearly mark the containers with the weight in
pounds per gallon, the volume of materials in units of gallons.
The alkyd/maleic binder must consist of a mixture of synthetic resins (at least one
synthetic resin must be solid at room temperature) and high boiling point plasticizers. At least
one-half of the binder composition must be 100% maleic-modified glycerol of rosin and be no
less than 15% by weight of the entire material formulation.
971-5.3 Glass Spheres: The glass spheres in the intermix shall consist of 50% Type 1
and 50% Type 3 and meeting the requirements of this Section.
971-5.4 Sharp Silica Sand: Sharp silica sand used for bicycle markings and pedestrian
crosswalk lines shall meet the following gradation requirements:
971-5.5.1 Set To Bear Traffic Time: The thermoplastic shall set to bear traffic in
not more than two minutes.
971-5.5.2 Retroreflectivity: The white and yellow pavement markings shall
attain an initial retroreflectance of not less than 450 mcd/lx·m2 and not less than 350 mcd/lx·m2,
respectively. The retroreflectance of the white and yellow pavement markings at the end of the
three year APL testing period shall not be less than 250 mcd/lx·m2.
971-8.3 Physical Requirements: Test laboratory samples in accordance with ASTM and
also meet the following criteria:
971-8.3.1 Set To Bear Traffic Time: The material shall set to bear traffic in not
more than two minutes.
971-8.3.2 Abrasion Resistance: Test four samples using a Taber Abrader. The
material shall be applied to specimen plates using a drawdown blade having a clearance of
15 mils. Clean with a soft brush and weigh each sample. Abrade samples for 1,000 cycles with a
combined load of 500 g (arm plus auxiliary weight) on each arm and CS-10 wheels. Clean the
samples with a soft brush and weigh again. The average weight loss for the four plates shall not
exceed 60 mg per plate.
971-8.3.3 Retroreflectivity: The white and yellow pavement markings shall
attain an initial retroreflectance of not less than 450 mcd/lx·m2 and not less than 350 mcd/lx·m2,
respectively. The retroreflectance of the white and yellow pavement markings at the end of the
three year period shall not be less than 150 mcd/lx·m2.
971-8.4 Application Properties: Application properties shall meet the requirements of
Section 709.
971-8.5 Packaging and Labeling: The two reactive component material shall be placed
in 55 gallon open-end steel drums with a re-usable multi-seal sponge gasket or 275 gallon
Intermediate Bulk Container (IBC). No more than 50 gallons of material shall be placed in any
drum or 250 gallons in any IBC to allow for expansion during transport and storage. Clearly
mark the containers with the volume of materials in units of gallons and the product name.
The alkyd/maleic binder must consist of a mixture of synthetic resins (at least one
synthetic resin must be solid at room temperature) and high boiling point plasticizers. At least
one-half of the binder composition must be 100% maleic-modified glycerol of rosin and be no
less than 15% by weight of the entire material formulation.
971-9.3 Retroreflective Elements: The reflective elements in the intermix shall be
determined by the manufacturer and identified for the APL.
971-9.4 Physical Requirements: Laboratory samples shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM D4960 and shall meet the following criteria:
971-9.4.1 Set To Bear Traffic Time: When applied at the temperatures and
thickness specified by Section 701, the baseline material shall set to bear traffic in not more than
two minutes. The bumps shall set to bear traffic in not more than 10 minutes at ambient air
temperatures of 80ºF or less and in not more than 15 minutes for ambient air temperatures
exceeding 80ºF.
971-9.4.2 Retroreflectivity: The white and yellow pavement markings shall
attain an initial retroreflectance of not less than 300 mcd/lx·m2 and not less than 250 mcd/lx·m2,
respectively. The retroreflectance of the white and yellow pavement markings at the end of the
three year period shall not be less than 150 mcd/lx·m2.
972-1 Description.
Recycled plastic products shall include certified test reports from an approved
independent test laboratory that shows the material meets all specifications herein and the
manufacturer shall certify the following:
1. The source of the recycled plastic waste, including the state (FL, GA, etc.) from
which the recycled plastic was obtained, and type of waste (consumer or industrial).
2. The total percent of recycled plastic in the final product.
972-2 Definitions.
972-2.1 Recycled Plastic: Those plastics composed of post-consumer material or
recovered industrial material only, or both, that may or may not have been subjected to
additional processing steps designed to afford products such as regrind or reprocessed or
reconstituted plastics.
972-2.2 Post-Consumer Materials: Those products generated by a business or
consumer that have served their intended end use and that have since been separated or diverted
from solid waste for the purpose of collection, recycling, and re-disposition.
972-2.3 Recovered Material: Materials and by-products that have been recovered or
diverted from solid waste, but not including those materials and by-products generated from, and
commonly used within, an original manufacturing process.
972-3 Materials.
The materials used for recycled plastic products shall consist of a minimum of 70% by
weight of recycled plastic. The products shall exhibit good workmanship and shall be free of
burns, discoloration, contamination, and other objectionable marks or defects which affect
appearance or serviceability. Only chemicals, including fillers and colorants, designed to inhibit
photo degradation, biological/biochemical decomposition, insect infestation, or burning will be
permitted to enhance durability. The use of sufficient additives to inhibit photo degradation over
the lifetime of the product is required.
972-4 Sampling.
One additional product per 1,000, or a minimum of one per order shall be included in the
order for Department testing.
973-1 Description.
This Section covers material and fabrication requirements for fiber reinforced polymer
(FRP) composite structural shapes.
Table 4-1
Required Physical Properties - VIP FRP
Table 4-2
Required Mechanical Properties - VIP FRP Shapes
Property Minimum Requirement Test Method
Longitudinal Tensile Strength 30,000 psi
Transverse Tensile Strength 7,000 psi
ASTM D3039
Longitudinal Tensile Modulus 3 x 106 psi
Transverse Tensile Modulus 0.8 x 106 psi
Longitudinal Compressive Strength 30,000 psi
Longitudinal Compressive Modulus 3 x 106 psi ASTM D6641
Transverse Compressive Modulus 1 x 106 psi
In-Plane Shear Strength 8,000 psi ASTM D5379
In-Plane Shear Modulus 0.4 x 106 psi ASTM D5379
Interlaminar Shear Strength 3,500 psi ASTM D2344
Table 4-3
Required Mechanical Properties -VP FRP Plates
Property Minimum Requirement Test Method
Longitudinal Tensile Strength 20,000 psi
Transverse Tensile Strength 7,000 psi
ASTM D3039
Longitudinal Tensile Modulus 1.8 x 106 psi
Transverse Tensile Modulus 0.7 x 106 psi
Longitudinal Compressive Strength 24,000 psi
Transverse Compressive Strength 15,500 psi
ASTM D6641
Longitudinal Compressive Modulus 1.8 x 106 psi
Transverse Compressive Modulus 1 x 106 psi
Longitudinal Flexural Strength 30,000 psi
Transverse Flexural Strength 13,000 psi
ASTM D790
Longitudinal Flexural Modulus 1.6 x 106 psi
Transverse Flexural Modulus 0.9 x 106 psi
In-Plane Shear Strength 6,000 psi
ASTM D5379
In-Plane Shear Modulus 0.4 x 106 psi
Interlaminar Shear Strength 3,500 psi ASTM D2344
Table 5-1
RTSS Matrix
Property Test Method Requirement
Density ASTM D792 48–63 pcf
2 hrs: <1.0% weight increase
Water Absorption ASTMD570
24 hrs: <3.0% weight increase
Brittleness ASTM D746 Brittleness temperature < minus 40°C
ASTM D256,
Impact Resistance >0.55 ft-lbs/in
Method A (Izod)
Hardness ASTM D2240 44-75 (Shore D)
ASTM D4329 500 hours <10% change in Shore D
Ultraviolet
UVA Durometer Hardness
Weight Loss: <0.02 oz
Abrasion ASTM D 4060 Cycles = 10,000
Wheel = CS17
Table 5-2
TSS Matrix
Property Test Method Requirement
Density ASTM D792 50-65 pcf
ASTM D256
Impact Resistance > 2.0 ft-lbs/in
Method A (Izod)
Hardness ASTM D2240 44-75 (Shore D)
500 hours <10% change in Shore D
Ultraviolet ASTM D4329 (UVA)
Durometer Hardness
ASTM D756 or Sea Water: <1.5% weight increase
Chemical Resistance ASTM D543 Gasoline: <7.5% weight increase
No. 2 Diesel: <6.0% weight increase
Tensile Properties ASTM D638 3,000 psi at break min.
Static Coeffecient of Friction ASTM D2394 0.25, wet or dry min.
Nail Withdrawal or 250 lb (nail) min.
ASTM D6117
Screw Withdrawal 400 lb (screw) min.
Scant Modulus at 1% Strain ASTM D6109 150,000 psi min.
Table 5-3
Tolerances
Dimension Tolerance
Length 0/+6 inch
Width – RTSS ±1/2 inch
Width – TSS ±1/4 inch
Height – RTSS ±1/2 inch
Width – TSS ±1/4 inch
Laboratory Testing
Property Test Method Requirement
AASHTO R31 Min. Class B
Slip Coefficient
(primer only)
Blister Size = 10
Salt Fog Resistance AASHTO R31
Average Rust Creep at the Scribe ≤ 0.1 inches
Cyclic Weathering Blister Size = 10
AASHTO R31
Resistance Average Rust Creep at the Scribe ≤ 0.2 inches,
Outdoor Testing
975-5.3 System Modifications for Use on Bridge Substructure: Supply the elastomeric
coating system with a 100% acrylic aliphatic polyurethane top coating.
Laboratory Testing
Property Test Method Requirement
No visible water leaks, and if the
rear face of the block is damp, the
Resistance to Wind Driven
ASTM D6904 average gain in weight of the
Rain
three 8”x16”x2” blocks must be
less than 0.2 lb.
Freeze thaw resistance AASHTO R31 No disbondment
Submit four fiber cement test panels and a 1 quart wet sample of each component
of each coating incorporated in the total system being evaluated. Prepare test panels by applying
the finished coating at a rate of 50 plus or minus 10 square feet per gallon. In addition,
completely seal the corners of all test panels with a high build epoxy or equivalent to prevent
moisture ingress at corners and cut edges.
SECTION 981
TURF MATERIALS
981-1 General.
The types of seed and sod will be specified in the Contract Documents. All seed and sod
shall meet the requirements of the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services
and all applicable state laws, and shall be approved by the Engineer before installation.
All seed, sod and mulch shall be free of noxious weeds and exotic pest plants, plant parts
or seed listed in the current Category I “List of Invasive Species” from the Florida Exotic Pest
Plant Council (FLEPPC, http://www.fleppc.org ). Any plant officially listed as being noxious or
undesirable by any Federal Agency, any agency of the State of Florida or any local jurisdiction
in which the project is being constructed shall not be used. Any such noxious or invasive plant or
plant part found to be delivered in seed, sod or mulch will be removed by the Contractor at his
expense and in accordance with the law.
All materials shall meet plant quarantine and certification entry requirements of Florida
Department of Agriculture & Consumer Services, Division of Plant Industry Rules.
981-2 Seed.
The seed shall have been harvested from the previous year’s crop. All seed bags shall
have a label attached stating the date of harvest, LOT number, percent purity, percent
germination, noxious weed certification and date of test.
Each of the species or varieties of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate
labeled bags. During handling and storing, the seed shall be cared for in such a manner that it
will be protected from damage by heat, moisture, rodents and other causes.
All permanent and temporary turf seed shall have been tested within a period of
six months of the date of planting.
All permanent and temporary turf seed shall have a minimum percent of purity and
germination as follows:
1. All Bahia seed shall have a minimum pure live seed content of 95% with a
minimum germination of 80%.
2. Bermuda seed shall be of common variety with a minimum pure live seed
content of 95% with a minimum germination of 85%.
3. Annual Type Ryegrass seed shall have a minimum pure live seed content of
95% with a minimum germination of 90%.
981-3 Sod.
981-3.1 Types: Unless a particular type of sod is called for in the Contract Documents,
sod may be either centipede, bahia, or bermuda at the Contractor’s option. It shall be well matted
with roots. Where sodding will adjoin, or be in sufficiently close proximity to, private lawns,
other types of sod may be used if desired by the affected property owners and approved by the
Engineer.
981-3.2 Dimensions: The sod shall be taken up in commercial-size rectangles, or rolls,
preferably 12 inches by 24 inches or larger, except where 6 inch strip sodding is called for, or as
981-4 Mulch.
The mulch material shall be compost meeting the requirements of Section 987, hardwood
barks, shavings or chips; or inorganic mulch materials as approved by the Engineer; or
hydraulically applied wood fiber mulch or bonded fiber matrix (BFM) for the establishment of
turf material.
982-1 Fertilizers.
Fertilizers shall comply with the State fertilizer laws.
The numerical designations for fertilizer indicate the minimum percentages (respectively)
of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, and water-soluble potash, contained in the fertilizer.
At least 50% of the nitrogen shall be from a slow-release source.
982-2 Certification.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a certified test report from the manufacturer of
the commercial fertilizer confirming that the requirements of this Section are met. The certified
test report shall conform to the requirements of Section 6 and include test results for total
nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, water-soluble potash, and sulfur. Each certification shall
cover one batch per type for dry type fertilizer.
The water used in the grassing operations may be obtained from any approved source.
The water shall be free of any substance which might be harmful to plant growth. Effluent water
shall meet all Federal, State and local requirements.
985-1 Description.
Geosynthetic materials are used for nonstructural and structural applications and shall be
either geotextiles (woven or non-woven) or geogrids (woven or extruded) that are used for
drainage, erosion control, reinforcement, separation or stabilization.
985-2 Materials.
985-2.1 General Requirements: Unless restricted in the Plans or Specifications, the
geosynthetic material shall be a woven, non woven or extruded material consisting of long-chain
polymeric filaments or yarns such as polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester, polyamides or
polyvinylidene chloride formed into a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their
relative position to each other. The base plastic shall contain stabilizers and/or inhibitors to make
the filaments resistant to deterioration due to ultra-violet light, heat exposure and potential
chemically damaging environment. The edges of the material shall be selvaged or otherwise
finished to prevent the outer yarn from pulling away from the material and shall be free of any
treatment which may significantly alter its physical properties.
985-2.2 Physical Requirements: Each geosynthetic material shall be tested by an
independent third party in accordance with the following methods as they apply to the specific
application type. All testing and reported values, except apparent opening size (AOS), are to be
minimum average roll values in the weakest principle direction unless indicated otherwise in this
Section. Values for AOS are maximum average roll values.
Geotextile Selection
In-situ Soil Types Class for Type D1, D2, D3 Materials
% passing a No. 200 Sieve* (see Table 1.1)
< 15% a
15% to 50% b
> 50% c
> 50% with Plastic Index >7 d
*as per AASHTO T88.
Table 2
Test Methods and Requirements for Erosion Control Materials
Property/Test Method E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5
Permittivity (Sec -1)
0.05 0.05
per ASTM D4491
Grab Tensile Strength
90 90
(lbs) per ASTM D4632
Minimum UV Resistance
80% 80%
per ASTM D4355 80% @500 hours
@500 hours @150 hours
(% Retained Strength)
Wide Width Tensile
Strength **(lbs/in) 11.4 x 5.7 22.8 x 11.4 45.7 x 22.8
per ASTM D6818
75% and min.
Filtration Efficiency (%)
flow rate of
per ASTM D5141
0.3 gal/sf/min
Design Shear*** ≥2.1 psf ≥3.6 psf ≥5.0 psf
** Wide Width Tensile Strength is expressed in units of measure of lbs/in, in machine direction and cross direction as MD x CD.
*** Design Shear limits for Erosion mats must be determined by 30 minutes sustained flow in an unvegetated state as determined
by tests performed by Utah State University, Texas Transportation Institute or an independent testing laboratory approved by
the State Drainage Engineer.
985-2.3 Overlaps and Seams: Overlaps shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents for a particular
application. To reduce overlaps, the geosynthetic material may be sewn together in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Sew the seams with thread meeting the chemical
requirements and minimum seam strength requirements in Tables 1.1, 1.2 and 3.
985-2.4 Packaging and Labeling: Geosynthetics shall be packaged in a protective
covering sufficient to protect the material from temperatures greater than 140 F, sunlight, dirt,
and other debris during shipment and storage. The manufacturer’s name, product name, style
number, roll dimensions and LOT numbers must be clearly labeled on all packaging.
985-4 Applications.
985-4.1 Nonstructural:
985-4.1.1 Drainage: Select geotextile materials that meet the required
permeability and AOS based on test results on the soil or fill adjacent to the geotextile for
gradation. Materials for drainage applications must be tested in accordance with and meet the
physical requirements in 985-2.2, Table 1.1.
Drainage Applications
Design Standards
Geotextile Type Description
Index No.
985-4.1.2 Erosion Control: Materials used for erosion control applications must
be tested in accordance with and meet the physical requirements in 985-2.2, Table 2.
985-4.2 Structural:
985-4.2.1 Reinforcement, Separation and Stabilization: Materials for
reinforcement, separation and stabilization applications must be tested in accordance with and
meet the physical requirements in 985-2.2, Table 3.
987-1 Description.
All material shall be suitable for plant growth. The organic matter content of the prepared
soil layer after mixing shall be a minimum of 2.5%, a maximum of 10%, in accordance with
FM 1-T-267 and have a pH value of 4.5 or greater and less than or equal to 8.5 as determined in
accordance with FM 5-550. The organic matter content shall be created using any of the
following materials.
987-2 Materials.
Prepared soil layer materials may be obtained from either, or a combination of, the
following sources:
1. Excavation within the limits of construction on the project. Such material may
be stockpiled or windrowed on the project in areas approved by the Engineer.
2. Designated borrow pits for the project.
3. From other sources of organic soil materials provided by the Contractor.
987-2.1 Organic Soil: This may consist of muck, mucky peat and peat and shall have an
organic matter content of 30% or more if the mineral fraction is more than 50% clay, or more
than 20% organic matter if the mineral fraction has no clay.
987-2.2 Blanket Material: Meet the material classification shown on the plans and
Design Standards, Index No. 505.
987-2.3 Compost: Meet the requirements of Florida Department of Environmental
Protection Rule 62.709.550 Type Y (yard waste), Type YM (yard waste and manure), Type A
(municipal solid waste compost) or Rule 62.640.850 Type AA (composted biosolids) and have
unrestricted distribution.
987-2.3.1 Compost for use as a Soil Amendment: If the electrical conductivity
(EC) value of the compost exceeds 4.0dS (mmhos/cm) based on the saturated paste extract
method, the compost shall be leached with water prior to application.
987-2.3.2 Compost for use as a Mulch: The compost shall contain no foreign
matter, such as glass, plastic or metal shards. The compost shall be slightly coarse to coarse in
nature (over half of the solids shall be from particles 1/2 inches in size and no greater than
6 inches). Preference shall be given to compost or mulch made from uncontaminated woody
waste materials.
SECTION 990
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICE MATERIALS
990-1 General.
This Section specifies the material requirements for temporary traffic control devices.
990-3 Portable Devices (Arrow Boards, Changeable Message Signs, Regulatory Signs,
Radar Speed Display Units and Truck Mounted Changeable Message Signs).
990-3.1 General: All portable devices shall meet the physical display and operational
requirements of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) and be listed on the
Department’s Approved Product List (APL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product
shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and include certification showing that
the product meets the requirements of this Section.
1. Ensure that all assembly hardware less than 5/8 inch in diameter, including
nuts, bolts, external screws and locking washers are Type 304 or 316 passivated stainless steel.
Stainless steel bolts, screws and studs shall meet ASTM F593. Nuts shall meet ASTM F594. All
assembly hardware greater than or equal to 5/8 inch in diameter shall be galvanized. Bolts, studs,
and threaded rod shall meet ASTM A 307. Structural bolts shall meet ASTM A325.
2. The controllers and associated on-board circuitry shall meet the requirements of
the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 regulations
concerning the emission of electronic noise by Class A digital devices.
3. The controller and associated on-board circuitry shall not be affected by mobile
radio, or any other radio transmissions.
4. An operator’s manual shall be furnished with each unit.
5. All portable devices shall be permanently marked with the APL number,
manufacturer’s name or trademark, model/part number, and date of manufacture or serial
number.
For yellow retroreflectors, the specific intensity shall be 60% of the value
for white.
For red retroreflectors, the specific intensity shall be 25% of the value for
white. Reflectivity of all RPM’s shall not be less than 0.2 specific intensity any time after
installation.
990-5.1.4 Strength Requirements: Markers shall support a load of 5,000 pounds.
Three markers per lot or shipment will be randomly tested as follows:
Position the marker base down, between the flat, parallel 0.5 inch steel
plates of a compression testing machine. Place on top of the marker, a flat piece of 60 (Shore A)
durometer rubber, 6 inches by 6 inches by 0.37 inches, centered on the marker. Apply the
compressive load through the rubber to the top of the marker at a rate of 0.1 inches per minute.
Either cracking or significant deformation of the marker at any load less
than 5,000 pounds will constitute failure.
990-5.1.5 Adhesion: Use bituminous adhesive materials for bonding the markers
to the pavement that meet the requirements of Section 970 and are listed on the APL.
990-5.1.6 Removability: Ensure that the pavement marker is removable from
asphalt pavement and portland cement concrete pavement intact or in substantially large pieces,
either manually or by mechanical devices at temperatures above 40°F, and without the use of
heat, grinding or blasting.
990-5.2 Class D Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers: Class D markers
must meet the following:
990-5.2.1 Body Requirements: Markers must be made of nonferrous material.
Marker dimensions are based on an x and y axis where the y dimension is parallel to the
centerline and the x axis is 90° to the y axis.
The base must be a minimum of 4 inches along the x axis and a minimum
of 2 inches along the y axis.
The vertical wall must be a minimum of 4 inches long with a minimum
height of 2 inches and a maximum height of 3 inches with retroreflective sheeting affixed to the
upper portion of the vertical wall. The retroreflective sheeting must be a minimum of 0.25 inch
in width and extend the full length of the vertical wall.
990-5.2.2 Color Requirements: The color of the body and the retroreflective
strips must be yellow.
Characteristic Requirement
Composition: Removable Polymer Striping Tape with pre-applied adhesive
Color: White, Black or Orange
Cross-section: 0.25 in. to 0.50 in. (height) x 4 in. (wide)
Characteristic Requirement
Composition: Molded Engineered Polymer Material
Internally ballasted to a minimum of 100 lbs. to maintain position in use
Weight
without the use of adhesives or mechanical fasteners
Color: White, Black or Orange
Shape Beveled on the leading edge
Cross-section: 0.625 in. to 0.875 in. (height) x 12 in. to 14 in. (wide)
992-1 General.
992-1.1 Pole Design Criteria: The light poles and bracket arms shall be in accordance
with the requirements of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, the FDOT Structures Manual and with the
specific requirements contained in this Section.
992-1.2 Luminaires: Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled
for installation in wet locations by an OSHA recognized “Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory” (NRTL).
992-1.3 Conductors: All conductors shall be color-coded stranded copper meeting the
requirements of NEMA WC 70.
Service and circuit conductors shall be single-conductor cable Type THWN-2 and
shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
Bonding ground conductor shall have a green jacket and shall not be smaller than
No. 6 AWG.
992-1.4 Conduit: Conduit shall be used in accordance with the National Electrical Code
and as specified in the Plans. Conduit shall meet the requirements of Section 630.
992-1.5 Electrical Ground Rod: The electrical ground rods shall be 5/8 inch copper clad
steel. Electrical ground rods shall be sectional type where length exceeds 10 feet.
992-1.6 Fittings and Bends: Fittings, bends and miscellaneous hardware shall be in
accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and shall be compatible with the adjacent
conduit and materials.
992-1.7 Conductor Splices: Unless otherwise shown in the Design Standards or
authorized by the Engineer, splices shall be made with compression sleeves or split bolt
connectors. The connector shall be sealed in silicone gel that easily peels away leaving a clean
connection. The gel will be contained in a closure that when snapped around the split bolt will
provide a waterproof connection without the use of tools or taping. This closure will be
UV resistant, impact resistant and abrasion resistant.
992-1.8 Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall meet the requirements of Section 635.
992-1.9 Distribution Service Point Equipment: All electrical equipment shall be
provided with 75°C terminal lug connectors.
992-1.9.1 Service Main: Two pole 480 V, 35,000 min. AIC, solid neutral,
NEMA 4X stainless steel, enclosed circuit breaker rated for service entrance.
992-1.9.2 Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure ground
mounted per Design Standards, Index No. 17736. Dimensions shall be as necessary for
equipment inside.
992-1.9.3 Control Panel Main Disconnect: Two Pole, 480V, 35,000 AIC with
solid neutral in NEMA 1 enclosure. Number and rating of branch circuit breakers shall be as
indicated in Plans.
992-1.9.4 Lighting Contactor: Two pole, 480V electrical contactor in NEMA 1
enclosure w/HOA on cover, 120V coil and fused control power transformer.
992-1.9.5 Electrical Panel: Single Phase (Two pole), 480V, with solid neutral in
NEMA 1 enclosure.
993-2 Delineators.
993-2.1 General: Delineators shall be classified into five types: flexible post
delineators, nonflexible post delineators, high visibility median separator delineators, high
performance delineators, and barrier delineators.
993-2.2 Flexible Post Delineators:
993-2.2.1 Dimensions: The post shall have a minimum width of 3 inches facing
traffic and of such length to generally provide a height of 48 inches above the pavement surface.
993-2.2.2 Color: The post shall be opaque white. The yellowness index shall not
exceed 12 when tested in accordance with ASTM D1925 or ASTM E313. The daylight
45 degree, 0 degree luminous directional reflectance shall be a minimum of 70 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E1347.
994-1 Description.
994-1.1 General: This Section specifies the requirements for retroreflective and
nonreflective sheeting and sign panel materials and fabrication. This includes the sign sheeting
materials such as transparent and opaque process inks for retroreflective sheeting materials, vinyl
and transparent overlays.
Type VI Sheeting
Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection
(cd/foot-candle·ft2)(cd/fc·ft2)
Observation/Entrance Angle Fluorescent Pink
(degree)
0.2/-4 160
0.5/-4 100
0.2/30 100
0.5/30 40
994-2.3.3 Clear Overlay Films: Clear overlay film must be compatible with the
sign sheeting system and not delaminate or discolor for the in-service life of the system. Provide
spectrophotometer analysis indicating the luminous transmittance across the wavelength range
from 325 nm to 700 nm in accordance with ASTM D1003 Procedure B. Film shall filter less than
1.0% luminous transmittance for 325 nm to 350 nm.
994-2.3.4 Color: The fluorescent pink initial color shall meet the following x, y
chromaticity coordinates:
Fluorescent Pink 1 2 3 4
x .450 .590 .644 .536
y .270 .350 .290 .230